BE479212A - - Google Patents

Description

       

    <Desc / Clms Page number 1>
 



   Ministry of Economic Affairs and Middle Classes KINGDOM OF BELGIUM
General Directorate of Industry and Commerce, JSL
Commerce Administration
Service
Industrial and Commercial Property AD N 479.212 479 212
THE MINISTER OF ECONOMIC AFFAIRS AND MIDDLE CLASSES,
Considering the decree-law of July 8, 1946, extending, because of the events of war, the deadlines in matters of industrial property and the duration of patents for invention;
Considering the law of March 30, 1948, amending the decree-law of July 8, 1946, extending, because of the events of war, the deadlines in matters of industrial property and the duration of patents for invention.



   Reviewed the ministerial decree of 31/1/48 issuing under N 479.212, to Automatio Electric Laboratories Inc., an invention patent for: Telephone device allowing the establishment of long-distance communications from dial dials and billing for these communications.



   STOPPED :
FIRST ARTICLE. - The following recitals are inserted in ministerial decree N 479.212 of 31/1/48, after the recital "Considering the law of 24 May 1854 on patents for invention,:
Considering the decree-law of July 8, 1946, extending due to the events of war, the deadlines in matters of industrial property and the duration of invention patents, modified by the law of March 30, 1948;
Having regard to the Union Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property;
ART. 2. - This decree will be annexed to the ministerial decree referred to in article 1.



   Brussels, January 10, 1949,
IN THE NAME OF THE MINISTER:
The delegated official,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 2>

 PATENT
Telephone device allowing the establishment of long distance communications from call dials and the billing of these communications.



   The present invention relates to telephone systems and, more particularly, to an improved automatic switching apparatus for the establishment of long and medium distance long distance communications, comprising long distance tables and subscriber stations belonging to different offices and exchanges. of the system.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 3>

 



   One of the aims of the invention is to establish, in an automatic telephone system, a switching apparatus which can be controlled in a solitary manner from operator panels and from calling subscriber stations belonging to the telephone system. same exchange or to different exchanges, said selective control having the aim of establishing communications through the trunk lines of the same group;

     said withdrawing communications intended for subscriber stations requested from other exchanges *
Another object of the invention is to establish, in a telephone system of the type with multiple exchanges mentioned, a commando recording apparatus selectively, in response to the establishment of long distance calls from subscriber stations. . The purpose of said selective control is to automatically register information relating to the communication, which facilitates the billing of long-distance calls originating from the stations of interested subscribers.



   The invention also envisages obtaining, in an automatic telephony system, in which the automatic switches used for the routing of a communication are under the control of a recorder-transmitter, of an improved device automatically differing the function. the transmitter, when the communication is extended to a switching stage requiring a line search or trunk operation.



   Yet another object of the invention is the establishment of devices capable of deferring the operation of the transmitter to the control of the automatic switching apparatus, in an exchange remote from the original exchange in which the transmitter is located. .

  <Desc / Clms Page number 4>

 



   The invention contemplates, on the other hand, reestablishing an improved trunk circuit over which long distance communications from calling operator tables and calling subscriber stations can be selectively routed by the automatic switching apparatus. In said junction circuit, the control pulses and end-of-conversation annunciator signals received by the associated junction are repeated, selectively and in a suitable form, at the switching apparatus, so as to trigger signals. appropriate commands corresponding to the origin of the call.



   The invention also proposes the establishment of an improved junction circuit comprising members for delaying the operation of a recorder-transmitter switched on according to the operation of an associated switching stage, and members. additional signals ensuring the repetition of the end of conversation announcing signals received from said switching stage and their retransmission to the point of origin by the established communication,
Other peculiarities of the invention are inherent in the particular arrangement of the circuit elements of the system, elements by means of which it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned goals as well as other functional characteristics.



   The invention will be better understood, both as regards its general arrangement and its envisaged mode of operation and the other aims and advantages of said invention, from the detailed description which follows and from an examination of the appended drawings in which:
Figs ,, 1 to 4, considered together, demonstrate the general arrangement of the apparatus of a telephone system embodying the invention.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 5>

 



   Figs. 5 to 21, after suitable connection, show the details of the apparatus according to the invention, as described above in general terms.,
Fig. 22 shows how fig2. 1 to 4 should be connected to form an overview diagram of the general layout of the telephone system.



   Fig. 23 likewise shows how figs. 5 to 21 should be connected to form an overview diagram of the telephone system equipment details.



   More particularly, figs. 1 to 4, after suitable connection, schematically represent the network served by the telephone system, with the various exchanges that it comprises. Said freezes .. indicate, symbolically, part of the switchgear of the central B of the telephone system ,,
Freezes them. 5 to 8, taken together, represent the details of one of the interchange circuits provided for the automatic exchange !!, a circuit which terminates a trunk terminating at the neighboring automatic exchange C.



   Figs. 9 to 12, taken together, show the details of one of the interchange circuits provided at the automatic exchange B, which circuit terminates a trunk terminating at the remote automatic exchange D.



   Fig. 13 highlights the outline of part of the automatic exchange equipment !! and the details of one of the toll call billing apparatus belonging to said central.



   Fig. 14 represents, in general,; part of the automatic exchange switchgear B.



   Fig. 15 represents, under the same form part of the switchgear of the automatic exchange !! and details

  <Desc / Clms Page number 6>

 of one of the recorder-translators of said exchange.



   Fig. 16 highlights the outline of the assembly of the trunk switchboard in the automatic exchange B and the details of one of the transmitter control circuits of said exchange.



   Figures * 17 to 20, taken together, show details of one of the trunk line circuits of automatic exchange B, which circuit terminates a trunk line terminating at remote automatic exchange A.



   Fig. 21 shows the details of one of the local junction circles of the automatic exchange B.



     GENERAL PROVISION OF THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM.
If we refer more particularly to figs.



  1 to 4, it can be seen that the automatic telephone system serves a network comprising a remote automatic exchange A, a main automatic exchange B, a local automatic exchange 0 and the remote automatic exchange D. The remote exchange A and the exchange main B are interconnected by a number of two-way trunk lines, such as trunk line 2060. Main exchange B and local exchange 0 are connected by a number of two-way lines, such as line 500. The main exchange B and remote exchange D are interconnected by a number of two-way lines, such as line 900. A large number of subscriber lines terminate at remote exchange A and primary exchange B.

   The two exchanges considered include an automatic switchgear and a trunk board. On the other hand, the local exchange C and the remote exchange D, which also terminate a large number of subscriber lines, only include the automatic switching equipment.



   A long distance call originating at remote exchange A is routed through the switchgear

  <Desc / Clms Page number 7>

 switchgear, to the trunk panel of said remote exchange and, from there, via the automatic switchgear, to one of the trunk lines leading to the main exchange !. Said long distance call, routed in this way to the main exchange B, can be plotted by the automatic switchgear which transmits it to the trunk board of said exchange or to a subscriber line which terminates at this exchange. .

   Likewise, said long distance call thus routed to the main exchange B can be transmitted via the automatic switching apparatus of said exchange to one of the lines terminating at local exchange 0 or to one of the lines. lines terminating at the remote exchange] ,,,, In the event that said long distance call is transmitted to the local exchange C, it may be supplemented by the automatic switchgear of said local exchange and transmitted to one of the lines of subscribers that terminate at this central.

   On the other hand, in the case where said long distance call is transmitted to the remote exchange D, it can be supplemented by the automatic switching apparatus of said remote exchange and transmitted to one of the subscriber lines which terminate at this exchange. .



   A long distance call originating at the main exchange B is first routed, via the automatic switchgear, to the trunk board of said exchange and then, from there, still via the switchgear. automatic switching, to one of the trunk lines terminating at the remote exchange A. Said long distance call, thus routed to the remote exchange A, can be completed by the automatic switching apparatus and transmitted to the trunk switchboard of said remote exchange or to a subscriber line which terminates at this exchange.

   Likewise), a long distance call originating from the main exchange! and

  <Desc / Clms Page number 8>

 routed through the automatic switchgear to the trunk panel of said exchange can be transmitted, again via the automatic switchgear, to one of the lines leading to the local exchange C or to the 'one of the lines terminating at the remote exchange D. Said long distance call, if it is routed to the local exchange C, may be completed by the automatic switchgear of said local exchange and transmitted to a subscriber line which terminates to this central.

   On the other hand, if said long distance call is routed to the remote exchange D, it can be completed by the automatic switchgear of said remote exchange and transmitted to a subscriber line which terminates at this central
A long distance call originating at local exchange c is first routed through the automatic switchgear of said local exchange to one of the lines terminating at main exchange B.



  Said call can be routed, via the automatic switching apparatus, to the inter-office panel of said exchange B or to a subscriber line which terminates at this exchange. long distance call originating at the remote exchange D. is first routed through the automatic switchgear of said remote exchange to one of the lines terminating at the main exchange B, and can from there be transmitted, always via the automatic switching apparatus, to the trunk panel of said main exchange or to a subscriber line which terminates at this exchange.

   On the other hand, a long distance call originating at local exchange 0 and having to be routed to the remote exchange D, as well as a long distance call originating at exchange D and having to be transmitted to local exchange C, must be first routed

  <Desc / Clms Page number 9>

 to the interurban switchboard of the main exchange B and completed by the operator of this switchboard. *
A long distance call, originating at the main exchange B and to be transmitted to. local exchange C, is first routed through the automatic switchgear of the main exchange B, to one of the lines leading to the local exchange C.

   Said call is then completed by the automatic switching apparatus of the local exchange 0 and transmitted to one of the subscriber lines which terminate at said local exchange. A long distance call originating at the main exchange B and to be transmitted to the remote exchange D is first routed through the automatic switchgear of the central B to one of the lines. leading to the remote exchange D.



  Said call is then completed by the automatic switching apparatus du'central remote D and transmitted to 3. 'one of the subscriber lines which terminate at said remote central.



   Preferably, the main exchange B has a branch station with 10,000 lines and the subscriber lines which terminate at said station include both individual subscriber lines and shared subscriber lines. The individual subscriber lines include normal subscriber lines, subscriber lines with prohibited trunk service and subscriber lines with authorized trunk service. The shared subscriber lines are of the type with four subscriber stations. Spoken subscriber lines are laid out on a one-branch basis per extension, effectively reducing the number of lines that terminate at main exchange B.



   In this automatic telephony system of the invention, the various local calls and interurban calls authorized and the routing of which has been described previously, are established by the automatic switching device under

  <Desc / Clms Page number 10>

 control of the subscriber station equipment, equipment which includes the usual call device or dial. On the other hand, long-distance long-distance calls, as well as some of the medium-distance long-distance calls, are established by the operator of the long-distance switchboard who uses a recorder-transmitter associated with said switchboard and controlled by a set of keys.

   With regard to the calls which can be completed by a subscriber without the aid of an operator of the long distance table, the corresponding numbers can be dialed directly on the subscriber's call dial, as they are. indicated in the telephone directory. The call number of each subscriber station in the telephone system has a three-digit code and a four-digit numeric part. In particular, the call number of each subscriber station of the main exchange B has a. code formed by the three digits 8, 4 and 4.

   The call number of each subscriber station of the local exchange 0 has an identifier made up of the three digits 4, 5 and 6, and the call number of each subscriber station of the remote exchange D includes an identifier made up of the three digits. digits 2, 7 and 9. Since the shared subscriber lines of the main exchange, B are distributed on the basis of one branch pin per station, the call number of each shared subscriber line of said central includes the code formed by the three digits 8,
4 and 4 and a numeric part consisting of only four digits, no additional digits being necessary.



   The main exchange B also includes an apparatus used to automatically establish charging sheets' relating to certain authorized long distance conversations which can be established directly under the control of the calling subscriber stations, said sheets being established as soon as said conversations are terminated. In particular,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 11>

 a normal subscriber station, as well as a shared line subscriber station, connected to the main exchange B, Can control the automatic switchgear to initiate a long distance call request, either to the center !. local 0 $ or towards the remote exchange D, as indicated above.

   A file relating to said communication is automatically established at the main exchange B by the device already mentioned. Likewise, a subscriber station authorized for the medium distance service from the main exchange B can control the automatic switchgear, so as to transmit a request for long distance communication, either to the local exchange C or to the remote exchange] 2, as indicated previously. A record relating to said communication is automatically established at the main exchange B by the device, but this exclusively in the case where the mentioned interurban communication request is routed to the remote exchange D.

   In other words, the subscriber stations with authorized medium distance service from the main exchange B can set up individual long distance calls transmitted to the local exchange C at will, due to the fact that said subscriber stations are subject to a telephone service charge established on a basis different from that reserved for normal subscriber sets and subscriber sets on shared lines.

   To be more precise, normal subscriber sets and subscriber sets on shared lines are charged for Individual long distance calls on a flat-rate basis by the automatic listing machine, while subscriber sets on service authorized long distance calls are charged with regard to individual long distance calls according to the number of conversation units by said automatic card making apparatus.

   Finally, unauthorized medium-distance long-distance subscribers cannot

  <Desc / Clms Page number 12>

 can initiate medium-distance calls neither to the local exchange C, nor to the remote exchange D, without the help of the trunk switchboard operator;

   on the other hand, in the event that a long distance call intended either for the local exchange C or for the remote exchange D is initiated by a subscriber station with long distance service prohibited at the main exchange B, the automatic switching apparatus is controlled in such a way that it transmits the call to a monitoring operator position, provided for said exchange B, said monitoring operator thus being able to Inform the calling subscriber that such long distance calls cannot be routed directly without 1 * help from the operator of the trunk switchboard.



   MAIN CENTRAL EQUIPMENT B.-
The main exchange B, as more precisely indicated on figures 1 to 4, comprises an automatic switchgear serving a maximum of 10,000 connection pins, three of these pins respectively terminating the individual subscriber lines 401X, 404X and 407X which terminate respectively at the TX authorized long distance subscriber station, the TD forbidden long distance subscriber station and the normal TP subscriber station.

   Four of the pins terminating in common the shared subscriber line 410X terminate, also jointly, at the subscriber stations of shared lines TS1, TS2, TS3 and TS4. On the other hand, the switching apparatus comprises a certain number of line switches or preselectors associated individually with the subscriber lines, the preselectors 421X, 422X, 423X and 424X being respectively associated with the subscriber lines 401X. , 404X, 407X and 410X.

   The 421X preselectors, etc ... which tennis the lines of subscribers to authorized long distance service and the 422X preselectors, etc ... * which terminate the lines of subscribers with forbidden long distance service form a first

  <Desc / Clms Page number 13>

 
 EMI13.1
 group; the 426X preseleaters, etc ... which terminate the normal subscriber lines, and the 4l34X preseleaters, etc ... which terminate the shared subscriber lines, form a second group. The switchgear comprises, of even, a first group of primary selectors, such as the selector
 EMI13.2
 primary .4-41X $ accessible to the various 42lXp 422X preselectors, etc ... of the first group.

   Said switching apparatus comprises, on the other hand, a second group of primary selectors, such as the primary selector 600X, accessible to users.
 EMI13.3
 various 423X presets. 424X, etc ... of the second group.



  Each primary selector is provided with an individual finder giving access to a group of primary recorders, researchers F422X and F610X being associated, respectively,
 EMI13.4
 to primary selectors 441X and 600X <¯ The main exchange B is, moreover, provided with a group of primary recorders, such as the primary recorder 1200X, accessible to the different researchers associated individually with the primary selectors of the two groups
 EMI13.5
 mentioned, a group of recorders "translators,

   such as 1 170OXp recorder-translator and a 1600X recorder-translator splitter * The 1600X recorder-translator splitter includes an F1610X finder who can access
 EMI13.6
 to the group dtouregistrours-traductoure mentioned. Each recorder-translator has a searcher who can access the mentioned primary recorder group, the 1700X translator recorder ** including a F2290X finder who can access the mentioned primary recorder group.

   It should be emphasized here that the group of primary recorders is larger than the group of recorders-translators, in order to save equipment, the connection and assembly of a primary recorder being much simpler than the connection and assembly of a relatively complex recorder-translator.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 14>

 



   The main exchange B is further provided with a series of local switches comprising a number of groups of first selectors, one of said groups comprising the first selector 501X, a number of groups of second selectors, one said groups comprising the second selector 502X, a number of individual connector groups, two of said groups comprising, respectively, the individual connectors 525X, and 525'X, a number of special service selectors, such as the service selector special 503X, and a number of shared connector groups, four of said groups comprising, respectively, the 521X, 522X, 523X and 524X shared connectors. A 114X-117X supervisory operator position is provided at main exchange B.

   It terminates four trunk groups, which makes it easy to identify the calls routed by the respective trunk groups to said operator position with respect to their origin, in a manner which will be explained in more detail below. .



   The main exchange B has, on the other hand, an apparatus for establishing records which comprises, in addition to a number of recorder-translators, such as the 1700X recorder-translator, a number of relay groups. establishment of plugs, 1 $ one of said groups including relay 800X. a 2900X detector, a number of print controllers including the 4200X, a 4600X print controller dispatcher. a 3900X device indicating the date and time of communications, an intermediate 5000X print control device, a card printer,

   5230X long distance communications and a 5240X printer-recorder. The 4600X Print Controllers Distributor features an F4640X Finder that can access

  <Desc / Clms Page number 15>

 print control devices. Each print controller has a finder who can access the card making relays.

   For example, the 4200X print controller has the F4210X finder, which can access 800X plug-in relays, etc. The 5000X intermediate print controller has an F 5010X finder. can access the 4200X, otc ... print control devices and which is directly linked to the 5230X long distance call sheet printer and the 5240X printer-recorder, On the other hand, the device indicating the date and time of 3900X communications is linked in common to the 4200X print controllers.,

       etc .. *
The main exchange B comprises a group of ordinary relays, among which the ordinary relay 451X and a group of outgoing selectors, among which the outgoing selector 511X, the ordinary repeaters 451, etc ..... being individually associated with the selector departure 511X, etc ... Likewise, groups of outgoing interurban selectors are provided, one of said groups comprising the outgoing interurban selector 513X.

   Said groups of outgoing trunk selectors are individually associated with the different groups of plug-in relays and individually linked to each plug-in relay of said associated groups. For example, the 800X setup relay is wired directly to the outgoing 513X trunk selector.



   The two-way trunk lines which connect remote office A to the main exchange B terminate in trunk circuits in the two exchanges mentioned. For example, trunk line 2060 ends with trunk line circuit 170 at the central office

  <Desc / Clms Page number 16>

 B. Likewise, the two-way lines which connect the local exchange 0 and the main exchange B terminate, in corresponding circuits, at the two mentioned exchanges. For example, the line 500 ends with the circuit at exchange B: Likewise, again, the two-way lines which connect the remote exchange D to the main exchange B terminate at the two exchanges mentioned on corresponding circuits. For example, line 900 ends with circuit 90, at central office B.



   The main exchange B still comprises a series of trunk switches comprising a group of inbound selector-searcher junctions, said group comprising the junction formed by the arrival selector 1403 and the associated searcher 1402. The junction searchers have access to the junction. intercity line circuits mentioned. For example, seeker 1402 has access to junction 1700 which ends at trunk line circuit 170. A junction distributor 1401 is still provided in order to reserve those of the incoming selector-searcher junctions which are free for line circuits. long distance through which calls arrive.



  In addition, the arrival selectors 1403, etc., have access to groups of second toll selectors, two of said groups comprising, respectively, the second toll selectors 1404 and 1411 The second toll selectors, among which the second toll selector 1404 , have access to groups of third long distance selectors; one of said groups comprising the third trunk selector 1406. The group of third trunk selectors, among which the third trunk selector 1406, provides access to the two groups of trunk circuits comprising, respectively, the trunk circuits 50 and 90.

   In particular, the third trunk selector 1406 gives access to the junctions 880A and 1280A, which lead, respectively, to the trunk circuits 50 and 90. The group of second selectors

  <Desc / Clms Page number 17>

 long distance, among which the second long distance selector 1411, gives access to other groups of third long distance selectors, one of said groups comprising the third long distance selector 1413.

   The group of third interurban selectors, among which the third interurban selector 1413, gives access to groups of interurban connectors, generally indicated in 1414 ,, The different groups of interurban connectors 1414 have access to the different groups of subscriber lines, including the 401X, 404X, 407X and 410X subscriber lines.



   Furthermore, the series of interurban switches of the main exchange B comprises a group of arrival selectors, including the arrival selector 1421. Said selectors are individually connected to groups of trunk circuits comprising, in particular, the junction circuit 90.



  For example, the arrival selector 1431¯ is directly connected by the junction 1270 to the trunk circuit 90. Said series of trunk switches has yet another group of arrival selectors, among which the arrival selector 1422. Said selectors are individually connected to groups of trunk circuits, including, in particular, the 'trunk circuit 50. The arrival selector 1422 is connected directly through the junction 870 to the trunk circuit 50.



  The groups of arrival selectors comprising, in particular and respectively, the arrival selectors 1421 and 1422, have access to the groups of first selectors, one of which comprises, in particular, the first selector 501X. The two groups of primary selectors, comprising, in particular and respectively, the primary selectors 441X and 600X also provide access to the group of first selectors, including the first selector 501X. Originating long distance selector groups, such as the 513X originating long distance selector, have

  <Desc / Clms Page number 18>

 access to two junction groups leading, respectively, to the two groups of junction circuits, comprising, in particular and respectively, the junction circuits 50 and 90.

   In particular, the outgoing trunk selector 513X gives access to the two junctions 880B and 1280B which lead, respectively, to the junction circuits 50 and 90 belonging to the two groups mentioned. The first group of selectors: primary, comprising, in particular, the primary selector 411X, gives access to the group of ordinary repeater relays including in particular the ordinary repeater 451X, while said group of ordinary repeaters is not accessible to the second group of primary selectors which comprises in particular the primary selector 600X.The group of starting selectors, including the starting selector 511X, gives access to the junction group which ends in the group of junction circuits, comprising, in particular, the junction circuit 50.

   



  More exactly, the starting selector 511X gives access to the 880B junction which ends at the junction circuit 50. The groups of primary selectors comprising, in particular and respectively, the primary selectors 441X and 600X, give access to the group of special service selectors, among which the 503X special service selector, The special service selector group, among which the 503X special service selector, provides access to the trunk groups that lead to the 114X-117X monitoring operator position. as indicated previously.



   The main exchange! comprises on the other hand another group of second trunk selectors, including the second trunk selector 1412 which can access both the group of third trunk selectors, comprising in particular the third trunk selector 1406 and the group of trunk lines , including

  <Desc / Clms Page number 19>

 in particular the trunk line circuit 170. To be precise, the second trunk selector 1412 can access the junction 1770 which terminates in the trunk line circuit 170.

   The second interurban selectors, which in particular include the second interurban selector 1411, are individually connected to a group of local junction circuits, notably comprising the local junction circuit 210, arranged at the main exchange B. For example, the second interurban selector 1411 is individually connected by junction 2195 to the local junction circuit 210.



   On the other hand, the main exchange. !!. has an interurban table !!! with 8 operator positions; position number 1 being shown schematically. Each operator position on the Interurban switchboard 11Y comprises an apparatus substantially identical to that provided for the operator position number 1 Said apparatus comprises a position circuit 18Y, a junction distributor 19Y and a transmitter control circuit 20Y,

   these last two devices being connected to said position. The transmitter control circuit 20Y is itself controlled by a closed set 22Y arranged in front of the operator position considered. Said circuit is connected to a device 21Y which comprises a pulse transmitter 21AY and a digit recorder 21BY.



  The operator position number 1 is, moreover, provided with several junctions which belong to it individually.



  Any of said junctions may be connected by junction distributor 19Y to position circuit 18Y, said junctions each comprising an answer switch and a call switch. One of the junctions! .2 !, individually belonging to operator position number 1, is shown schematically. It includes a 16Y answer switch and 17Y call switch. The junctions of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 20>

 various operator positions of the trunk switchboard 11Y include part of the series of trunk switches.



  Said series of switches further comprises a group of deferred call selectors comprising, in particular. the deferred call selector 47Y. The call switches of the various links of all the operator positions of the trunk switchboard 11Y, as well as the deferred call selectors, have access to the group of second trunk selectors, including in particular the second trunk selector 1412, to the groups of local junction circuits, among which the local junction circuit 210, and to a group of intermediate junctions * The group of intermediate junctions ends individually on a group of intermediate junction circuits ** including in particular the intermediate junction circuit 24Y.

   Said intermediate trunk circuits are themselves accessible to the answering switch of the various trunk lines, at all the operator positions of the trunk board 11x. Said groups of intermediate junction circuits, among which the intermediate junction circuit 24Y, are provided with a trunk position distributor 14Y associated with the position circuits 18Y, etc.

   to the respective operator positions on the trunk switchboard 11Y,
The response switches of the various junctions of all the operator positions of the interurban panel 11Y, have, moreover, access to a group of incoming junction circuits, including in particular the incoming junction circuit 25Y. , said circuits being themselves accessible to the group of second long distance selectors, including the second long distance selector 1404.

   In addition, the answer switches of the indicated junctions have access to a group of direct traffic junctions, which includes in particular the direct traffic junction circuit 23Y and which is itself accessible, on the one hand, to two groups of arrival selectors comprising,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 21>

   respectively and in particular, the arrival selectors 1421 and 1422 and, on the other hand, to the two groups of primary selectors, comprising respectively and in particular the primary selectors 441X and 600X.

   The group of incoming junction circuits, which includes in particular the incoming junction circuit 25Y and the group of direct traffic junction circuits, including in particular the direct traffic junction circuit 23Y, are connected to a starting circuit common 12Y, itself connected, on the one hand, to a position distributor 13Y and, on the other hand, to the various operator positions of the trunk switchboard 11Y. In addition, the position distributor 13Y is associated with the position circuit 1; 8T, etc., provided for the different operator positions of the trunk switchboard 11Y.



   As regards the trunk switchboard 11Y, it will be noted that at each operator position, the associated junction distributor automatically controls the connection of the free junctions to the corresponding position circuit. For example, at operator position number 1, the junction distributor 19Y automatically connects the various junctions 15Y, etc., to the position circuit 18Y. The position distributor 13Y is designed in such a way that it ensures the selection in a predetermined order of the free operator positions in the trunk board 11Y. Said distributor is controlled by the common starting circuit 12Y, itself controlled by the groups of incoming junction circuits and direct traffic junction circuits.

   More particularly, when a call is on hold in any of the mentioned trunk groups, the calling trunk circuit initiates the operation of the common start circuit 12Y. At this moment the common starting circuit 12Y ensures the routing of the call up to

  <Desc / Clms Page number 22>

 that of the operator positions of the trunk switchboard 11Y, the selection of which was made by the distributor of position 13Y. More exactly, it is the junction of the operator position - previously selected by the associated junction distributor which is used.

   For example, in the case where the operator position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11Y is selected by the distributor of position 13Y to answer the call, an individual trunk at said position, previously selected by the trunk distributor 19Y , namely Junction 15Y, can be used. In this case, the response switch 16Y of the junction 15Y selected by the junction distributor 19Y operates to seek the calling junction circuit, which is indicated to it by the common start circuit 12Y and the accessible individual calling junction circuit. said starting circuit.



   It will further be observed that the answering switch of each junction for each operator position of the trunk board 11Y can also access the group of differed call selectors and, in particular, the deferred call selector 47Y.



   At the main exchange B, the group of first selectors among which the first selector 501X, can access the group of second selectors and, in particular, the second selector 502X, which can in turn access, on the one hand, the two groups of connectors individual, comprising respectively and in particular the individual connectors 525X and 525'X and, on the other hand, to the four groups of shared connectors, comprising in particular and respectively the shared connectors 521X, 522X, 523X and 524X. The first group of individual connectors including in particular the 525X individual connector, gives access to one hundred individual lines and,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 23>

 in particular, to individual 401X and 404X subscriber lines.

   The second group of individual connectors; among which the individual 525'X connector gives access to one hundred
 EMI23.1
 individual subscriber lines a and in particular to the individual subscriber line 407X.

   Each of the four groups of shared connectors, comprising, respectively and in particular,
 EMI23.2
 the shared connectors 2, 522X, 533X and 524X, can% access 100 shared subscriber lines and], 'in particular, to the shared subscriber line 4l0X * For example, the shared 41 OX subscriber line is accessible to the four shared connectors 531X, 538X, 523X and 524: xe which are designed to transmit ringing current at the respective frequencies of 66, 50, 33 and 16 periods per second.



   The 2900X detector can access all subscriber lines which terminate at central office B. Said detector is associated in common with the various records.
 EMI23.3
 treurs-tradaotearal700X, oto autro part, all print control devices, such as 4200X, are accessible to the print control device dispatcher.
 EMI23.4
 pressure 4600X and have access to all the relays for establishing long-distance information sheets, such as SOOXP etc.



  On the other hand, all print control devices such as 4 & 00X are accessible to the intermediate print control device 5000X. 'Moreover ;, the intermediate 5000X print control device is directly connected to the printer of long distance communications cards
 EMI23.5
 5230x and the 5mz printer-recorder, In addition the 3900X date and time indicator system is associated in
 EMI23.6
 common with all ilpresalon controllers, such as 4200X.

   
 EMI23.7
 Each subscriber station of the main exchange B is fitted with an apparatus comprising a telephone device,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 24>

 a ringing device, and a calling device, such as a dial. The call devices, provided on each subscriber station, individual normal, on each individual subscriber station with long distance service authorizes, and on the first subscriber station of each kind of four stations forming a line. shared are of conventional design and construction;

   on the other hand, the calling devices provided on each individual subscriber station with long distance prohibited service and on the second, third and fourth stations of each series of four subscriber stations forming a shared line are of special construction.



   For example, the calling device of the TD forbidden toll single subscriber station is of the special type shown and comprises, as shown in more detail in Fig. 13, in addition to a set of impulse springs 1307 , a set of coil springs 1508, In said call device, the set of pulse springs 1307 is actuated by the associated call dial and transmits a series of switching control pulses, the number of which varies. according to the number formed on said call dial.

   On the other hand, the cam spring assembly 1308 is actuated by an associated cam controlled by the call dial such that a first positive pulse is transmitted when that call dial is moved away from its position of call. rest, a second positive pulse being transmitted when it returns to said rest position.

   Accordingly, each time the call dial of this device is moved by an angle corresponding to any number, the associated cam actuates the spring set 1308 and two positive pulses are transmitted on the associated individual subscriber line 404X.
On the other hand, the call devices belonging respectively to the second station TS2, to the third station TS3 and

  <Desc / Clms Page number 25>

 at the fourth station TS4 of the group of four subscriber stations connected to the shared line 410X, are of the special type? each of said stations comprises, as shown in more detail in Figure 13, in addition to a set of impulse springs, a set of cam-controlled springs.

   In each of said calling devices, the set of pulse springs is actuated according to the rotation of the associated calling disc, which ensures the transmission of a corresponding number of switching pulses. On the other hand, the other set of springs is controlled by an associated cam, itself controlled by the call disc, in such a way that a determined number of positive pulses ensuring the identification of the station are transmitted.

   More exactly, when the disc of the calling device of the second shared line subscriber station TS2 is rotated by an angle corresponding to a number equal to or greater than 2, the associated cam actuates the set of springs 1306 of such that a single positive station indicating pulse is transmitted over the associated shared subscriber line 410X.

   Similarly, when the disc of the calling device of the third shared line subscriber station TS3 is rotated by an angle corresponding to a number equal to or greater than 2, the associated cam actuates the set of springs 1304 so that two positive station indicating pulses are transmitted on the corresponding shared subscriber line 410X. Finally, when the disk of the calling device of the fourth shared line subscriber station TS4 is rotated by an angle corresponding to a number equal to or greater than 2, the associated cam actuates the spring set 1302 so that three positive station indicator pulses are transmitted over the corresponding shared subscriber line 410X.



   With regard to the apparatus described briefly below, attention is drawn to the British patent

  <Desc / Clms Page number 26>

 565. 654 of February 12, 1945.



   Preferably, the preselectors 421X, 422X, 423X, 424X, etc. shown schematically in Figure 13, are of conventional design and construction and correspond respectively to the preselectors 421, 422, 423, 424, etc. shown. sohematically in Figure 4 of the aforementioned British patent.

   Also preferably, each of the primary selectors 441X, etc., of the first group, shown schematically in Figure 13, is identical to the corresponding primary selector 441, shown schematically in Figure 4 of said patent. On the other hand, each of the 600X primary selectors, etc. of the second group, shown schematically in FIG. 13, is identical to the corresponding primary selector, for example 600, of FIGS. 6 and 7 of said patent.



  More preferably, the researchers F442X, F610X, etc., * represented schematically in FIG. 13, are respectively identical to the corresponding researchers F442, F610, etc ... represented schematically in FIG. 4 and in more detail in FIG. Figure 6 of said patent.



   Likewise, each of the 1200X primary recorders, etc *. shown schematically in Figure 15, is preferably identical to the corresponding primary recorder, for example 1200, shown in Figures 12 to 16 of said patent. Likewise again, the recorder-translator distributor 1600X, shown schematically in FIG. 15, is preferably identical to the corresponding recorder-translator distributor 1600, shown in Figure 16 of said patent. The researchers F2290X, etc., individually associated with the recorder-translators 1700X, etc., and shown schematically in Figure 15 are likewise, preferably identical to the corresponding researchers F2290, etc. * shown in Figure 22 of said patent.

   Each of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 27>

 1700X recorders-translators, etc. shown in the phantom rectangle of Figure 15 is preferably substantially identical to the corresponding 1700-translator-recorder shown in Figures 17-28 of said patent. However, the recorder-translator 1700X comprises, in addition to the relay combination of said recorder-translator 1700, a call stop relay B1510 which operates in conjunction with said combination of relays and with the call switch S2830X. belonging to the recorder ... translator 1700X, in a way explained later in more detail.

   More preferably, the detector 2800X, shown schematically in Figure 15, is identical to the corresponding detector 2900, shown in Figures 29 to 38 of said patent. Still preferably, each of the record set-up repeaters, 800X, etc., shown in the phantom rectangle of Figure 13, is substantially identical to the corresponding record set-up repeater 800, of Figures 8 through. 11 of said patent. However, the 800X repeater includes, in addition to the relay combination of the corresponding repeater $ 800, an R1310 control relay and an R1320 call stop relay operating in conjunction with said relay combination, as discussed further below. detailed.



   Likewise, the time date 3900X shown schematically in Figure 15, is preferably identical to the corresponding time date 3900 shown in Figures 39 to 41 of said patent. Likewise again, the researchers F4210X, etc ... individually associated with the devices 4200X print control, etc. * shown schematically in Fig. 15, its% preferably identical to the corresponding researchers, such as F4210 of Fig. 42 of said patent.



  Also preferably, each of the 4200X print controllers, etc., shown schematically in FIG.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 28>

 FIG. 15, is identical to the corresponding devices 4200, etc. of FIGS. 42 to 49 of said patent, Still preferably, the print control device distributor 4600X, shown schematically in FIG. 15, is identical to the corresponding dispenser 4600, shown in figure 46 of said patent * The intermediate print control device 5000X shown schematically in figure 15, is also preferably identical to the corresponding device 5000 of figures 50 and 51 of said patent.



   More preferably, the 5230X card printer, shown schematically in Figure 15, is identical to the corresponding 5230 printer of Figure 52 of said patent. More precisely, the mechanical construction and arrangement of the 5230 card printer includes an automatic typewriter of the type known as an "electromatic" type previously used in this technique *
The 5240X printer-recorder shown schematically in Figure 15 is preferably identical to the corresponding device 5240 of Figure 52 of said patent.



  Said printer-recorder may be in the form of an automatic typewriter of the above-mentioned "electromatio" type 14. The 5240X recorder-printer is mounted so as to be able to be controlled from any of the recording devices. Print control 4200X etc ... for the establishment of a record sheet of the type shown in Figures 55 and 61 of said patent. Said sheet contains the recording of all the information relating to each medium-distance long-distance call transmitted from the main exchange B and whose charge sheet must be printed automatically.

   More precisely, the 5240X printer-recorder prints on the recording sheet, for each call of the type indicated, a line presenting the following information t

  <Desc / Clms Page number 29>

 
1) Month, day, hour and minute of the end of the conversation.



   2) Three-digit code and four-digit numeric part of the calling subscriber's call number.



   3) Three-digit code and four-digit numeric part of the requested subscriber's call number
4) Duration of the conversation in minutes.



   5) Charging base applicable to the conversation.



   6) Nature of the service used by the deman- euro subscriber
7) Identification numbers of recorder-translator, record-making repeater and print control device used for setting up
 EMI29.1
 sow of communication and command: The 5240X printer-recorder
The 5230X card printer is mounted and arranged such that it can be controlled from any of the 4200X print controllers. etc. *. * through the intermediary device 5000X so as to print and prepare files of the type shown in Figures 56 to 60 and 62 of said patent.

   Such a file must be established automatically with the recording of all the information necessary for each long-distance medium-distance call sent from the main exchange B. More exactly, the 5230X file printer establishes, for each communication of this type, an individual file containing the following information spread over five lines
1. Month, date, hour, ot minute of the end of the conversation,
2. Three-digit code and four-digit numeric part of the calling subscriber's call number,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 30>

 
3. Three-digit code and four-digit numeric part of the called subscriber's call number.



   4. Duration of the conversation in minutes, units of charge applicable to the conversation and nature of the service used by the calling subscriber.



   5. Base chosen for charging (flat rate or. According to the number of conversation units).



   All first 501X selectors, etc ... all second 502X selectors, etc. *, all individual 525X, 525'X, etc ..., all selectors, 503X special services, etc ..., all shared line connectors
521X, 522X, 523X, 524X, etc ..., shown schematically in Figure 13, correspond, respectively, to the devices bearing the same reference numbers and shown schematically in Figure 5 of said patent All these devices are of the Sipping type . It should be noted that the 503X special service selector is of the Strowger type with automatic return to the rest position.

   Further, the 114X-117X surveillanoe operative position, shown schematically in Figure 13, corresponds to the 114-117 position shown schematically in Figure 5 of said patent. Said position comprises the conventional apparatus for answering, calling and possibly routing communications, according to a well-known arrangement.



   The distributor-junctions 1401, shown schematically in FIG. 14, is preferably of conventional mounting and arrangement. All associated searcher-arrival selector junctions, for example the junction with seeker 1402 and arrival selector
1403 shown in Figure 14, are of the Strowger type.



   All second 1404 long distance selectors,
1411, 1412, etc ..., all third long distance selectors
1406, 1413, etc ..., all arrival selectors 1421, 1422,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 31>

 
 EMI31.1
 etc ...)) and all the groups of interuba1ns connectors, all shown schematically in FIG. 14, are preferably also of the Strowger type. Likewise, selectors
 EMI31.2
 outgoing long distance 9 513X etc ...; shown ach- matically in figure 14, and corresponding to the selectors
 EMI31.3
 Outgoing long distance calls .2 !!., 515, etc., shown diagrammatically in FIG. 5 of said patent, are also of the Strowger type.
 EMI31.4
 



  The a51X standard repeaters, etc ..., shown schematically in figure 14, correspond to the repeaters
 EMI31.5
 ordinary 451, etcoeop shown schematically in Figure 4 of said patent; they are substantially identical to the 80OX9 plug-in repeaters etce, oo However, the regular repeater 4; SIX is simpler in assembly and layout than the 800X plug-in repeater, since said 451X regular repeater does not support card information recording and related functions of the 800X card repeater, as explained in more detail below.
 EMI31.6
 



  The Interurban switchboard 1f !, shown sohômatl- ment in FIG. 16 comprises an operator position number which itself comprises the position circuit 18Y, a distributor of associated junctions 19Y and a circuit
 EMI31.7
 emission command d t:

  1 impulsiona corresponding 30Y, The control circuit 20Y is itself controlled by a closed set 22Y provided at said operator position and connected to a
 EMI31.8
 21yq pulse-emitter-digit recorder apparatus which included a 21 ± Y pulse transmitter and a 21BY digit recorder, all these devices being shown diagrammatically in figure 16. The control circuit 20Y
 EMI31.9
 further comprises an auxiliary bonding relay B1610 associated with said combination of relays, as explained below in more detail. The 22Y key set is of construction

  <Desc / Clms Page number 32>

 and classic layout.



   Each of the delayed call selectors 47Y, etc. **, shown schematically in Figure 16, is of the Strowger type.



   Preferably, each of the trunk line circuits of the main exchange B, which terminate the trunk lines terminating at the remote exchange A, is identical to the trunk line circuit 170 which comprises, as shown in more detail in FIGS. 17 to 20, the repeaters associated 2050 and 2030 and a group of relays comprising an R1710 starting relay, an R1720 cut-off relay, an R1730 sticking relay, an R 1740 digit relay, an R 1750 simplex relay, an R 1760 auxiliary or slave simplex relay, an R 1770 occupancy or loop selection relay, an R 1810 control relay, an R 1820 repeater relay, an R 1830 control relay, an R 1840 auxiliary or slave monitoring relay, an end of conversation R 1850, an R 1860 switching relay,

   an R 1870 control relay, an R 1875 end of conversation relay, an R 1880 loop pulse relay, an R 1890 simplex pulse relay, a B 1900 control relay, a selection or occupancy relay R 1910, one end of conversation relay R 1920, one control relay R 1930, three requested subscriber callback relays R 1940, R 1950 and R 1960, three control relays R 1970, R 1980 and R 1990, a connection relay on simplex R 2010, a switching relay R 2020 and a signaling relay R 2040, all these relays being mounted and arranged in a manner set out below in a more detailed form.
Preferably, each of the circuits of the main exchange 1, terminating the medium-distance lines leading to the local exchange C is identical to the circuit 50 which comprises,

   

  <Desc / Clms Page number 33>

 as shown in more detail in Figures 5 to 8, a repeater 630 and a relay group comprising a current reversal relay R 505, a control relay R 510, an end of conversation relay R 520 a relay connection between trunk lines or trunk relay R 530, one trunk relay R 540, one end of conversation relay R 610, one auxiliary digit relay R 620, one shunt relay R 640, one switching relay R 650, one relay connection on R 660 simplex, an auxiliary or slave interurban relay R 670, an R 680 control relay, an R 710 simplex impulse relay, an R 720 switching relay, an R 730 battery reversing relay, a R 740 response relay,

   one R 750 differential relay, one line relay R 760, one sticking relay R 770 ;, one digit relay R 810, one sticking relay R 820, one line relay R 83D, one busy relay R 840. , an R 850 interurban selection relay and an R 860 local selection relay; all of these relays being mounted and arranged in a manner set forth below in more detail.



   Preferably, each of the circuits of the main exchange B terminating the lines leading to the remote exchange D is identical to the circuit 90 which comprises, as shown in more detail in Figures a to 12, a repeater 910 and a group of relays comprising a relay delay R 920, one interurban relay R 925, one interurban relay R 930, one end-of-talk relay R 935, one stop relay R 940, one switching relay R 950, connection on-relay on simplex R 1010 an R 1020 command relay;

     an R 1030 digit relay, an R 1040 auxiliary or slave interurban relay, an R 1050 sticking or holding relay, an il 1060 control relay, a simplox R 1070 impulse relay, an R 1080 line relay.

   an R 1090 differential relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 34>

 one current reversal relay R 1110, one switching relay R 1120, one local selection relay R 1130, one occupancy relay R 1140, one end of auxiliary conversation relay R 1150, one relay R 1160, an R Il'10 end-of-conversation relay, an R 1180 interurban selection relay, an R 1190 digit relay, an R 1210 sticking relay, an R 1220 repeater relay, an occupancy relay R 1230, an input selection relay R 1240, a holding or sticking relay R 1250 and an input pulse relay R 1260, all of these relays being mounted and arranged in a manner set out below under a more detailed form.

   Preferably, each of the local trunk circuits of the group of second trunk selectors, comprising in particular the second trunk selector 1411 is identical to the local trunk circuit 210 shown in FIG. 21. The local trunk circuit 210 comprises a repeater 8170 and a relay group comprising an R 2110 busy tone cut-off relay, an R 2115 selection relay, an R 2120 switching relay, an R 2130 occupancy relay, an R 2140 prepayment relay, a relay call control R 2150, one call relay R 2160, - one test relay R 2175, one control relay R 2180 and one end of conversation relay R 2190,

   all these relays being mounted and arranged in a manner which will be discussed in more detail later *
 EMI34.1
 yItJIP "'NTS FROM REMOTE CENTRAL A, FROM LOCAL CENTBAL C
AND FROM THE REMOTE CENTRAL D.



   As indicated above, the remote exchange A comprises, in addition to a series of switches, an operator position, not shown, and equipment comprising a trunk line circuit 2065 shown schematically.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 35>

 in figure 20 and terminating the trunk line 2060 which connects the remote exchange A to the main exchange B.

   Likewise, the trunk line circuit 2065 is substantially identical to the trunk line circuit 170 and comprises, among other elements, a repeater 2066 and a signaling relay R 2070. As indicated previously, the local exchange C includes a series of switches and equipment comprising a junction circuit, not shown, substantially identical to the junction circuit 50 and terminating the interurban line 500 which connects the main exchange B to the local exchange C.



   On the other hand, as indicated above, the remote exchange comprises a series of switches and an apparatus comprising a junction circuit, not shown, substantially identical to the junction circuit 90 and terminating the trunk line 900 which connects the main exchange to the remote exchange. D.



   The mounting and arrangement of the various devices of the telephone system will be better understood on reading the detailed description which follows, a description relating to the operation of said devices during the routing of various calls through the various central offices.
 EMI35.1
 



  MIPEL FROM 3LOIGn A AND INEU¯Cm # mBRINCI] P
A long distance call, originating at the remote exchange A or routed to this exchange from a more distant point, is finally transmitted to the trunk table of said exchange. At this moment, the operator of said interurban panel controls the devices belonging to her position, from
 EMI35.2
 such that the automatic switchgear of the remote exchange A selects the trunk line circuit 2065 of said exchange and therefore the trunk line 2060

  <Desc / Clms Page number 36>

 which connects the remote exchange A to the main exchange B.

   This operation is based on the assumption that interurban line 2060 is free at this time; the positive potential normally applied to contacts 2067, of interurban line circuit 2065, through Impedance isolation 2072, to signal conductor C 2074 is removed and the negative resistance potential existing at contacts 2068 is removed. applied, via the impedance element 2072, to said signaling conductor C 2074.

   The non-application of the positive potential to the signaling conductor C 2074 indicates that the trunk line 2060 is free for the trunk line circuit 2065; on the other hand, applying the negative resistance potential to the signal conductor 0 2074 indicates that the trunk line 2060 is busy at the trunk line circuit 2065. Similarly, this application of a negative potential to the signal conductor C 2074 occupies, at the remote exchange A, the interurban line 2060, due to the fact that said potential of the signaling conductor 0 2074 is transmitted, by means of the intermediate winding of the signaling relay B 2070, to the starting simplex winding of repeater 2066 and, from there,

   by conductors C 2061 and 0 2062 of the interurban line 2060, at the main exchange B. At the main exchange B, the conductors 0 2061 and C 2062 of the interurban line 2060 are connected, by the windings 2053 and 2054 of the repeater 2050 to the conductor simplex C 2063.

   Said C 2063 simplex conductor is connected, via the intermediate winding of the R 2040 signaling relay and the impedance element 2045, to the earthed resistor 2045. The earthed resistor 2045 is connected to the conductor of signal C 2001 which is at this moment connected to the earth by contacts 1905, 1893, 1883 and 1879. Similarly, the lower winding of the relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 37>

 signaling R 2040 is mounted between the impedance element 2043 and the earthing resistor 2044.

   Finally, the upper winding of the R 2040 signaling relay of the trunk line circuit 170 and the upper winding of the R 2070 signaling relay of the trunk line circuit 2065 are both excitas. Consequently, at this moment, the circuit traced above is closed and the intermediate winding of the R 2070 signaling relay is energized in series with the two intermediate and lower windings of the R 2040 signaling relay. The R 2070 signaling relays and R 2040 are mounted and arranged in such a way that, when the condition indicated above persists, the signaling relay R 2070 remains at rest, while the signaling relay R 2040 operates.



   When operating), the R 2040 signaling relay closes, at contacts 2041, a circuit passing through contacts 1863 'and 1761 for energizing the R 1820 repeater relay. When operating, said R 1820 repeater relay closes at the contacts 1833, an obvious circuit for energizing the R 1730 bonding relay.

   This one, operating, closes, at contacts 1732. another obvious circuit for the excitation of the starting relay R 1710 which, when operating, interrupts at contacts 1712, an obvious circuit for the application of a battery, for example the winding of the selection relay B 1910 to the control conductor C 1773 of the junction 1770, and closes, at the contacts 1713, an obvious circuit for the application of a ground to the control conductor C 1773 of the said junction 1770, The substitution of the earth to the battery on the C 1773 control conductor of the 1770 junction indicates that said junction, and therefore the trunk line circuit 170,

   are occupied for the group of second interurban selectors, comprising in particular the second interurban selector 1412. Similarly, the starting relay B 1710: withstand, on contacts

  <Desc / Clms Page number 38>

 1714, a wax passing through contacts 1833 and 1811, and ensuring the excitation of the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875, so that said relay operates.

   On the other hand, the starter relay R 1710 closes, at the contacts 1711, a circuit passing through the contacts 1721 and applying an earth to the starter conductor C 1705 which ends at the junction distributor 1401, and said distributor triggers the operation of the finder of a free junction among previously selected arrival searcher-selector junctions. In addition, this application of an earth to the starting conductor C 1705 indicates the level of the junction 1700 which leaves the trunk line circuit 170 to the brushes of said junction seekers.



  On the other hand, the starting relay R 1710 closes, at contacts 1716, a circuit passing through the winding of the cut-off relay R 1720, for the application of a battery to the control conductor 0 1704 of junction 1700, which indicates the position of this junction to the brushes of said junction seekers.



   While operating, the end of conversation relay R 1875 interrupts, at contacts 1875-, a normally closed bypass circuit passing through contacts 1861, capacitor 2056 and resistor 2055 and bypassing windings 2032 and 2034 of repeater 2030. Said relay R 1875 also interrupts, at contacts 1879, the previously traced circuit, with a view to applying an earth to the signaling conductor C 2001: Finally, the end of conversation relay R 1875 closes, at contacts 1878, a circuit passing through contacts 1883, 1893 and 1905 and applying the battery potential, through stabilization lamp L 1872, to signaling conductor C 2001.

   Removing the earth from the signal conductor 0 2001 and applying the potential of the battery to said conductor closes a bonding circuit for the common energization of the lower and intermediate windings of the relay.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 39>

 R 2040 signaling relay, and causes the application of the battery to the simplex conductor C 2063, so that the intermediate and lower windings of the R 2070 signaling relay in the trunk line circuit 2065 of the remote exchange A, are energized in series by the trunk line 2060, which activates said R 2070 signaling relay.When operating, the R 2070 signaling relay closes, at contacts 2071, an ignition circuit of the L 2075 lamp belonging to the operator position calling at the long distance switchboard of the remote exchange !,

   which indicates to said operator that the trunk line 2060 has been busy at the remote exchange A, but that the switching apparatus of the main exchange B is not able to receive the first digit.



  In other words, at this time, trunk line circuit 170 retransmits, through trunk line 2060, a delayed dialing signal to the calling operator position of the trunk panel of remote exchange A.



   As indicated previously, the non-application of the earth to the starting conductor C 1705 which connects the trunk line circuit 170 to the distributor of 14:01 junctions, has the effect of causing, by said distributor 1401 ,, the operation of the finder to be triggered. free junction previously selected among the associated junctions. Assuming that the junction shown, which includes finder 1402 and arrival selector 1403, is selected by junction distributor 1401, operation of finder 1408 is initiated at this time.

   More precisely, the finder 1402 operates and finds the junction 1700 which leaves from the trunk line circuit 170 and said finder applies the earth to the control conductor C 1704, so as to close a circuit passing through the contacts 1716 and ensuring the exeitation of the cut-off relay R 1720 ,, When operating, said cut-off relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 40>

 R 1720 interrupts, at contacts 1721, the previously indicated circuit which ensured the unapplication of earth to the starting conductor C 1705 terminating at the distributor of junctions 1401, which indicates that circuit 170 of the calling trunk line has been found *
At this time again,

   a loop is closed between the trunk line circuit 170 and the arrival selector 1403, by the intermediary of the finder 1402 and the junction 1700, the negative and positive potentials of the arrival selector 1403 being applied to the conductors C 1701 and C 1702 of junction 1700 * Said loop circuit is as follows: conductor 0 1701, contacts 1862, winding 2031 of repeater 2030, contacts 2021 and 1864, top winding of loop selection relay R 1770, contacts 1821, 1866 and 2023, winding 2033 of the repeater 2030 and contacts 1861 conductor C 1702.

   This circuit enables the upper winding of the R 1770 loop selection relay to be energized and said relay operates and closes, at contacts 1772, an obvious circuit for the operation of the R 1810 control relay. , the control relay R 1810 interrupts, at contacts 1811, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the lower winding of the end of reversing relay R 1875, and the latter relay releases its armature.

   The R 1810 control relay also closes, at contacts 1812, a bonding circuit of its own armature, circuit passing through contacts 1833 and 1714 and, at contacts 1815, a bonding circuit of the armature of the R 1720 cut-off relay , passing through contacts 1722.

   In addition, the commando relay R 1810 closes, at contacts 1813, a circuit passing through contacts 1823, 1743 and 1771 and applies the earth directly to one of the terminals of the upper winding of the loop selection relay R 1770, so that a continuous positive potential is applied to trunk line circuit 170 through a

  <Desc / Clms Page number 41>

 part of the preceding circuit up to, conductor C 1702 of junction 1700 leading to the arrival selector 1403. This application of a continuous positive potential to the trunk line circuit 170 to conductor C 1702 of junction 1700 is shown below. of this description under the name of unbalance.

   At this moment, the control relay R 1810 has therefore unbalanced the junction 1700 which ends in the arrival selector 1403. Said unbalance of the junction 1700 is, at this moment, without effect on the arrival selector 1403. In releasing its armature, the end of conversation R 1875 relay interrupts, at contacts 1878, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the battery to the signaling conductor a 2001 and closes again, at contacts 1879,

   the if runs previously traced for the application of the earth to said signaling conductor 0 2001. The signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 is maintained in its actuating position and the signaling relay R 2070 of the line circuit toll 2065 returns to its idle position. On restoring, the signaling relay R 2070 interrupts, at contacts 2071, the circuit previously indicated for the lighting of the lamp L 2075 provided for the calling operator position of the interurban panel of the remote exchange A, which indicates to said operator that the switchgear of the main exchange B is ready to receive the first digit.

   As a result, when earth is reapplied to the C 2001 signal conductor of the trunk line circuit 170, the delayed dial signal is no longer transmitted to the C simplex conductor 2063 and to the trunk line 2060 which retransmitted it to the remote exchange.
The calling operator at her position on the long distance switchboard of the remote exchange! then proceeds to the formation of the first digit on its call dial. The apparatus

  <Desc / Clms Page number 42>

 associated then interrupts the application of the battery to the contacts 2068 and applies the earth to the contacts 2067, then interrupts the unapplication of the earth to the contacts 2067 and applies the battery to the contacts 2068 and, from there,

   to the signaling conductor 0 2074 so as to transmit the pulses of this digit to said conductor and, consequently, to the trunk line 2060. The signaling relay R 2070 of the trunk line circuit 2065 does not function according to the impulses sent by the dial call but the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 2170 operates according to said pulses.

   Each time the R 2040 signaling relay returns to its rest position and then operates again, it interrupts, then closes, at contacts 2041, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the repeated relay on R 1820 and said relay operates in such a manner. corresponding. When the armature of the repeater relay R 1820 is released for the first time, the latter closes at contacts 1822, a circuit passing through contacts 2027 and 1731 and ensuring the excitation of the digit relay R 1740.

   While operating, the R 1740 digit relay closes, at contacts 1742, an obvious circuit ensuring the energization of the lower winding of the R 1770 loop selection relay, which keeps the latter relay in its actuating position during operation. of the numbering, said relay R 1770 being of the slow or delayed release type * On the other hand, the number relay R 1740 interrupts, at contacts 1743, the circuit previously drawn for the unbalancing of jonotion 1700 which ends in the selector d 'arrival 1403.

   In addition, the R 1740 digit relay closes at contacts 1741 a circuit passing through contacts 1862, 2021 and 1864 and bypassing repeater winding 2031 .2030, which reduces the impedance of the terminating loop circuit. , via junction 1700, to the arrival selector 1403. The bonding relay R 1730 and

  <Desc / Clms Page number 43>

 the number relay R 1740 being both of the different release type, said relays remain actuated while the digit formed is transmitted to the call dial.

   The pulses of said digit are repeated by the repeater relay R 1820, at contacts 1821 and, via the loop circuit $ at the arrival selector 1403, which causes the operation of said selector according to the first digit thundered on the dial of call*
At the end of the transmission of the first digit, the signaling relay R 2D40 remains actuated, and the same applies to the repeater relay R 1820, which causes the armature of the digit relay R 1740 to release after a short period of time.

   Returning to its rest position, the R 1740 digit relay interrupts, at contacts 1741, the circuit previously drawn for short-circuiting the winding 2031 of repeater 2030. Said relay R 1740 also interrupts, at contacts 1742 , the previously indicated bonding circuit which ensured the excitation of the lower winding of the R 1770 loop selection relay.

   But said relay R 1770 remains actuated at this moment, given that its upper winding is energized by the loop circuit passing through junction 1700 and now terminating, through the intermediary of the finder 1402 and the arrival selector 1403 at the second trunk selector of the group selected by said arrival selector 1403. It is evident that the arrival selector 1403, upon receipt of the first digit, selects a corresponding group of second trunk selectors and then automatically selects a second trunk selector free in said group, for example, the second long distance selector 1404 in one of the groups and the second long distance selector 1411 in another group, follow, of course,

   the final delivery of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 44>

 communication. In addition, when returning to its rest position, the R 1740 number relay closes, at the contacts
1743, the circuit previously drawn for the unbalance of junction 1700 which results in the second selected trunk selector. This operation has no effect momentarily on the second toll selector selected. The calling operator of the long distance table of the remote exchange A then proceeds to the formation of the second digit on her dial 'call. in order to continue routing the communication, in a manner which will be discussed in more detail later.



   ROUTING THE CALL TO THE PANEL
INTER-URBAN OF THE MAIN CENTRAL B.



   It will then be assumed that the call routed from the calling operator position of the trunk panel of the remote exchange !, via trunk line 2060, trunk line circuit 1170 and searcher
1402 up to the arrival selector 1403 must be transmitted to the trunk switchboard 11Y of the main exchange B, the first digit received by the arrival selector 1403 having acted on said selector, in such a way that it selects a second trunk selector from the group including in particular the second long distance selector 1404.

   Assume, on the other hand, that inbound selector 1403 has precisely selected second selector 1404, and that the second digit received by trunk line 170, and originating from the calling operator position of the table trunk of the remote exchange is repeated by trunk circuit 170 and by loop circuit including trunk 1700, as previously discussed, to second trunk selector 1404, such that this selects the trunk group arrival connected to the trunk switchboard 11 Y, then

  <Desc / Clms Page number 45>

 in said group a free incoming junction circuit such as, for example, the incoming junction circuit 25 Y.



   Moreover, in the case where the arrival selector 1403, or the second interurban selector 1404 are either in the presence of a total occupation, the one of these two devices which is in the presence of said inter-city case. breaks the loop circuit which returns, through junction 1700, to trunk line circuit 170 and 120 earth pulses or 240 pulses alternately positive and negative are applied per minute to the control conductor C 1703 of junction 1700.

   When the indicated loop circuit is thus Interrupted, the loop select relay R 1770 of the trunk line circuit 170 returns to the rest position and closes, at contacts 1773, a circuit passing through contacts 1823, 1715, 2028 and 1814. and ensuring the series excitation of the control relays R 1980 and 1990. When operating, the control relay R 1990 closes, at the 1991 contacts, an obvious circuit of excitation of the connection relay on the simplex R 2010.

   When operating, the control relay R 1980 closes, at contacts 1982, an obvious excitation circuit of the control relay R 1970, When operating, the latter closes, at contacts 1975, a circuit passing through contacts 1981 and ensuring the excitation of the switching relay R 2020. The switching relay R ZOZO interrupts, by operating, at contacts 2028, the circuit previously drawn for the energization of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990, and these latter relays return to their resting position.

   On returning to its rest position, the control relay R 1980 interrupts, at contacts 1982, the circuit previously indicates which kept the control relay R 1970 actuated; this last relay then returns to its rest position after a short instant), given that it is of the delayed release type * When operating, the connection relay on simplex R 2010

  <Desc / Clms Page number 46>

 interrupts, at contacts 2015, the connection normally established between the winding of the end of conversation relay R 1920 and the control conductor 0 1703 of the junction, 1700 and establishes, at contacts 2016, an obvious connection between the control conductor 0 1703 of junction 1700 and the upper winding of the end of conversation relay B 1875.

   The 120 earth pulses or the 240 alternating positive and negative pulses applied every minute to the control conductor 0 1703 of the 1700 junction ensure, in a corresponding manner, the operation and the return to rest of the end of conversation relay R 1875, so that the positive and negative potentials are applied alternately to the signaling conductor C 2001 with a corresponding frequency, so as to keep actuated the call relay R 2040 in the trunk line circuit 170 and to actuate, accordingly, the relay 2070 trunk line circuit R 2070.

   Such intermittent operation of the signaling relay R 2070 causes a corresponding flickering of the lamp L 2075 to the position of the calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, which indicates to said operator the condition of the circuits.



   To return to the operation of the second interurban selector 1404 and assuming that it has selected the incoming circuit 25 Y at the time considered, a circuit is then closed for the series excitation of the winding of the end of conversation relay R 1920 in the trunk line circuit 170 and of a relay, not shown, of the incoming circuit 25 Y, which passes through the contacts 2015 and through the control conductor C 1703 of the junction 1700. When said circuit is closed, the R 1920 end of conversation relay does not work, given that it is of the delayed attraction type.

   On the other hand

  <Desc / Clms Page number 47>

 the mentioned relay of the incoming circuit 25 Y functions, and acts on the conductor C 1701 of the junction 1700, so as to de-energize the upper winding of the loop selection relay R 1770, and the latter releases its armature .



   On restoring, the loop selection relay R 1770 interrupts, at contacts 1771, the circuit previously drawn for the unbalance of junction 1700 and closes, at contacts 1773, a circuit passing through contacts 1823, 1715, 2028, and 1814 for the series excitation of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990. When operating, the control relay R 1980 closes, at the contacts 1982, an obvious circuit for the excitation of the control relay R 1970. When operating, the control relay R 1990, for its part, at the 1991 contacts, a circuit evident by the use of the connection relay on simplex R 2010.

   On the other hand, the control relay R 1970 closes by operating, at contacts 1973, a circuit passing through the contacts 1981 and ensuring the excitation of the switching relay R 2020.



   When operating, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 closes, at contacts 2017, a bonding circuit for the excitation of its own winding, via contacts 1715 and 1823. The switching relay Il 2030 closes, when operating, at contacts 2022, a collago circuit for the excitation of its own winding by contacts 1715 and 1823. In addition, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 interrupts, at contacts 2015, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the winding of the end of conversation relay R 1920 in the trunk line circuit 170 in series with the indicated relay of the incoming circuit 25 Y, circuit comprising the control conductor 1703 of the junction 1700.

   On the other hand, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 runs again, at the 2016 contacts, an obvious circuit ensuring Inapplication of a

  <Desc / Clms Page number 48>

 battery, by the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875, to the commando conductor C 1703 of junction 1700, for a purpose which will be explained in more detail later. In addition, the switching relay R 2020 interrupts at other points, at contacts 2021 and 2023, the loop circuit previously drawn and comprising the conductors C 1701 and C 1702 of the junction 1700.

   Said relay on the other hand closes, at contacts 2024, an energizing circuit of the winding of the simplex relay R 1750 of the trunk line circuitē170, in series with a relay of the incoming circuit 25 Y drawn as follows; earth, contacts 2041, contacts 1863 ', winding of R 1750, contacts 1868, 2013 and 2024, riprap 2033 of repeater 2030, contacts 1861 *, conductor C 1702 of junction 1700. Said circuit comprises the winding of the relay already indicated. When this series circuit is closed, the R 1750 simplex relay operates and closes, at contacts 1751, an obvious circuit ensuring the energization of the auxiliary R 1760 simplex relay.

   While operating, the auxiliary simplex relay R 1760 closes, at contacts 1762, an obvious multiple circuit, now actuated the sticking relay R 1730, the connection relay on the simplex R 2010 and the switching relay R 2020. The auxiliary simplex relay R 1760 on the other hand interrupts, at contacts 1761, the previously traced circuit which kept the repeater relay R 1820 actuated, so that the latter relay releases its armature. In addition, the switching relay R 2020 interrupts, at contacts 2028, the circuit previously drawn which kept the control relays R 1980 and R 1990 actuated, and the latter release their armature.



  By releasing its armature, the control relay R 1980 interrupts, at contacts 1982, the previously indicated circuit which kept the control relay R 1970 actuated and the latter releases its armature a few moments later, given,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 49>

 that it is the delayed release type. By releasing its armature, the control relay R 1970 closes, at contacts 1971, a simplex circuit now actuates the simplex relay R 1750. Said simplex circuit is drawn as follows: earth, contacts 204; contacts 1863 ', winding of R 1750 , contacts 1868, 1971, 2012 and 2022, winding 2031 of repeater 2030, contacts 1862, conductor C 1701 of junction 1700 which leads directly to the incoming circuit 25 Y.

   When the incoming circuit 25 Y is selected by the second trunk selector 1404 ;, as set forth above, it controls the common starting circuit 12 Y, which in turn controls the traffic distributor to the 13 Y positions. More precisely, the traffic distributor at positions 13 Y transmits for response the incoming call concerned to one of the operator positions of the trunk board 11 Y, and, for example, to the operator position number 1 shown. for exemple.

   Consequently, and at this time, the common starting circuit 12 Y and the position distributor 13 Y both control the circuit 18 Y of the operator position number 1, which triggers the operation of the switch. response of one of the associated junctions, the particular junction of interest having been previously desired by the 19 Y junction distributor. Assuming that the 19 Y junction distributor has designated the 15 Y junction, the commu- response switch 16 Y of junction 15 Y seeks and finds incoming circuit 25 Y, the position of said incoming circuit being indicated in front of the brush of response switch 16 Y by common starting circuit 12 Y and by the circuit 4 'arrival 25 Y.

   Consequently, the incoming circuit 25 Y is connected at this time through the answer switch 16 Y of the junction 15 Y to the circuit 18 Y of the operator position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 50>

 



   When the answer switch 16Y of junction 15Y from operator position number 1 to trunk switchboard 11 Y occupies the incoming circuit 25 Y as indicated, said incoming circuit 25 Y causes the application in return of an earth to the control conductor
C 1703 of junction 1700, which closes a circuit passing through contacts 2016 and ensuring the excitation of the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875. This last relay then operates and interrupts, at contacts 1879, the circuit previously trace which applied an earth to the inrush conductor C 2001 and closes, at contacts 1878, the circuit previously traced for the application of the battery to said signal conductor C 2001.

   This substitution of the battery at the earth potential on the signaling conductor C 2001 and, consequently, on the simplex conductor
C 2063, keeps the call relay R 2040 actuated in the trunk line circuit 170 and causes the call relay R 2070 in the trunk line circuit to operate
2065, as explained previously * While operating, the R 2070 signaling relay closes, at contacts 2071, the previously indicated circuit ensuring the ignition of the lamp
L 2075 corresponding to the position of Empress calling on the interurban switchboard of remote exchange A,

   this indicates to the operator of said remote exchange A that the call has been routed to trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B and that the operator concerned can be informed of the final destination of the call.



   After having been informed of the destination of the call, the attendant of position number i of the trunk switchboard 11 Y controls the set of keys 22 Y and, consequently, the control circuit 20 Y and the transmitter. pulses
21 AY and 21 BY digit recorders controlled by said circuit. The figures are then recorded in the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 51>

 21 BY recorders. The pulse transmitter 21 AY is then controlled by the digit recorder 21 BY and actuates the call switch 17 Y of the link 15 Y. The call switch 17 Y selects a group of trunks then, in said group, a free junction.

   The pulse generator 21 AY then transmits the pulses of the following digits, through the call switch 17 Y, to the series of outgoing interurban switches, in a manner known per se. The call having been thus routed by Empress from position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y, the control circuit 20 Y, the pulse transmitter 21 AY and the digit recorders 21 BY automatically return to their rest position.



  Junction 15 Y is then disconnected from the position circuit
18 Y.



   In the event that it is necessary for the calling operator of the trunk panel of remote exchange A to get back into communication with the operator of position number 1 of the interurban panel 11 Y of the main exchange B, this operation can be carried out by command switchgear from the position of the calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, command by which the earth is substituted for the battery on the signaling conductor C 2074 or vice versa, so that the signaling relay R 2070 of trunk line circuit 2065 is maintained actuated signaling relay R 2040 of trunk line circuit 170 being energized and de-energized intermittently.

   The R 2040 signaling relay, which operates according to the indicated signals, repeats at the contacts
2041, said signals which are transmitted through junction 1700 to incoming circuit 25 Y, so that said incoming circuit controls junction Y used in the established communication and causes the signal lamp to flicker.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 52>

 surveillance 2603 Y.

   The operator at position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y observes the flickering of the surveillance lamp 2603 Y and again connects junction 15 Y to the circuit of position 18 Y, so that a conversation can be established between the operator of position number 1 of trunk switchboard 11 Y of main exchange B and calling operator of trunk switchboard of remote exchange A ..

   ,
Similarly, in the event that it is necessary for the Empress of position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B to enter into communication with the calling operator of the trunk switchboard of the remote exchange A, this operation can be performed by a new connection of junction 15 Y and of the circuit of position 18 Y, connection established by the operator of position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B. The operator of the position number 1 of the interurban switchboard 11 Y activates its call key, which energizes a relay in the incoming circuit 25 Y. On the control conductor C 1703 of the junction 1700, a negative potential is then applied by intermittent.

   When the negative potential is no longer applied and% control conductor 0 1703, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875 is interrupted and said relay releases its armature * When the potential negative is again applied to the control conductor C 1703, the circuit previously drawn for the energization of the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875 is again closed and said relay operates again * Each time the end of conversation R 1875 releases his armature then attracted him again, he interrupts at contacts 1878

  <Desc / Clms Page number 53>

 the application of the battery to the signaling conductor C 2001 and causes contacts to 1879,

   the application of earth to said conductor C 2001. These operations are then repeated in reverse order, so that the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 is maintained. actuated, while the R 2070 signaling relay of the trunk line circuit 2065 releases and operates alternately. The successive releases and attractions of the R 2070 call relay cause the R 2075 lamp to light up corresponding to the position of the calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, in an obvious manner. At this moment, the last mentioned operator enters into communication and can initiate a conversation with the operator of position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y at the main exchange B.



   At the end of the conversation, Empress calling the interurban switchboard of the remote exchange A causes the communication to be interrupted by controlling the position equipment concerned, so that, on the signaling conductor C 2074, the battery is replaced by the potential of the earth, which transmits a signal do end of conversation on the simplex conductor C 2063, as described previously. Said signal causes the de-energization of the signaling relay R 2040 in the trunk line circuit 170.

   At this moment, the R 2040 signaling relay remains in its rest position by interrupting, at contacts 2041, the previously indicated circuit which ensured the series excitation of the winding of the R 1750 simplex relay in the line circuit. interurban 170 and the arrival circuit relay '25 Y already indicated; these last two relays then release their armature ,, More precisely, the arrival circuit 25 Y is controlled so that the monitoring lamp 2603 Y

  <Desc / Clms Page number 54>

 remains on, which gives the operator in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y the end of call and call back signal.

   The attendant in position number 1 of the Interurban table 11 Y then disconnects junction 15 Y and causes the outgoing switches to return to the rest position.



   By releasing its armature, the simplex relay R 1750 interrupts, at contacts 1751 the excitation circuit of the auxiliary simplex relay R 1760. This latter relay releases its arming a short instant later, given that it is of the type release differs. On restoring, the auxiliary simplex relay R 1760 interrupts, at contacts 1762, the previously traced circuit which kept the sticking relay R 1730, the connection relay on the simplex R 2010 and the relay activated. switch R 2020. Said relays then release their armature, this operation being slightly delayed with regard to the sticking relay R 1730 which is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its frame; the bonding relay R 1730 interrupts, at contacts 1732, the previously mentioned circuit which kept the starting relay R 1710 actuated. By releasing its armature, the starting relay R 1710 interrupts) at contacts 1714 :, the circuit which kept active - the R 1810 control relay and, at contacts 1716, the circuit which kept the R 1720 cut-off relay actuated; the arrival selector 1402 and the second long distance selector 1404, so that said selectors are returned to the rest position:

   When the second interurban selector 1404 is thus returned to the rest position, the incoming circuit 25 Y is interrupted * On the other hand, the starting relay R 1710 interrupts, at contacts 1713, the previously indicated circuit which applied an earth to the control conductor C 1773 of junction 1770 and closes, to contacts 1712, the previous circuit

  <Desc / Clms Page number 55>

   It is also indicated which applied the potential of the battery, via the winding of the selection relay R 1910, to the control conductor C 1773 of the junction 1770.



  Said junction 1770 is then indicated as free to the group of second interurban selectors), comprising in particular the second interurban selector 1412, which have access to said junction. At this moment, the equipment used by the communication previously established between the position of the calling operator at the trunk panel of remote exchange A and the operator position number 1 of trunk panel 11 Y of main exchange B is completely free.

   The two ends of trunk line 2060 are then indicated as free to the respective trunk line circuits 170 and 2065 by applying the earth to the respective signaling conductors C 2001 and C 2074 and the respective signaling relays R 2040 and R 2070 are then in the rest position.



     ROUTING THE CALL TO A SUBSCRIBER STATION AT THE MAIN CENTRAL B.



   It will now be assumed that the call routed from the station of the calling operator in the trunk panel of remote exchange A via trunk line 2060, trunk line circuit 170 and searcher 1402, to the call switch. arrival 1405, must be routed to a subscriber station of the main exchange B, such as, for example, the normal subscriber station TP. Under these conditions, the first digit received by the arrival selector 1403 actuates the latter so that it selects a second interurban selector of the group which comprises, in particular, the second interurban selector 1411.

   It will be assumed, on the other hand, that the arrival selector 1403 precisely selects said second long distance selector 1411. Under these conditions, the second digit received.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 56>

      by trunk line circuit 170 from the calling Empress position to the remote exchange trunk panel at is repeated by said circuit 170, on the loop circuit including junction 1700, as previously explained, to the second trunk selector 1411, which then selects the group of third long distance selectors, comprising in particular the third long distance selector 1413, then selects, from this group, a third free long distance selector.

   Assuming that the second toll selector 1411 selects the third toll selector 1413; the third digit received from the position of the calling operator at the trunk panel of the remote exchange A activates the third trunk selector 1415 which then selects one of the groups of trunk connectors 1414, then selects, in this group, a free trunk connector having access to the line terminating at the normal subscriber station TP.

   The fourth and fifth digits received initiate the operation of the selected trunk connector in the previously selected group 1414 itself and the line terminating at the normal subscriber station TP is in turn selected and tested to determine whether it is free or busy, all these operations taking place in the usual way *
The trunk connector of the group 1414 Interested having responded to the pulses of the fifth digit received through the switches and by the loop coming from the trunk line circuit 170, in the manner previously explained, said connector interrupts the flow of current on this loop circuit and the R 1770 loop selection relay releases its armature.

   By releasing its armature, the R 1770 relay interrupts, at contacts 1771, the circuit previously drawn for the unbalancing of junction 1770 and closes, at contacts 1773, the circuit previously drawn for

  <Desc / Clms Page number 57>

 series excitation of the R 1980 and R 1990 control relays.



  When operating, the control relay R 1980 ensures the excitation of the control relay R 1970. For its part, when operating, the control relay R 1990 ensures the excitation of the connection relay on the simplex R 2010. While operating, the control relay R 1970 causes the energization of the control relay R 2020, all these operations taking place in the manner previously indicated. While operating, the switching relay R 2020 interrupts, at the contacts, the series circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990 and these last two relays are reestablished.

   The R 1980 control relay causes the armature of the R 1970 control relay to release after a short time interval, as previously indicated. At this moment, the earth potential existing at contacts 2041 of the actuated call relay R 2040, is applied, by contacts 1863 ', the coil of the simplex relay R 1750 and contacts 1868, to the contacts 1971 and these are connected, through the contacts 2012 and 2022 of the winding 2031 of the repeater 2030 and the contacts 1862, to the conductor C 1701 of the junction 1700.



  Contacts 1971 are still connected, by contacts 2013 and 2024, winding 2033 of repeater 2050 and contacts 1861 'to conductor C 1703 of junction 1700 ,, On the other hand, conductors C 1701 and C 1703 of junction 1700 are connected, by switches, to a repeater coil provided in the trunk connector of group 1414. However, the negative potential of this last trunk connector is not applied, at this time, to the repeater coil indicated. .

   Consequently, although a communication is established between trunk line circuit 170 and trunk connectour 1414, the simplex circuit included in this communication is not closed so that the simplex relay R 1750 of the trunk line inter-city 170 is not excited. Thus, the circuit previously

  <Desc / Clms Page number 58>

 traced and passing through contadts 2041, 1863 'and 1761, circuit which maintains actuation of the repeater relay R 1820 is always closed, which maintains actuated the bonding relay R 1730, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 and the switching relay R 2020.



   The group 1414 trunk connector tests the line which terminates at the normal called subscriber station TP, as indicated above and, in the event that the line which terminates at said subscriber station is busy, the connector trunk group 1414 provides for the retransmission of a busy tone, through the switch series n to trunk circuit 170 and, from there, to trunk line
2060, at the position of the calling operator on the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, so as to indicate this busy state to said operator.

   It will also be noted that, in the event that any of the preceding switches of the series, such as for example the arrival selector 1403, the second toll selector 1411 or the third toll selector 1413, are in the presence of a state of total occupation, it opens the return circuit via junction 1700 to - the interurban line circuit 1770 and retransmits 120 earth pulses or 240 pulses alternately positive and negative per minute, to the control conductor 0 1703 of junction 1700.

   The trunk line circuit 170 then sends back through the trunk line 2060, a busy signal to the calling Empress position to the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, following the process previously explained
On the other hand, assuming that the trunk connector of group 1414 finds the line which terminates at the normal subscriber station TP free, a inrush current is transmitted in a conventional manner by said trunk connector on said line. .

   Then, when the subscriber of the normal extension requested

  <Desc / Clms Page number 59>

 TP answers the call, the group 1414 trunk connector takes the position making it possible to establish a communication between the calling Empress position at the trunk panel of the remote exchange A and the normal subscriber station called TP at the main exchange B. In addition, at this time, the group 1414 trunk connector causes the nonapplication of earth to the control conductor C 1703 of junction 1700, which causes the energization of the end of conversation relay B 1875, On the call conductor. C 2001, the potential of the battery is then substituted for the potential of the earth, as explained previously.

   This potential reversal on the call conductor C 2001 keeps the call relay R 2040 in the trunk line circuit 170 actuated and causes the call relay R 2070 to operate in the trunk line circuit R 2065. The lamp L 2075 corresponding to the position of the calling Empress of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, then lights up stably, indicating that the call has been answered by the normal subscriber station requested TP of the main central B.



   The called subscriber of the normal TP set can send, by manipulating his switching hook, supervisory signals to the set of the calling operator of the interurban panel of the remote exchange A. For example, when the subscriber of the set normal TP hangs up its receiver on the switching hook, the interurban connector of group 1414 is controlled in such a way that it eliminates the ground of the control conductor C 1703 of the junction C 1700, and the end of conversation relay R 1875 then releases its armature, so that the R 2040 call relay is kept actuated in the circuit. trunk line 170, while the call relay R 2070 of the trunk line circuit 2065 releases its armature.



  When the R 2070 call relay releases its armature, the lamp

  <Desc / Clms Page number 60>

 L 2075 which corresponds to the position of the calling operator on the trunk panel of the remote exchange A goes off, which indicates to the Empress of this position that the subscriber of the normal called station TP of the main exchange B is transmitting end signals communication * The return to the idle position of the devices used for the communication described above is caused by the calling operator of the long distance switchboard of the remote exchange A, who acts on the devices in her position so that they substitute, on the call conductor C 2074 the potential of the earth to that of the battery.



  The call relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 then releases its armature, which releases and returns to the idle state the trunk line circuit 170, the searcher 1402, the arrival selector 1403, the second selector interurban 1411, the Semé interurban selector 1413, and the group 1414 trunk connector, following an obvious process analogous to that previously described.



   In the example given above, the call routed from the position of the calling operator of the interurban switchboard of remote exchange A was transmitted to the ordinary normal subscriber station TP, belonging to the main exchange B but it It is evident that this call could be routed in a nearly identical manner to any of the other subscriber stations in main exchange B by appropriate control of a suitable group 1414 trunk connector, through the third trunk selector of group 1413 and of the series of switches connected back to trunk line circuit 170.

   More specifically, it will be noted that the digital parts of the telephone numbers of the forbidden medium-distance long distance subscriber station TD and of the authorized medium-distance long-distance service subscriber station TX are 0900 and 0901, respectively, so that the same connector

  <Desc / Clms Page number 61>

 Group 1414 trunk can access either of the two subscriber sets listed. On the other hand, the digital part of the telephone number of the normal subscriber station TP is 0099, so that another trunk connector of group 1414 must access this subscriber station. '' call from subscriber stations of shared line TS1, TS2,

   TS3 and TS4 have the respective digital parts 0100, 0200, 0300 and 0400, so that four trunk connectors of group 1414 respectively have access to these subscriber stations. It will also be noted that the four indicated trunk connectors transmit inrush currents at the respective frequencies of 16, 33, 50 and 66 periods per second, on the respective branch pins of the shared subscriber line 410X connected to the four subscriber stations indicated which determines a selective operation of the ringing devices of these stations, in a well-known manner.
 EMI61.1
 /l-OIDl:MIN.IM OF J.P: PKI:

  . -Tusgp 'AT A LOCAL CENTRAL C.



   Assuming, on the other hand, that the call transmitted from the calling Empress position of the interurban switchboard of remote exchange A via trunk line 2060, trunk line circuit 170 and seeker 1403, up to the arrival selector 1403, must be routed to a local automatic exchange subscriber station C, the first digit received by the arrival selector 1403 has actuated said selector in such a way that it selects a second selector interurban group including in particular the second long distance selector 1404.

   Assuming further that inbound selector 1403 has precisely selected said second trunk selector 1404, the second digit received by trunk circuit 170, from the position of the calling operator in the trunk table of the central office

  <Desc / Clms Page number 62>

 remote A, is repeated by said trunk line circuit 170 and by the loop circuit including junction 1700, to the second trunk selector 1404, as explained above. Said second selector 1404 then selects the group of third long distance selectors, comprising in particular the third long distance selector 1406, then, in this group, a third free long distance selector :.

   Assuming that the second toll selector 1404 precisely selects the third toll selector 1406, the third digit received acts on this third selector, which then selects it. same: the group of junctions which ends in the group of de.junction circuits comprising, in particular, the junction circuit 50 then further selects, in this group, a free junction.

   Assuming that the third trunk selector 1406 specifically selects junction 880A which ends at trunk 50, this is indicated as free, by application of the battery, by the winding of the trunk selector R 850 and contacts 843 and 861, to control conductor C 883 of junction 880 A. At this moment, the earth potential applied to contact 1815 of energized control relay 1810 of trunk line circuit 170 is transmitted, by the previously circuit traced, to the control conductor C 1704 of junction 1700, and from there, by the series of intermediate switches, to the control conductor C 883 of junction 880A,

   which ends an obvious excitation circuit for the interurban selector relay R 850 of the junction circuit 50,
When operating, the R 850 long-distance selector relay opens, at contacts 852, a normally closed circuit, passing through contacts 846 and applying the battery to the control conductor C 885 of junction 880B.

   Relay 850 further closes, at contacts 861, a circuit passing through contacts 846 and applying earth to the conductor of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 63>

 C885 control of junction 880B, which indicates as occupied, junction 880B and therefore), trunk 50, outgoing trunk selectors 513X, etc ..., and outgoing trunk selectors 511X, etc. .., respectively forming the two groups which have access to said junction circuit50. In addition, the long distance selector relay R850 closes, at contacts 853, an obvious driving circuit for the switching relay R720.

   When the 880A junction is selected by the third trunk selector 1406, the battery is applied to the control lead C884 of the 880A junction in the junction circuit 50 through the resistor 526 and the contacts 525 and 683. Said control lead is at this point. moment connected by the series of intermediate switches to the C1703 control conductor of the 1700 junction. This application of the battery to the 01703 control conductor of the 1700 junction closes a circuit passing through the 2015 contacts ensuring the excitation of the relay. end of conversation R1920, in 1o trunk line 170 circuit.

   In operation, the end-of-talk relay R1920 closes, at contacts 1922, an obvious circuit for energizing the auxiliary end-of-talk relay R1840. In operation, the end-of-talk relay R1840 closes, at contacts 1841, an obvious circuit for energizing the lower winding of the end-of-talk relay R1875, and the latter relay is energized.

   By attracting its armature, it replaces, on the call conductor C2001, the earth with the potential of the battery, which keeps the signaling relay R2040 activated in the interurban line circuit 170, and which causes the 'activation of the R 2070 signaling relay in the 2065 trunk line circuit. When operating, the R2070 signaling relay turns on the L2075 lamp which identifies the calling operating position of the trunk panel of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 64>

 remote central A.

   As a result, a delayed dial signal is transmitted from trunk line 170, over trunk line 2060, to the position of the calling operator of the remote exchange trunk panel A, indicating to the operator of that position. that it should not continue dialing, given that the switching devices of the neighboring exchange 0 are not, at this moment, able to route the interested call.



   We will consider again the junction circuit 50, In operation, the switching relay R720 completes, at contacts 723, 727, 722 'and 723', a connection between the line relay R760, the differential relay R750 and the conductors. 0881 and 0882 from junction 880A.

   This connection is traced as follows earth, upper windings of line relay R760 and differential relay R750, contacts 722 ', 654, 648, 723' and 734, conductor of C882, on the one hand, and, battery, lower winding of line relay R760, contacts 656, lower winding of differential relay R750, contacts 727, 652, 641, 723 and 731, conductor C881, on the other hand, When line relay R760 and differential relay R750 thus shunt in series the conductors of junction 880A, these two relays are energized, since junction 1700 is unbalanced, at this time, in trunk line circuit 170,

   as a result of the release of the armature of the digit relay B1740 which shortly follows the end of the transmission of the third digit and which takes place before the third trunk selector 1406 has completed its action. Specifically, the earth connected to contacts 1823 of the energized repeater relay R1820 in trunk line circuit 170 is applied, through contacts 1813, 1743 and .1771 to one of the terminals of the upper winding of the loop selection relay. Rl770, and this connection is extended by the previously drawn circuit which passes through the upper winding of the R1770 loop selection relay, until

  <Desc / Clms Page number 65>

 conductor 01701 of junction 1700 and,

   directly by the circuit previously traced to the conductor 01702 of said junction. The earth potential applied to the conductor of 01702 of the junction 1700 is thus directly transmitted to the conductor 0882 of the junction 880A which short circuits the upper windings of the differential relay R750 and of the line relay R760.

   Moreover, the lower windings: of the line relay R760 and of the differential relay R750 are at this moment energized by the connection comprising the line conductors 0881 and 01701 which belong respectively to the junctions 880A and 1700, and the upper winding of the relay of R1770 loop selection in trunk line circuit 170. As a result, line relay R760 and differential relay R750 of junction circuit 50 are energized and loop selection relay R1770 of trunk line circuit 170 is held. to its working position.



  * In addition, when operating, the switching relay R720 closes, their contacts 726 ', a circuit passing through the contacts 533 and ensuring the excitation of the control relay R510. While operating, this closes, at contacts 512, an obvious circuit for energizing the end of conversation relay R610. The latter closes, by operating, at contact 612, a circuit passing through contacts 726, and activating the current reversal relay R730, By operating, the relay R730 inverts, at contacts 731, 732, 735 and 734 the polarity of the relay of line R760 and that of relay R750 with respect to conductors C881 and C882 of junction 880A.

   More exactly, at this time, the lower windings of the line relay R760 and the differential relay R750 are energized by the conductor of C882 of the junction 880A, and the upper windings of the two indicated relays are shorted in series ,, by conductor C881 of junction 880A, with the upper winding of the loop selection relay R1770.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 66>

 



   As a result, at this instant, the line relay R760 and the differential relay R750 are kept actuated in the junction circuit 50 and the upper winding of the loop selection relay B1770 is shorted in the trunk line circuit 170, which causes an additional delay in the already deferred release of the armature of the latter relay. It will be noted here that the loop selection relay R1770 does not release its armature at this time and that a short time later, an additional circuit, drawn below, is closed with the junction circuit 50 for the activation of the upper winding of said relay.



   If we refer again to the junction circuit
50, it can be seen that, while operating, the line relay R 760 closes, at contacts 762, a circuit passing through the contacts
713 for the excitation of the R.770 bonding relay. While operating, this closes, at contacts 771, an obvious circuit for energizing the right winding of the response relay R 740. This latter relay then becomes fast-acting when its left winding is then energized. with the correct polarity direction, given that the R 740 response relay is of the shunt field type. When operating, the R 750 differential relay closes, at contacts 751, an obvious circuit for energizing the R 680 control relay.

   Relay R 680 closes, at contacts 683, the previously traced circuit which passes through resistor 526 and applies a battery to control conductor C 884 of junction 880 A and closes, at contacts 682, an additional obvious circuit comprising, in series, the windings of the interurban relay R 530 and of the interurban relay R 540 for the application of the battery to the control conductor C 884 of the junction 880 A. The circuit now actuated the end of conversation relay R 1920 in the interurban line circuit 170 and the interurban relays R 530 and interurban

  <Desc / Clms Page number 67>

 R 540 in the junction circuit 50 is then closed.

   In operation, the interurban relay R 540 closes, at contacts 542, an obvious circuit for energizing the auxiliary long distance relay R 670; while operating, the interurban relay R 530 closes, at contacts 531, an obvious circuit for the energization of the connection relay on simplex R 660. When operating, the auxiliary long distance relay R 670 closes, at contacts 674, a circuit passing through contacts 541 and ensuring the energization of the switching relay R 650. When operating, the latter closes, at contacts 657, a circuit passing through contacts 771 to maintain its own armature * The R 660 simplex connection relay closes, by operating, at contacts 664, a circuit passing through contacts 771 and now attracting its own armature.

   Likewise, the auxiliary trunk relay R 670 closes, at contacts 673, a circuit passing through contacts 681 and now attracted 1-armature of the control relay R 6800
In addition, the switching relay R 650 opens, at contacts 652 and 656, the circuit previously drawn for the series excitation of the lower windings of the differential relay R 750 and of the line relay R 760, and these two relays release their armature. .

   On the other hand, the switching relay R 650 closes, at contacts 653, a circuit passing through the contacts 662, 642, 723 'and 733, the conductor of C 881 of the junction 880 A, the series / intermediate switches , conductor 01701 of junction 1700, contacts 1862, winding 2031 of repeater 2030. contacts 2021, 1864, 1771, 1743, 1813 and 1823 for the series excitation of the winding of the simplex pulse relay R 710 in the junction circuit 50 and of the upper winding of the loop selection relay R 1770 in the interurban line circuit 170.

   The simplox R 710 pulse relay operates and

  <Desc / Clms Page number 68>

 the boole selection relay, R 1770 is kept energized.



   In operation, the simplex pulse relay R 710 closes, at contacts 712, an obvious additional circuit, now attracting the armature of the R 770 sticking relay after the release of the armature of the line relay R 760. In addition, the aimplex pulse relay R 710 closes, at contacts 711, a point common to contacts 671 of the actuated auxiliary trunk relay R 670 in the closed circuit passing through the medium-distance trunk line 500 which ends at the local exchange C. In this way, the indicated closed circuit is not open at contacts 761 due to the release of the armature of the line relay R 760.

   The original loop circuit mentioned, closed at contacts 761 as a result of operation of line relay R 760, is as follows: conductor C 501 of medium distance trunk line 500, contacts 506, 722, 761, winding 634 of repeater 630, contacts 729, left windings of the response relay R 740, contacts 725; winding 636 of the repeater 630, contacts 508, conductor 0 502 of the interurban line 500. At the moment when the loop circuit is closed the junction circuit of the local exchange C connects the automatic switching devices to said loop circuit. This operation takes some time. Likewise, the left winding of response relay R 740 is energized in this closed circuit, but the polarity of line 500 is such that the latter relay is not actuated.

   At this time, the loop circuit traced above is closed by the additional multiple point, at contacts 671 and 711 of the auxiliary trunk relay R 670 and of the simplex pulse relay R 710, which are energized.



   When the switching devices of the local exchange C are associated with the trunk line 500 and when they are able to receive a digit, the potentials of the battery and the earth are reversed at the local exchange 0 on

  <Desc / Clms Page number 69>

 the conductors of the trunk line 500. In the junction circuit 50, the polarity of the left winding of the response relay R 740 then becomes such that this relay operates. While operating, it closes, at contacts 741, a circuit passing through contacts 725 and ensuring the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 520.

   While operating, the relay R 520 closes, at the contacts 521, a circuit passing through the contacts 771 and now attracted its own armature; on the other hand, it opens, at contacts 523, the circuit previously drawn which kept the control relay R 510 actuated. A short moment later, the control relay R 510, which is of the type with different release, releases its armature and opens, at contacts 512, the previously mentioned circuit which kept the armature of the end of conversation relay R 610 attracted. By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 610 opens, at contacts 612, the circuit. previously traced which kept the current reversing relay R730 actuated.

   By releasing its armature, this last relay interrupts), at contacts 733, the previously traced connection which applied the battery, by winding the simplex pulse relay R 710, to conductor C 881 of junction 880 A. In addition, relay R 730 closes, at contacts 734, a circuit practically identical to that which had been previously drawn for the application of the battery by winding the simplex pulse relay R 710 to conductor C 883 of junction 880 A When the actuation of the simplex pulse relay R 710 is thus disconnected from the conductor C 881 of the junction 880 A,

   and connected to the conductor C 882 of said junction the series circuit previously traces for maintaining the armature of the simplex pulse relay R 710 in the junction circuit 50 and of the loop selection relay R 1770 in the line circuit long distance 170 is open $ These relays

  <Desc / Clms Page number 70>

 then reset, the R 1770 loop selection relay being of the release type slightly differs. By releasing its armature, the simplex R 710 pulse relay interrupts, at contacts 712, the previously indicated circuit which kept the R 770 sticking relay actuated.

   However, the latter relay being of the delayed release type, does not release its armature before the simplex pulse relay R 710 has, again, drawn its own, as will be explained in detail below. On the other hand, it will be noted that the relaxation of the armature of the simplex pulse relay R 710 does not affect the transmission of a pulse, to the contacts 711, to the loop circuit passing through the trunk line at medium distance 500 , given that the auxiliary trunk relay R 670 is, at this moment, in its working position, and closes, at contacts 671, a point common to contacts 711 of the de-energized simplex pulse relay R 710.



   As indicated previously, when the current reversing relay R 730 of the junction circuit 50 releases its armature, so as to reverse the polarity of the simplex pulse relay R 710, with respect to the conductors C 881 and C 888 of the junction 880 A, the series circuit previously drawn, which kept the simplex pulse relay R 710 and the loop selection relay R 1770 activated, is interrupted, so that the simplex pulse relay R 710 immediately releases its armature and that the R 1770 loop selection relay releases its own a short time later.



  By releasing its armature, the R 1770 loop selection relay closes, at contacts 1773, the circuit previously drawn for the series excitation of the R 1980 and R 1990 control relays. The R 1980 control relay causes the excitation of the control relay R i970 and the control relay 1990 caused that of the connection relay on simplex R 2010. In addition, the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 71>

 control relay R 1970 ensures the excitation of the switching relay R 2020, all these operations taking place according to the process indicated above.

   While operating, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 opens, at the 2015 contacts, the series circuit previously drawn which kept the end-of-conversation relay R 1980 activated in the trunk line circuit 170, and the trunk relays. R 530 and trunk R 540 in the junction circuit 50, so that said relays release their armature. By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 1920 interrupts at contacts 1922, the previously indicated circuit which kept the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1840 actuated, so that the latter releases its armature for a short time. later, since it is the delayed release type.

   By releasing its armature, the auxiliary end-of-conversation relay R 1840 opens, at contacts 1841, the original circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the lower winding of the end-of-conversation relay R 1875. However, at this moment, a The additional bonding circuit is closed for the use of the lower winding of the R 1875 control relay, which passes through contacts 1876 and through the 1972 contacts of the R 1970 control relay, activated. In this way, the end of conversation relay R 1975 is maintained, activated,
While operating, the switching relay R 2020 causes, on the other hand, the de-energization of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990.

   By releasing its armature, the control relay R 1980 causes the dese itation of the control relay R 1970 a short time later, all these operations taking place following the process described above. By releasing its armature, the control relay R 1970 opens, at contacts 1972, the additional circuit which kept the relay actuated.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 72>

 end of conversation R 1875.

   This last relay is then de-energized, which ensures the substitution, on the signaling conductor C 2001, of the earth or potential of the battery, so that the signaling relay R 2040 is kept actuated in the trunk line circuit. 170 and that the signaling relay R 2070 is de-energized in the trunk line circuit 2065, as discussed above.

   By releasing its armature, the signaling relay
R 2070 switches off the lamp L 2075 indicating the calling Empress position on the trunk panel of remote exchange A, which indicates to Empress from this position that she can start transmitting the call, since the switching devices of the central local 0 are then able to receive the first cipher
In addition, by releasing its armature, the control relay R 1970 closes, at the 1971 contacts, the simplex circuit previously drawn which, passing through the 2041 contacts, connected the winding of the simplex relay R 1750 to the conductors C 1701 and C 1702 of jonotion 1700, so that the simplex relay R
1750 of the trunk line circuit 170 is actuated in series with the simplex pulse relay R 710 of the circuit, junction 50,

   given that this last simplex relay is connected to conductor C 882 of junction 880 A. In operation, -. However, the simplex relay R 1750 causes the excitation of the auxiliary simplex relay R 1760, which causes the armature of the repeater relay R 1820 to be released, all these operations taking place according to the process described above. In the junction circuit 50 while operating, the interurban relay R 540 interrupts, at contacts 542, the previously mentioned circuit which kept the auxiliary interurban relay R 670 actuated, so that the latter relay releases its armature a short time later, being since it is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its frame, the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 73>

 Auxiliary long distance relay R 670 closes, at contacts 672, a circuit passing through contacts 661, 651, 641, 723 and 731 and which connects the winding of the simplex pulse relay R 710 to conductor C 881 of junction 880 A. As a result, a complete simplex connection is now established between the simplex pulse relay R 710 of the junction circuit 50 and the simplex relay R 1750 of the trunk line circuit 170. In addition, the auxiliary trunk relay R 670 opens, at contacts 673, the previously traced circuit which maintained actuated control relay R 680.

   By releasing its armature, control relay R 680 disconnects, at contacts 682, control conductor C 884 from junction 880 A of interurban relay R 530 and interurban relay R 540 and prepares, at contacts 683, a circuit for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 884. In addition, the auxiliary trunk relay R 670 opens, at contacts 671, the multiple point or contacts 711 of the simplex pulse relay R 710, actuated Consequently, the loop circuit which terminates at the local exchange C is at this moment able to be controlled by the simplex pulse relay R 710 actuates.



   The calling operator of the trunk panel of the central office then moves A away from A then transmits the following digit on trunk line 2060 to act on signaling relay R 2040 of trunk line circuit 170 which then repeats, at contacts 2041, the pulses of the digit transmitted and applies them, via simplex relay R 1750 of trunk line circuit 170, to simplex pulse relay R 710 in junction circuit 50. The indicated relays then function correspondingly.

   The operation and de-energization of the R 1750 simplex relay in the trunk line circuit 170 has no effect, given that the associated auxiliary R 1760 simplex relay is of the type with

  <Desc / Clms Page number 74>

 delayed release. However, when the simplex pulse relay R 710 of junction circuit 50 releases its armature for the first time, it closes, at contacts 713, a circuit passing through contacts 763 and 772 for the energization of the digit relay. R 810. While operating, the numerical relay R 810 closes, at contacts 811, a bypass passing through resistance 780 of the left winding of response relay R 740,

   so as to reduce the impedance of the dialing loop circuit which terminates, through the trunk line 500, at the switching devices of the local exchange C. Of course, the response relay R 740 releases its armature, but this is without effect at this time In addition, the digit relay R 810 closes, at contacts 812, an obvious circuit for energizing the auxiliary digit relay R 620. When operating, this closes, at contacts 621, a bypass on the winding 636 of the repeater 630, which further reduces the impedance of the call loop comprising the junction line 500. The relay R 620, on the other hand, closes at the contacts 622, another bypass on the winding 633 of the repeater 630.

   In addition, the auxiliary R 620 digit relay closes, at contacts 624, a circuit passing through contacts 645 and 848 for the unapplication of earth at the junction point of the upper and lower windings of the R 640 shunt relay. The other terminal of the Lower winding of the R 640 shunt relay is connected directly to the battery and 1 + another terminal of the upper winding of said relay is connected, via contacts 644 to a battery resistor. upper and lower windings of the shunt relay R 640 are thus energized, said relay performs the first phase of its staggered action and thus closes, at contacts 643,

     a circuit passing through oontacts 771 and applying another earth to the terminal of its upper winding. while interrupting, to contacts 644, previously to the battery

  <Desc / Clms Page number 75>

 the previously trace circuit which connected said terminal to the battery. Consequently, the upper winding of the shunt relay R 640 is then bypassed, which prevents said relay from completing the second phase of its phased action.



   Whenever the simplex pulse relay
R 710 releases its armature, then attracts it again, it opens, then closes, at contacts 711, the loop circuit which ends, via the trunk line 500, at the switching devices of the local automatic exchange C .



   The first switching hostage of these devices is then ordered according to the number transmitted. Since the control relay R 770 and the digit relay R 810 are both of the delayed release type, they are kept actuated during the passage of the cipher impulses by the simplex R 710 impulse relay. transmission of the digit, the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 is kept in its working position, which also keeps the simplex relay activated.
R 1750 in trunk line circuit 170 and simplex pulse relay R 710 in junction circuit 50.

   The R 710 simplex impulse relay activated maintains closed, at contacts 711, the loop circuit which ends, via junction line 500, at the switching devices of the local exchange C, and keeps energized at the contacts. 712 the control relay R 770. On the other hand, the single pulse relay: R 710 Interrupts, at the contacts
713, the previously drawn circuit which kept the digit relay R 810 energized, so that the latter relay releases its armature a short time later, since it is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its armature, the R 810 digit relay interrupts, at the contacts
811, the bypass previously established on the winding of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 76>

 of the response relay R 740, which causes the latter relay to be re-energized in the loop circuit comprising the trunk line 500.

   De marne, the R 8L0 digit relay interrupts, at contacts 812, the circuit previously indicated, which kept the auxiliary R 620 digit relay actuated, and the latter relay releases its armature a short time later, given that it is of the delayed release type. By releasing its armature, the auxiliary digit relay R 620 interrupts, at contacts 624, the circuit previously drawn to shorten the upper winding of the shunt relay R 640, so that the lower and upper windings of said relay relay. shunt are energized in series by a circuit passing through contacts' 643 and 771.

   At this moment, the shunt relay R 640 completes the second phase of its staggered action, that is to say it operates fully and interrupts, at contacts 641 and 642, the branches normally established on windings 631 and 633 of repeater 630, so as to prepare this repeater for a telephone conversation between the position of the calling operator on the trunk panel of remote exchange A and the station of the called subscriber of local exchange C. D ' on the other hand, the auxiliary digit relay opens, at contacts 621 and 622, the previously indicated branches which respectively bypassed the windings 636 and 633 of the repeater 630, which completes the preparation of the repeater 630 for the telephone conversation.



   At this moment, the calling operator of the trunk panel of remote exchange A finished the transmission of the first digit to the local exchange C, this digit was repeated to the automatic switching devices of said local exchange C by the trunk line 500 and the circuit of junction 50, said number being repeated to junction circuit 50 by trunk circuit 170. The calling operator from the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 77>

 trunk table of the remote exchange A then proceeds to the transmission of the other digits, by trunk line 2060, to trunk line circuit 170.

   On receipt of each digit, the trunk line circuit 170 controls the junction circuit 50, which itself controls the switching devices of the local exchange C according to the previously explained process. At this time, the last stage of the switching apparatus of the local exchange C a selects the line which terminates at the requested subscriber station and immediately proceeds to its test to determine whether it is free or busy.



   Assuming that the last switching hostage of the local exchange C finds that the line which terminates at the requested subscriber station is free, a ringing current is transmitted by this final final stage to said subscriber station, in the usual manner. Then, when the called subscriber answers the called party, the final switching stage of local exchange C acts to establish a communication between the calling Empress position at the long distance office of remote exchange A and the called subscriber station of central neighbor C,.

   In addition, at this moment, the final switching stage of the neighboring exchange C 1% pours, on the trunk line 500, the potentials of the earth and of the battery, so that the left winding of the response relay R 740 of the junction circuit 50 assumes a polarity such that said relay releases its armature.



   At this moment, said relay closes, at contacts 742, a circuit passing through contacts 712, 813, 625 and 522 for energizing the end of conversation relay R 610. When operating, the end of conversation relay R 610 opens), at contacts 611, the normally formed circuit passing through capacitor 503, resistor 504 and contacts 823 and 623 and bypassing windings 633 and 631 of repeater 630.

   The end of conversation relay R 610 also closes, at contacts 612, a

  <Desc / Clms Page number 78>

 .circuit passing through contacts 726 'and energizing the current reversing relay R 730, so that the conductors C 881 and C 882 of the 880 A junction are reversed in the connection between the simplex pulse relay R 710 of the junction circuit 50 and the simplex relay R 750 in the trunk line circuit. 170. This operation has no effect at this time.

   In addition, the end of conversation relay R 610 closes, at contacts 613, a circuit passing through contacts 666; 658, 524 and 683 for Inapplication of the earth to the control conductor C 884 of the junction 880 A and, consequently, to the control conductor C 1703 of the junction 1700, which closes the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875 in the trunk line circuit 170, in such a way that the latter relay attracts its armature.

   While operating, the end of conversation relay R 1875 suspends the application of the earth to the inrush conductor C 2001 by replacing this earth with the battery, which keeps the signaling relay R 2040 activated in the line circuit. interurban 170 and ensures the excitation of the R 2070 signaling relay in the 2065 trunk line circuit, When operating, the R 2070 signaling relay turns on the lamp L 2075 'which indicates to the calling operator of the trunk panel at the central office remote A that the called subscriber of the local exchange C has answered the call.



   The called subscriber of local exchange C can, by manipulating his switching hook, transmit supervisory signals to the calling operator from the interurban switchboard to the remote exchange A. For example, when the called subscriber of local exchange C hangs up its receiver on the switch hook provided for this purpose, the final switching stage of the local exchange C reverses the application of the potentials.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 79>

 earth and battery on the trunk line 500, so that the polarity of the left winding of the response relay R 740 in the junction circuit 50 becomes such that this relay operates.

   While operating, the response relay R 740 opens, at contacts 742 the circuit previously drawn which kept the end of conversation relay R 610 actuated. The latter, when releasing its armature, interrupts), at contacts 613, the previously traced circuit which applied earth to the C 884 control conductor of the 880 A junction and, therefore), to the C 1703 control conductor of the 1700 junction, causing the armature of the end of talk relay to release R 1875 in the trunk line 170 circuit.

   The last relay indicated, by releasing its armature, replaces the battery earth on the signaling conductor C 2001, so as to keep the signaling relay R 2040 actuated in the trunk line circuit 170 and to trigger the release. the frame of the R 2070 signaling relay in the 2065 trunk line circuit. By releasing its frame, the R 2070 signaling relay extinguishes the L 2075 lamp indicating the position of the operator on the trunk panel of the exchange distant. A, so as to indicate to the operator of this position the recorded condition.



   The calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A then proceeds to release the trunk line 2060, which has the effect of determining that of the trunk line 170, all according to the process described above. When trunk line 170 is released, finder 1402, inbound selector 1403, second trunk selector 1404, and third trunk selector 1406 are all returned to their home position in a conventional manner.

   When the third

  <Desc / Clms Page number 80>

 trunk selector 1406 is in its rest position, trunk selector R 850 and simplex pulse relay R 710 of junction circuit 50 both release their armature. By releasing the armature, the simplex pulse relay R 710 interrupts, at contacts 711, the previously drawn loop circuit which connected the left winding of the response relay R740 to the final switching stage of the center !.

   C, so that the latter relay also releases its armature and that all the switching devices of the neighboring exchange C are brought back to idle, which indicates that the line leading to the called subscriber's station has become free
In addition, by releasing its armature, the simplex pulse relay R 710 opens, at contacts 712, the circuit previously drawn which kept the control relay R 770 actuated, so that the latter releases its armature for some time. only moments later, since it is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its armature, the bonding relay R 770 interrupts, at contacts 771, the circuits previously drawn which kept the simplex connection relay R 660, the switching relay R 650, the bypass relay R 640 activated. and the end of conversation relays R 610 and R 520, so that all these relays are then de-energized * By releasing its armature, the interurban selection relay R 850 interrupts, at contacts 853, the previously traced circuit which kept 1 'attracted. armature of the switching relay R 720 and the latter, by releasing its armature, opens, at contacts 726 ', the previously trace circuit which kept the current reversal relay R 730 energized.

   Finally, the interurban selection relay R 850 interrupts, at contacts 851, the circuit previously drawn which applied a ground to the control conductor C 885 of the junction.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 81>

 880 B and again closes, at $ 852, a normal circuit applying the battery to this conductor, through the winding of the local selection rolais R 860, which indicates to the outgoing trunk selectors 513 X, etc. .. and to outgoing trunk selectors 511 X, etc ... which have access to junction 880 B and, consequently to junction circuit 50, that these are free.

   At this time, the trunk circuit 50 is fully open, and the trunk line 500 connecting the main exchange B to the local exchange C becomes available for further use.



   During the routing of the call described above originating from the position of the calling operator of the trunk table of the remote exchange A, via the main exchange B to a called subscriber station belonging to the exchange local C, the arrival selector 1403, the second interurban selector 1404 or the third interurban selector 1406 may be in the presence of a case of total occupancy * That of these switches which found itself in the presence of such case, Interrupts the loop circuit which returns, through junction 1700, to the interurban liana circuit 170,

     and applies to the 0 1705 control conductor of the 1700 junction, 120 earth pulses or 240 alternatively positive and negative pulses per minute, When the closed circuit comprising the 1700 junction is interrupted, the R 1770 loop selection relay releases its armature, which causes the R 1980 and R 1990 control relays to be energized. The R 1980 control relay causes the R 1970 control relay to be energized.

   The control relay R 1990 causes the excitation of the connection relay on the simplex R 2010 and the control relay R 1970 causes the excitation of the switching relay R 2020, all of these operations taking place according to the previously described procossus. When operating, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 causes the relay armature to release.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 82>

 end of conversation R 1920 which itself causes the release of the armature of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1840. When operating, the switching relay R 2020 causes the armature of the control relays R 1980 to release. and R 1990.

   The control relay R 1980 causes the de-energization of the control relay R 1970 and the latter causes that of the end of conversation relay R 1875, all these operations taking place in the manner explained above.



  At this time, the 120 earth pulses or the 240 pulses. alternately positive and negative applied every minute to the control conductor 0 1703 of junction 1700 close, the circuit previously drawn and .''excite intermittently 1. upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875; this then works in a corresponding way.

   Intermittent operation of the end of conversation relay R 1875 produces an intermittent and alternating application of negative and positive potentials to the signaling conductor C 2001 and the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 is kept in its working position, while that the R 2070 signaling relay of the trunk line circuit 2065 also operates intermittently.

   The intermittent operation of the R 2070 signaling relay causes a corresponding flickering of the L 2075 lamp indicating the position of the calling operator on the trunk panel of the remote exchange 'A, which indicates to the operator of this position the status circuit occupancy *
On the other hand, it will be noted that during the routing of the call described above coming from the position of the calling operator to the trunk panel of the remote exchange A via the main exchange B to at the requested subscriber station of the local exchange C, all the switching stages of said local exchange C may be present

  <Desc / Clms Page number 83>

 of a case. of total occupation or a case of line occupation.

   That of the switches, which is in the presence of such a case, operates in such a way as to interrupt the loop circuit, comprising the trunk line 500, which terminates in return at the junction circuit 50, and to cause the application of a busy tone current to the interurban line 500. When the loop circuit passing through the interurban line 500 is open, the response relay R 740 releases its armature and causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 610.

   This last relay closes, while operating, at contacts 613, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 884 of the junction 880 A and, consequently, to the control conductor C 1703 of the junction. 1700, which causes the end of conversation relay R 1875 to operate in the trunk line circuit 170, following the process previously discussed.

   While functioning, the end of conversation relay R 1875 replaces the earth battery for the signaling conductor C 2001, which keeps the armature of the signaling relay R 2040 attracted in the trunk line circuit 170 and which causes 1 excitation of the R 2070 signaling relay in the 3065 trunk line circuit. When operating, the 3 2070 signaling relay turns on the L 2075 lamp, which gives the calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A a monitoring signal.

   On the other hand, busy tone current from local exchange C is retransmitted through trunk line 500 and trunk 50, intermediate switch series a, trunk line 170 and trunk line. interurban line 8060, at. Interurban line circuit 2065, which signals to the operator the case of occupancy encountered

  <Desc / Clms Page number 84>

   ROUTING THE CALL TO A POSITION
SUBSCRIBE TO REMOTE CENTRAL 'D.



   Assume now that the call routed 'from the position of the calling operator to the trunk panel of remote exchange A, through trunk line 2060, trunk line circuit 170 and pager 1402 to the arrival selector 1403, must be transmitted to a subscriber station belonging to the remote exchange D, the first digit received by the arrival selector 1403 causes the selection of a second selector of the group comprising, in particular the second long distance selector 1404:

     Assuming, further, that inbound selector 1403 precisely selects second trunk selector 1404, the second digit received by trunk circuit 170 is repeated on the loop circuit including junction 1700 to second selector 1404 , following the process described above * The second selector 1404 then selects the group of third long distance selectors comprising, in particular, the third selector 1406 then, in this group, a third free selector.

   Assuming that the second inter-city selector 1404 precisely selects the third inter-city selector 1406 the third digit received acts on, this third selector 1406 in such a way that it selects the group of junctions which results in the group of junction circuits com - Taking, in particular, the junction circuit 90, then, in this group, a free junction.

   Assuming again that the third trunk selector 1406 selects the 1280 A junction, which leads to the junction circuit 90, earth is applied by the third selector 1406 to the control conductor C 1283 of the 1280 A junction, which closes a circuit passing through contacts 1238, 1135 and 1146 and through the occupancy key K 1147 for energizing the selection relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 85>

 R 1180. When operating, the selection relay R 1180 opens, at contacts 1181, a normally closed circuit passing through contacts 1141 and 1231 and applies the battery, via the winding of the local selection relay R 1130, to the control conductor C 1285 of junction 1280 B.

   



  The selection relay R 1180, on the other hand, at contacts 1182, closes a circuit passing through contacts 1231 and applying earth to the control conductor C 1285 of junction 1280 B. This junction is thus indicated as occupied to long distance selectors of departure 513 X, etc., which have access to said junction.

   In addition, the interurban selector relay R 1180 closes, at contacts 1184, a circuit via the occupancy key K 1185 for the energization of the switching relay R 1120,
On the other hand, when the third trunk selector 1406 selects the 1280 A junction, the battery is applied, through the resistor 1027 and the contacts 1026 and 1062, to the control conductor C 1284 of the 1280 A junction and, therefore, to the control conductor C 1703 of junction 1700, so as to close the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 1920 in the trunk line circuit 170.

   The end-of-conversation relay R 1920 then causes the activation of the auxiliary end-of-conversation relay R 1840, which itself causes the excitation of the end-of-conversation relay R 1875, according to the process described above.



  While operating, the end of conversation relay R 1875 reverses the application of the positive and negative potentials to the signaling conductor 0 2001, which keeps the signaling relay R 2040 activated in the trunk line circuit 170, and which causes the '' energization of the R 2070 signaling relay in the trunk line circuit

  <Desc / Clms Page number 86>

 2065.

   When operating, the R 2070 signaling relay turns on the L 2075 lamp indicating the position of the calling operator on the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, which indicates to the operator in this position that the call is being transmitted. must be postponed, since the switching devices of the remote exchange D are not, at this moment, able to receive it.



     -When operating, the R 1120 signaling relay closes, at contacts 1122, 1124, 1126 and 1122 ', a connection between the line relay R 1080 and the differential relay R 1090 and the line conductors C 1281 and 0.1282 of the junction 1280 A. More exactly, the earth is applied by the upper winding of R 1080, the lower winding of R 1090 and the contacts 1114, 1126, 954,942 and 11221 to the line conductor 0 1282, and the battery is applied by the lower winding of R 1080, the contacts 956, the upper winding of R 1090 and the contacts 1112, 1124, 952, 941 and 1122 to the line conductor 0 1281.

   at this moment, the earth applied to contacts 1823 of the repeater relay R 1820 actuated in the trunk line circuit 170 is applied directly to the conductor 0 1702 of the junction 1700 and, through the upper winding of the relay of loop selection R 1770, to conductor C 1701 of junction 1700, all these operations taking place according to the process described above.

   Finally, the conductors C 1701 and C 1702 of the junction 1700 are connected, by the intermediate switches, to the conductors C 1281 and 0 1282 of the junction 1280 B, A series circuit is thus closed for the excitation of the upper winding of the loop selector relay R 1770 in trunk line circuit 170, the upper winding of the differential relay R 1090 and the lower winding of the line relay R 1080 of the junction circuit 90. Another circuit is closed for the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 87>

 series short-circuiting of the upper winding of the line relay R 1080 and the lower winding of the differential relay R 1090.

   As a result, the loop selection relay R 1770, in the interurban line circuit 170, is kept in its working position and the line relay R 1080 as well as the differential relay R 1090 of the junction circuit 90 attract their frames
It will be noted that the differential relay R 1090 operates at this time, given that the conditions necessary for this purpose are fulfilled. In addition, when operating, the switching relay R 1120 exits, at the contacts 1123 ', a circuit passing through the contacts 1021 and the jumper 928 for the energization of the delay relay R 920.

   While operating, the delay relay R 920 closes, at contacts 922, an excitation circuit of the winding of the end of conversation relay R 935, so that the latter relay operates a short time later, being given that it is of the delayed attraction type.

   In addition, while operating, the line relay R 1080 close at contacts 1081, an excitation circuit of the bonding relay R 1050 and, at contacts 1083, a circuit passing through contacts 1124 'and 1144 and applying a battery, via the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170, to the signaling conductor 0 905, connected directly via the jumper 908 to the line conductor C 901, and, via the windings 911 and 912 of the repeater to the line conductor C 902,

   said conductors 0 901 and C 902 of the trunk line 900 leading to a junction circuit at the remote exchange D. When the circuit traced above is closed between the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170 of the junction circuit 90 and the remote exchange junction circuit D, the end of conversation relay R 1170 is not energized, since it is

  <Desc / Clms Page number 88>

 of the marginal type. However, the junction circuit at the remote exchange D is controlled so as to ensure the connection of the switching devices of this central office with the trunk line 900, an operation which may require a certain time.



   When the switching devices at the remote exchange D are associated with the mid-distance trunk line 900 and are ready to receive a digit, a low resistance earth potential is applied to this line and consequently to the simplex conductor 0 901 and to the signaling conductor C 905 which is connected to it, which completes a circuit practically identical to that which had been drawn previously for the energization of the Lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170, and the latter relay is then energized * By operating the end of conversation relay R 1170 closes, at contacts 1171, an obvious circuit for energizing the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150.

   While operating, this auxiliary relay closes, at contacts 1151, a circuit passing through contacts 1236 and ensuring the excitation of the control relay R 1020. The latter closes while operating, at contacts 1023, a circuit passing through contacts 1052 and ensuring the maintenance of its own frame. In addition, the control relay R 1020 opens, at contacts 1021, the circuit previously drawn which kept the delay relay R 920 actuated, and the latter releases its armature a short instant later, given that it is of the release type. deferred. Eh releasing its armature, the delay relay R 920 interrupts, at contacts 922, the previously indicated circuit which kept the end of conversation relay R 935 actuated.

   In addition, the control relay R 1020 closes, at contacts 1024, a circuit passing through contacts 1136 and 1091 and ensuring the excitation of the control relay R 1060, which, when operating, opens at

  <Desc / Clms Page number 89>

 contacts 1062 an additional circuit passing through contacts 1025, 938 and 959, which had been closed following the operation of the end of conversation relay R 935 and which ensured the application of a battery to the control conductor C 1284 :.



  On the other hand, the control relay R 1060 closes, at contacts 1061, an additional circuit applying the battery, through the windings of the long distance relay R 925 and the long distance relay R 930, to the control conductor. C 1284. When the circuit indicated above is closed, an additional circuit is also closed to keep the end-of-talk relay R 1920 activated in the trunk line circuit 170, so that the trunk relay R 925 and the trunk relays R 930 of junction circuit 90 both attract their armature. In operation, the trunk relay R 925 closes an obvious circuit at contacts 926 for energizing the auxiliary trunk relay R 940.

   For its part, while operating, the interurban relay R 930 closes, at contacts 931, an obvious circuit for the excitation of the connection relay on simplex R 1010. While operating, this last relay closes, at contacts 1014, a bonding circuit which passes through contacts' 1183 and the occupancy key K 1185 to keep it activated.

   While operating, the auxiliary trunk relay R 1040 closes, at contacts 1044, a circuit passing through contacts 927 for the energization of the switching relay R 950, This closes while operating, at contacts 957, a bonding circuit passing through contacts 1183 and the occupancy key K 1185, to keep it actuated. On the other hand, the auxiliary long distance relay R 1040 closes, at contacts 1045, a bonding circuit passing through contacts 1065 and now actuated control relay R 1060 and, on the other hand, closes at contacts 1042,

   a point common to contacts 1063 of the actuated line relay R 1080 between the lower winding of the end relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 90>

 conversation switch R 1170 and signaling conductor C 905. In addition, when operating, the switching relay R 950 interrupts, at contacts 952, 954 and 956, the connections previously established between the line relay R 1080, the differential relay R 1090 and the line conductors C 1281 and 0 1282 of the junction 1280 A, so that the last indicated relays release their armature, as does the loop selection relay R 1770 of the trunk line circuit 170.

   In addition, the switching relay R 950 allows contacts' 953, a circuit applying the battery, through the winding of the simplex pulse relay R 1070 and contacts 1128; 1012, 953, 942 and 1122f, to conductor C 1282 of junction 1280 B. Said conductor C 1282 is connected to the grounded conductors 0 1702 of junction 1700 which terminates in trunk line circuit 170. Accordingly, the R 1070 simplex pulse relay is energized and operates at this time by closing, at contacts 1071, a bonding circuit passing through contacts 1082 and now actuating the R 1050 bonding relay.

   Since this sticking relay is of the delayed release type, it is kept actuated during the transient period during which the line relay R 1080 releases its armature, while the relay: d * simplex pulses R 107D attracts its own . In addition, the simplex pulse relay R 1070 closes, at contacts 1073, another multiple point at contacts 1042 of the auxiliary trunk relay R 1040 actuated between the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 970 and the signal conductor C 905.



   By releasing its armature, the loop selection relay R 1770 of the trunk line circuit 170 causes the activation of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990, which in turn cause the activation of the control relay R 1970 and the connection relay. on simplex R 2010. next

  <Desc / Clms Page number 91>

 the process explained previously, The control relay R 1970 causes the switching of the switching relay R 2020 and the connection relay on simplex R 2010 causes the de-energization of the end of conversation relay R 1920. The switching relay R ZOZO causes, for its part, the de-operation of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990, following the process described above.

   On recovering, the end-of-talk relay R 1920 causes the release of the auxiliary end-of-talk relay R1840 a short time later}, given that the latter relay is of the delayed release type as indicated above. In addition, the connection relay on the simplex R 2010 opens, at the 2015 contacts, the series circuit previously drawn which kept the interurban relay R 925 and the interurban relay R 930 in the junction circuit 90, and these two relays actuated. then release their armature., On the other hand, the complete connection relay on simplex R 2010, to contacts 2016, the connection previously drawn between the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1875 and the conductor of command C 1703 from junction 1700.

   By releasing its armature, the control relay R 1980 causes the de-energization of the control relay R 1970 a short time later and, by releasing its armature, the control relay R 1970 causes the de-energization of the end of conversation relay R 1875, all these operations taking place following the process described above. On restoring, the end of conversation R 1875 relay causes the substitution of the battery earth on the signaling conductor C 2001, which keeps the signaling relay R 1040 of the trunk line circuit actuated. 170 and which brings about the relàohement of the armature of the signaling relay R 2070 of the trunk line circuit 2065, as explained previously.

   In itself

  <Desc / Clms Page number 92>

 re-establishing, the R 2070 signaling relay extinguishes the L 2075 lamp indicating the position of the calling operator on the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, which indicates to Empress from this position that she can proceed to the call. transmission of the call, since the switching devices of the neighboring exchange D are now able to receive the first digit.



   In addition, by releasing its armature, the control relay R 1970 closes, at contacts 1971, the previously drawn simplex circuit which passes through contacts 2041 to connect the winding of the simplex relay B 1750 to conductors C 1701 and C 1702. of junction 1700. In this way, @the simplex relay R 1750 of the trunk line circuit 170 is energized in series with the simplex pulse relay R 1070 of the junction circuit 90, since the latter relay is, therefore, moment, connected to the conductor C 1282 of the junction 1280 A, as explained previously.

   While operating, the R 1750 simplex relay causes the excitation of the R 1760 auxiliary simple relay, which itself causes the de-energization of the R 1820 repeater relay, all in the manner explained previously *
In the junction circuit, 90, by releasing its armature, the interurban relay R 925 interrupts, at contacts 926, the previously indicated circuit which kept the auxiliary interurban relay R 1040 actuated and this relay releases its armature a short time later, being given that it is of the delayed release type * By releasing its armature, the auxiliary interurban relay R 1040 closes, at contacts 1041, a circuit passing through contacts 1128, 1011, 951,

   941 and 1122 for connecting the R-1070 simplex pulse relay with conductor C 1281 of the 1280 A junction.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 93>

 Consequently, at this time, a complete simplex connection is established between the simplex pulse relay R 1070 of the junction circuit 90 and the simplex relay 1750 of the trunk line circuit 170.

   In addition, the auxiliary interurban relay R 1040 interrupts, at contacts 1043, the circuit previously drawn which kept the control relay R 1060 actuated. On reestablishment, this latter relay disconnects at contacts 1061 the control conductor C 1284. the junction 1280 A of the trunk relay R 925 and the trunk relay R 930 and prepares, at contacts 1062, a circuit for the application of the earth to the control conductor 0 1284. In addition, the auxiliary trunk relay R 1040 interrupts, at contacts 1042. the multiple contact point 1073 of the R 1070 simplex pulse relay activated.



  In this way, the simplex circuit which ends at the remote exchange D can at this moment be controlled by the actuated simplex pulse relay R 1070.



   The calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A then proceeds to the transmission of the next digit on trunk line 2060, so that signaling relay R 2040 of trunk line circuit 170 operates accordingly and repeats, at contacts 2041), the pulses of this digit, via the simplex relay R 1750 of the interurban line circuit 170, to the simplex pulse relay R 1070 of the junction circuit 90. The indicated relays then operate from corresponding way.

   Energizing and de-energizing the R 1750 simplex relay in trunk line 170 has no effect, since the associated R 1760 auxiliary simplex relay is of the delayed release type. However, the first time that the simplex pulse relay R 1070 of junction circuit 90 releases its armature, it closes, at the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 94>

 contacts 1072, a circuit passing through contacts 1082 and 1053 and causing the excitation of the digit relay R 1030. When operating, the digit relay R 1030 establishes, at the contacts 1031, an additional bypass on the bearing 913 of the repeater 910 , so as to ensure a reduction in the impedance of the circuit traced above and passing through the simplex relay R 1070.

   In addition, the number relay R 1030 closes, at contacts 1033, a circuit passing through contacts 945 and applying the earth to the junction point between the upper and lower windings of the shunt relay R 940, the other terminal of 1 upper winding of the shunt relay R 940 being connected directly to the battery and the other terminal of the lower winding of the shunt relay R 940 being connected, via the contacts 944, to a battery resistance.

   When the upper and lower windings of the R 940 bypass relay are thus energized, this relay performs the first phase of its staggered action and closes, at contacts 943, a circuit passing through contacts 1052 and applying the earth to the other terminal of the lower winding of relay R 940 while opening, at contacts 944, the previously drawn circuit which connected said terminal to the battery resistor * Consequently, the lower winding of the shunt relay R 940 is short-circuited at this time, preventing this relay from performing the second phase of its staggered action *
Whenever the R 1070 simplex pulse relay releases its armature and then attracts it again,

   it interrupts and then closes, at contacts 1073, the simplex circuit which ends, via the interurban line 900, at the switching devices of the remote exchange D. The first switching stage of these devices is then controlled according to the number transmitted , Since the bonding relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 95>

 R 1050 and digit relay B 1030 are both of the delayed release type, they are kept actuated during the transmission of pulses by the simplex pulse relay R 1070.

   At the end of the transmission of the digit, the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 keeps its armature attracted, which also keeps the armature of the simplex relay R 1750 of the trunk line circuit 170 in. working position ,, as well as the armature of the R 1070 simplex impulse relay of the 1090 junction circuit. The R 1070 simplex impulse relay keeps closed, at contacts 1073, the simplex circuit which ends, via the 'intermediary of the junction 900, to the switching devices of the remote exchange D and maintains actuated, to the contacts 1071, the bonding relay R 1050.

   In addition, the simplex pulse relay R 1070 opens, at contacts 1072, the previously drawn circuit which maintained actuates the digit relay R 1030, and this latter relay releases its armature a short time later, since it is of the delayed release type. On reestablishing itself, the digit relay R 1030 interrupts, at contacts 1031, the additional branch established on winding 913 of repeater 910 and also interrupts, at contacts 1033, the circuit previously trac (which bypasses the circuit. lower winding of the R 940 bypass relay.

   Under these conditions, the upper and lower windings of the R 940 shunt relay are energized in series by a circuit passing through the contacts 1052 and 943. At this moment the R 940 shunt relay performs the second phase of its staggered action) , which interrupts, at contacts 941 and 942, the branch normally established on the windings 913 and 914 of the repeater 910, so as to prepare the latter for a telephone conversation between the position of the calling operator on the inter-

  <Desc / Clms Page number 96>

 of the remote exchange A and the station of the called subscriber of the remote exchange D.



   At this moment, the calling operator of the trunk panel of remote exchange A has finished sending the first
Digit at the remote exchange D and this digit has been repeated at the automatic switching devices of said central D, by the trunk line 900 and by the junction circuit 90, the digit being repeated at the trunk circuit 90 by the trunk line 170.

   The calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A'proo proceeds to the dial formation of the other digits and to their sending on trunk line 2060 to trunk line circuit 170 where, in response to each of these digits, the circuit trunk line 170 controls the trunk circuit 90, which itself controls the switching devices of the remote exchange D following the process explained previously * At this time, the final stage of the switching devices of the remote central D has selected the line which terminates at the called subscriber's extension and immediately tests that line to determine whether it is free or busy.



   If the final switching stage of the apparatuses of the remote exchange D finds that the line which terminates at the called subscriber station is free, inrush current is transmitted on this line by the indicated final stage in a conventional manner. Then, when the called subscriber answers the call, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D will operate to establish a communication between the station of the calling machine to the trunk table of the remote exchange.
A and the called subscriber of the remote exchange D.

   In addition, at this moment, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D operates in such a way as to increase the resistance of the circuit applying the earth to the trunk line 900 and, consequently, to the simplex conductor C 901 and to the conductor d. 'call

  <Desc / Clms Page number 97>

 C 905, so that the end of conversation relay R 1170 of the junction circuit 90 releases its armature, since it is of the marginal type. By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 1170 opens, at contacts 1171, the circuit previously drawn which kept the armature of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 attracted.



  By releasing its armature, this last relay closes, at contacts 1152, a circuit passing through contacts 1236, 1032 and 1022 and ensuring the energization of the end of conversation relay R 935. When operating)) the end of conversation relay conversion R 935 withstand, at contacts 938, a circuit passing through contacts 1015, 958, 1025 and 1062 for the nonapplication of earth to the control conductor C 1284 of the junction 1280 A and, consequently, to the control conductor C 1703 from junction 1700.

   In this way, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the upper winding of the end of talk relay R 1875 of the trunk line circuit 170 is closed, and this latter relay is energized. When operating, the end of talk relay conversation R 1875 interrupts the application of the earth potential and applies a battery potential to the signaling conductor C 2001, which keeps the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 actuated and which causes the excitation of the R 2070 signaling relay. trunk line circuit 2065.

   When operating, the R 2070 signaling relay turns on the L 2075 lamp, which indicates to the operator of the trunk panel of remote exchange A that the called subscriber of remote exchange D has answered the call.



   The called subscriber of the remote exchange D can manipulate his switching hook to transmit supervisory signals to the operator of the trunk switchboard of the remote exchange A. For example, when the called subscriber of the central

  <Desc / Clms Page number 98>

 remote exchange D hangs up its receiver on the switch hook provided for this purpose, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D operates in such a way as to reduce the resistance of the earth application circuit to the trunk line 900, which produces a new energization of the end of conversation relay R 1170 in the junction circuit 90.

   While operating, the end of conversation relay R 970 causes the activation of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150, which in turn determines the release of the armature of the end of conversation relay R 935, all these operations taking place according to the process described previously. On reestablishment, the end of conversation relay R 935 opens, at contacts 938, the circuit previously drawn for the application of an earth to the control conductor C 1284 of the junction 1280 A and, consequently, to the control conductor C 1703 of the junction 1700, which causes the armature of the end of conversation relay R 1875 to release, in the trunk line circuit 170.

   The latter relay, by releasing its armature, interrupts the application of the battery to the signaling conductor C 2001, replacing this battery with the earth, which keeps the signaling relay R 2040 actuated in the trunk line circuit 170 and causes releasing the armature of the R 2070 signaling relay in the interurban line 2065 circuit. By releasing its armature, the R 2070 signaling relay switches off the L 2075 lamp indicating the position of the calling operator on the trunk switchboard of the remote central A, which indicates to this operator the state of the circuits.



   The operator calling the trunk panel of remote exchange A then proceeds to release trunk line 2060, which has the effect of causing that of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 99>

 trunk line circuit 170, all following the process described above.

   When trunk circuit 170 is released, finder 1402, inbound selector 1403, second interurban selector 1404: and third trunk selector 1406 are all returned to their home position, in a conventional manner * When the third trunk selector is thus returned to the idle position, the trunk selector relay R 1180 and the simplex pulse relay R 1070 of the junction circuit 90 both release their armature * When releasing its armature, the R 1070 simplex pulse relay opens, at 1073 col- tacts,

   the simplex circuit which connected the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170 to the final switching stage of the remote exchange D. Under these conditions, the end of conversation relay R 1170 releases its armature, and all the switching devices from the remote exchange D return to their idle position, indicating that the line terminating at the station of the requested subscriber is free. In addition, by releasing its armature, the R 1070 simplex pulse relay opens, at contacts 1071, the circuit previously drawn which kept the R 1050 bonding relay actuated. This last relay releases its armature a short instant later, given that 'it's the delayed release type.

   By releasing its armature, the R 1050 bonding relay interrupts, at contacts 1052, the circuits previously drawn which kept the control relay R 1020 and the shunt relay R 940 actuated. In addition, by releasing its armature, the interurban selection relay R 1180 interrupts, at contacts 1183, the circuits previously traced which kept the simplex connection relay R 1010 and the switching relay B 950 actuated.

   Relay R 1180 again opens, at contacts 1184, the previously traced circuit which kept switching relay R 1120 actuated. By releasing its armature,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 100>

 the switching relay R 1120 closes, at contacts 1125-, a circuit passing through contacts 1162 and 1144 in order to apply earth again via the input selection relay R 1240, to the signal conductor Ç 905 and, therefore, to the simplex conductor 0 901, which again indicates to the remote center D that the trunk line 900 is free.

   In addition, by releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 1170 interrupts, at contacts 1171, the previously indicated circuit which kept the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 actuated. Finally, the interurban selection relay R 1180 interrupts, at contacts 1182, the previously traced circuit which applied earth to the control conductor 0 1285 of junction 1280 B and closes, at contacts 1181, the normally closed circuit which, passing through contacts 1231 and 1141, applied the battery, via the winding of the local selection relay
R 1130, to the driver, command 0 1285, which indicates that the junction 1280 D, and therefore the junction circuit
90, are free at outgoing interurban selectors 513 X etc ...

   who have access to said circuit. At this moment, the junction circuit 90 is completely free and the interurban line 900 which connects, the main exchange B to the remote exchange D, becomes available for a new use *
With regard to the routing of the call de- fined above, from the position of the calling operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, through the intern of the main exchange B, to a set subscriber requested from the exchange removes D, the arrival selector 1403, the second interurban selector 1404 or the third interurban selector 1406 may be in the presence of a case of total occupation and that of these switches, which is find.

   in the presence of such a case, operates in such a way as to open

  <Desc / Clms Page number 101>

 the loop circuit which terminates in return, through junction 1700, to the trunk line circuit 170 and so as to apply per minute 120 earth pulses or 240 pulses alternately positive and negative to the control conductor C 1705 of the junction 1700. When the loop circuit including junction 1700 is open, the R 1770 loop selection relay releases its armature. which causes the R 1980 and R 1990 control relays to be energized. The R 1980 control relay causes the R 1970 control relay to be energized.

   The control relay R 1990 causes that of the connection relay on simplex R 2010 and the control relay R 1970 that of the switching relay R 2020, all following the process described previously.



  When operating, the connection relay on simplex R 2010 causes the armature of the end of conversation relay R 1920 to release, and this one causes the armature of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1840 to release. when operating, the switching relay R 2020 causes the de-energization of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990. The control relay R 1980 releases the armature of the control relay R 1970 and this causes the de-exiting the end of conversation relay R 1875, all these operations taking place according to the process described above.

   At this moment, the 120 Earth pulses or the 240 pulses alternately positive and negative applied per minute to the control conductor 0 1705 of the junction 1700 close the circuit previously drawn and intermittently energize the upper winding of the relay. end of conversation R 1875, and this functions accordingly. Intermittent operation of the end of conversation relay R 1875 applies, also inter. mittent, alternately positive and negative potentials

  <Desc / Clms Page number 102>

 to the signal conductor C 2001,

   so that the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 is kept in its working position and the signaling relay R 2070 of the trunk line circuit 2065 works intermittently. The intermittent operation of the R 2070 signaling relay causes a corresponding flickering of the L 2075 lamp indicating the position of the calling Empress on the interurban table of the remote exchange A, which indicates to this operator the state of the circuits.



   In addition, it will be noted that, during the routing of the call described above from the position of the calling operator of the trunk table of the remote exchange A and through the main exchange B to the station of the - 'good requested from the remote exchange D, all the switching stages of the devices of the remote central D may be in the presence of a case of total occupation or a case of line occupation. The switch which is in the presence of one of these two occupancy cases operates in such a way as to open the circuit applying the earth to the trunk line 900 and, consequently, to the simplex conductor 0 901 and to the signaling conductor 0 905, so that the end of watering relay R 1170 of the junction circuit 90 releases its armature.

   In addition, the switch indicated causes the application of a busy tone current on the trunk line 900. By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 1170 causes the end of conversation relay to be reestablished. auxiliary R 1150, which causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 935.

   While operating, the end of conversation relay R 935 causes the application of earth to the control conductor C 1284 of the junction 1280 A and, consequently, to the control conductor 0.1703 of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 103>

 junction 1700, which causes the R 1875 end of conversation relay to be energized in the trunk line circuit
170, all following the process described above. By operating the end of conversation relay R 1875 substitutes the battery for the earth on the signaling conductor
C 2001,

   This keeps the R 2040 signaling relay actuated in the trunk line circuit 170 and causes the R2070 signaling relay of the trunk line circuit 2065 to be energized. When operating, the R 2070 signaling relay lights the L 2075 lamp. , which gives the trunk switchboard operator at the remote exchange A the appropriate surveillance indication.

   In addition, the busy tone current from the remote exchange D is retransmitted on the trunk line 900 through the trunk circuit.
90, the series of intermediate switches, trunk line 170 and trunk line 2060, to trunk line 2065, which gives the cited operator the busy indication *

  <Desc / Clms Page number 104>

 
Call from main exchange B to remote exchange A
A long distance call, originating at the main exchange B or routed to this exchange from the local exchange C, or from the remote exchange D, is finally routed to the trunk table 11 Y of the latter exchange.

   From there, it can be transmitted to remote exchange A.



  For example, a long distance call can be routed to operator position number 1 of the long distance table 11 y. via the response switch 16 Y of the junction 15Y then applied to the position circuit 18 Y. At this time,. the operator in position number 1 activates the set of keys 22 Y, which acts on the control circuit 20 Y and on the pulse transmitter 21 AY and the digit recorders 21 BY controlled by said circuit ,.

   In this way, the digits are entered into the 21 BY recorders, The 21 AY pulse transmitter is then controlled by the 21 BY digit recorders, so that they transmit the pulses corresponding to the first digit to the call switch 17 Y of junction 15 Y, The call switch 17 Y of junction 15 Y operates in such a way as to select! ' the group of second long distance selectors comprising, in particular, the second long distance selector 1412 then, in this group, a second free long distance selector, The pulse sender 21 AY then transmits the pulses of the following digits by the call switch 17 Y to the seperate trunk switch series, in a well known manner.

   If it is assumed that the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y precisely selects the second long distance selector 1412, the following digit is transmitted to this second selector 1412 which then selects the group of junctions comprising, in particular, the junction 1770 which terminates in the trunk line circuit group including, in particular, trunk line circuit 170. then selects from this group a trunk

  <Desc / Clms Page number 105>

 free.

   Assuming again that the second interurban selector 1412 precisely selects junction 1770 which terminates in trunk line circuit 170, the second interurban selector 1412 applies ground to control conductor c 1775 of junction 1770, this which closes a circuit passing through contacts 1712 for the energization of the selector relay R 1910 of the trunk line circuit 170. By operating the trunk selector relay R 1910 closes, at the contacts 1911, multiple obvious circuits for the energization of the trunk line circuit. switching relay R 1860 and control relay R 1930.

   When operating, the control relay R 1930 closes, at contacts 1931, a circuit passing through contacts 1822 and 2027 for energizing the control relay R 1830. When operating, the switching relay R 1860 closes at contacts 1863 , 1865, 1867 and 1862 'a circuit connecting the loop pulse relay R 1880 and the control relay R 1870 by branching on the conductors C 1771 and C 1772 of the junction 1770.

   This circuit is as follows: earth, lower winding of R 1880, upper winding of R 1870, contacts 1867, 2025, winding, 2033 of repeater 2030, contacts 18628. line conductor C 1772, on the one hand and: battery, winding upper of R 1880, contacts 1941 and 2025, lower winding of R 1870. contacts 1865, 2021, 1851 and 1863, line conductor C 1771, on the other hand.

   At this moment, the conductors C 1771 and C 1772 of junction 1770 are connected, by the intermediary of the second interurban selector 1412, of the call switch 17 Y. of the junction 15 Y, and of the position circuit 18 Y to the operator position number 1 of the Interurban table 11 Y and by the control circuit of the pulse transmitter 20 Y to the pulse transmitter 21 AY.

   In this way, a balanced loop of the 21 AY pulse generator is branched off on the indicated circuit passing through the conductors C 1771 and C 1772 and the junction 1770, which energizes the upper and internal windings of the relay. order R 1870 and

  <Desc / Clms Page number 106>

 R 1880 loop pulse relay * In sequence, the R 1880 loop pulse relay operates.

   On the other hand, the R 1870 control relay does not work, since it is of the differential type,
While operating, the R 1880 loop pulse relay closes, at contacts 1881, an obvious circuit for shorting the winding of the R 1930 control relay, which causes the armature of this armature to release. last relay and the opening, at contacts 1931, of the previously traced circuit which kept the control relay R 1830 actuated and this last relay releases its armature a short instant later, given that it is of the delayed release type.

   On restoring, the control relay R 1830 interrupts, at contacts 1831. a previously closed circuit which short-circuits, the winding 2031 of the repeater 2030. In this way, the winding 2031 is introduced into the previously traced loop circuit. , comprising the windings of the R 1880 loop pulse relay and the R 1870 control relay, as well as the 1770 junction. In addition, the R 1880 loop pulse relay opens, at contacts 1883. the relay previously drawn and normally closed which applied the earth to the signaling conductor G 2001 while closing,. to contacts 1880,

   a circuit passing through contacts 1895 and 1905 and applying the battery, via the stabilization resistor L 1872 ,, to the signaling conductor C 2001. When the battery is substituted for earth on the signaling conductor C 2001 and, therefore, on the simplex conductor C 2063, the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 is maintained, in its rest position, made that the signaling relay R 2070 of the junction circuit 2065 is energized .

   An incoming trunk selector of the remote exchange A switch series is associated with trunk circuit 2065 and the operation of signaling relay R 2070 prepares said selector.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 107>

 of arrival, so that it is sensitive to the first digit transmitted on the interurban line 2060 which connects the exchange
 EMI107.1
 prînelpal b at the remote exchange A, so that the preparation of the trunk line circuit 170,

   after the selection of the trunk 1770 by the second trunk selector 1412 and the preparation of the trunk line circuit 2065 and the associated terminating trunk selector of the switch series of the remote exchange A, takes place in a very short time and during the 'interval between the second digit and the third, when
 EMI107.2
 of the transmission of these two digits by the pulse transmitter 21 AY.



   When the operation of the pulse transmitter
 EMI107.3
 21 toyee continues for transmission to the third digit, the previously traced loop circuit is opened and then closed
 EMI107.4
 intermittently, foolishly that the relay of the R 1880 loop impulses moves in a corresponding way and in a
 EMI107.5
 evidently by repeating, at contacts 18s3 and 1882p jea positive and impulsiô / EÉâ6iVes on the signaling conductor 0 2001 and on the associated simplex conductor 9-? 063, In this way-
 EMI107.6
 the signaling relay R 20, o of the interurban line circuit 170 remains in the rest position during the transmission of the pulses,

   and the R 2070 signaling relay of the trunk circuit 2065 operates by repeating the digit pulses transmitted to the associated terminating trunk selector in a conventional manner. Each time the R 1880 loop pulse relay releases, then attracts a new armature,
 EMI107.7
 it opens then closed again, at contacta .8gjj, the previously indicated circuit which oourt-oronitait the winding of the control relay R 1930, and this last relay operates in a corresponding way
 EMI107.8
 to the boaole pulse relay R1880 <t By successively attracting and releasing its armature, the command relay R 1950 expires, then opens, at contacts 1931, the preceding circuit.
 EMI107.9
 ment drawn for the excitation of the relay of coamanle R 1850.

   The latter attracts its frame at the beginning of the tranamjsaîc> n

  <Desc / Clms Page number 108>

 of the digit and remains activated until shortly after the end of this transmission, since it is of the delayed release type. During the transmission of the digit, the control relay R 1830 remaining in its actuated position short-circuits the winding 2031 of the repeater 2030, which reduces the impedance of the bung circuit connecting the pulse transmitter 21 AY and the R 1880 loop pulse relay to trunk line circuit 170.

     At the end of the transmission of the digit, the loop pulse relay R 1880 is stably energized again, which releases the armature of the control relay R 1930 and that of the control relay 1¯ 18µ0. A short time later, following the process outlined above. The incoming trunk selector of the remote center switch series A is controlled by digit transmission in a conventional manner.



   The other digits which are to be transmitted by the pulse sender al AY are routed to interurboine line circuit 170 and then repeated, via trunk line 2060, to the following stages of the switching devices of the remote exchange A, of a identical to that described above, the call studied here can be routed either to the operator position of the trunk switchboard, or to the called subscriber station of the remote exchange A. In both cases, after the transmission of all digits by the pulse generator 21 AY, the operation of the release relay R 3610Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse generator is controlled by the pulse generator 21 AY.



  While operating, the release relay R 3610 Y interrupts, at contacts 3613 Y. the loop circuit including junction 1770 which abo utit to trunk line circuit 170 and terminates, at contacts 3612 Y, a circuit applying the earth, for example. through the winding of the control relay R 3600 Y. to the negative line conductor C 2661 Y and, consequently, to the conductor C 2771 of the junction 2770. A practically

  <Desc / Clms Page number 109>

 identical to that previously drawn for the series energization of the upper winding of the loop pulse relay R 1880 and the lower winding of the control relay R 1870 is thus formed.

   On the contrary, 10 circuit comprising
 EMI109.1
 the lower winding of the R 1880 loop impulse relay and the upper winding of the. control relay RL1870 ,, is open at this time, so that the loop pulse relay R 1880 is maintained in its actuating position and the control relay R 1870 is actuated, the latter relay being of the differential type. In addition, when operating, the release relay R 3610 Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter opens the circuit which kept the sticking relay R 3620 Y activated.

   However, this last relay
 EMI109.2
 does not release its frame at this time, given state which is of the delayed release type,
In operation, the control relay R 1870 of the trunk line circuit 170 closes, at contacts 1871. an obvious circuit for energizing the control relay R 1900 ,, When operating, this closes, at contacts 1904, a circuit direct applying a battery, via stabilization resistor L 1872. to signaling conductor C2001 and opens, at contacts 1905., the primitive circuit indicated above,
 EMI109.3
 who applied the battery to said sig driver: n.a1.1sat1on.
 EMI109.4
 



  Initially, the control relay R 1900 Zemne, aux oontaots 1902 a circu1t12assant;!?!: Ir l; s eontael- = 16d Rire des enr = le- / 852 e't'plimnt'ibateie'y 'p''r' 'des coils-
 EMI109.5
 mounts of the cO relays: l '!'! r.'1and H 1980 and R1990, on the C 1774 control inductor of junction 1700. At this time, the potential
 EMI109.6
 to the 80 Y comragnae circuit of the pulse emitter is applied, by contacts 5621 of the R 3620 Y bonding relay. actuated in this circuit, by the winding of re1a11; 1 of end of conversation R 3630 Y and by contact 3404 Y, to the driver
 EMI109.7
 control C 2663 Y ,, and this is connected by the intermediate oanaiuta- tors to the coemanie conductor C1774 of junction 1770.

   In conaêtpMnce a closed circuit for the editorial

  <Desc / Clms Page number 110>

 The flow of the end-of-talk relay R 3530 Y in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse generator and of the control relays R 1980 and R 1990 in the trunk line circuit 170 is connected in series. series circuit is closed, the R 3530 Y end of conversation rail and the R 1980 command relay attract their armature, On the other hand, the R 1990 command relay does not attract its own, since it is of the type marginal.



   When operating, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y closes an additional holding circuit for the R 3620 Y sticking relay. The actuated R 3620 Y sticking relay keeps closed at contacts 3624. an obvious circuit which keeps the sticking relay actuated. auxiliary bonding R 1610. In addition, the bonding relay R 3620 Y and the auxiliary bonding relay R 1610 ... keep respectively closed, at contacts 3622 y and 1611. multiple circuits passing through contacts 3635 Y and now actuated the pulse generator disconnection relay R 3630 Y.



   In operation, the R 1980 control relay of the trunk line 170 circuit runs, at the 1982 contacts, an obvious circuit for energizing the R 1970 control relay.



  While operating., This term, at contacts 1973, a circuit passing through contacts 1981 and ensuring the excitation of the switching relay R 2020, When operating, the switching relay R 020 closes, at contacts 2022 ', a circuit of maintenance passing through contacta 1913 and assume the bonding of its own frame.

   On the other hand, it opens, at contacts 2025 and 2021, the circuit previously drawn for the series excitation of the winding of the control relay R 3600 Y in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter and of the upper winding of the pulse relay R 1880 and of the lower winding of the R 1870 control relay in the trunk line 170 .. In this way the control relays R 3600 Y and R 1870 are reestablished.

   On the other hand, the relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 111>

 R 1880 loop pulses does not recover at this time,
 EMI111.1
 given that funp1! 'Additional circuit is closed at contacts 2026 as a result of the operation of the switching relay R 2020, for the excitation of its upper winding, This circuit starts from an earth resistance, passes through the 2014 contacts.



    2026 and 1941 and by the upper winding of R 1880 and ends
 EMI111.2
 There the battery. By releasing its armature, the R 1870 control relay interrupts, at oontacts 1, Z !, the primitive circuit Indicated previously, which ensured the excitation of the R 1900 control relay.

   However, the latter relay is maintained at this time in its working position, by a holding circuit closed for this purpose and passing through the contacts 1901 and 1971, this circut being closed at the contacts 1974 as a result of the operation of the control relay R 1970, By releasing its armature, the control relay R 3600 Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter causes, a short time later, the release of the armature of the bonding relay R 3620 Y, which is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its frame,
 EMI111.3
 the bonding relay R 3620 Y opens, at contacts 5621 Y, the series circuit drawn for the excitation of the end of conversation relay R3530 Y, the control circuit of the pulse transmitter and the windings of the control relay R 1980 and R 1990 in the trunk line 170 circuit, so
 EMI111.4
 that the end of conversation relay R¯¯g550¯T¯ and the control relay R 1980, both actuated at this time, are reestablished.



  In addition, the R 5620 Y bonding relay closes at the contacts
 EMI111.5
 5625, a circuit passing through the c in tacts 5616 and 3404 Y and applying the battery via resistor 1612, to the conductor of # mmaoo.e D 2665 Y, which short-circuits the control relays R in series 1980 and R 1990 in circuit 170
 EMI111.6
 of trunk line, and which produces a slight delay in the release of the armature of the control relay R 1 80w On the other hand, the bonding relay R 3620 Y opens, at contacts 36240, the previously indicated circuit which kept the report activated.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 112>

 auxiliary bonding release R 1610, so that the latter / relays its reinforcement a short time later, since it is of the delayed release type.

   Finally, the bonding relay R 3620 Y interrupts, at contacts 3622 Y ,, one of the multiple circuits indicated above, which kept the disconnection relay of the R 3630 Y pulse emitter actuated.



  In this way, after the de-energization of the auxiliary sticking relay R 1610, the other multiple circuit, which kept the pulse generator disconnection relay R 3630 Y activated, is interrupted at aentacte 1611. Consequently, the switching relay disconnection of the pulse generator R 3630 Y releases its armature at this time, which brings the 21 AY pulse generator and the 21 BY digit recorders back to standby, and corresponding operation of the switch-turn call 17 Y from junction 15 Y, at this time connected to the operator position circuit 18 Y provided for the operator position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y.

   In addition, the disconnection relay of the R 3630 Y pulse emitter opens, at contacts 3639 Y, the previously indicated circuit which maintained, actuated the release cell R 3610 Y, This last relay then releases its armature for a few moments more later, since it is of the delayed release type, at this moment it interrupts, at contacts 3616, the previously drawn circuit which applied the battery to the control conductor C 2663 Y and, consequently, to the control conductor C 1774 of the 1770 function In addition, the release relay R 3610 Y causes the de-energization of the connection relay R 3400 Y, which completely opens the 20 Y circuit of the pulse transmitter,
While recovering,

   the control relay R 1980 of the trunk line circuit 170 interrupts, at contacts 1982, the previously indicated circuit which kept the control relay R 1970 actuated. which causes the de-energization of the latter relay a short time later, given

  <Desc / Clms Page number 113>

   that it is the delayed release type. By de-energizing, the control relay R 1970 opens, at the 1974 contacts, the circuit previously drawn which maintained: actuated the
 EMI113.1
 command R 1900.

   This, in relation to its armature closes, at contacts 1903, a circuit passing through contacts 2019, 1914 and 1852 and applying earth to the Control conductor C 1774 of junction 1770 and opens, at contacts 1904, the circuit
 EMI113.2
 previously drawn for the Application of the battery to the signaling conductor C 2001 and it forms, at contacts 1905, a variant cirouit passing through contacts 1895 and 1882 and
 EMI113.3
 applying the battery to the driver of a1gnali.sation c 2001.



  The application of the earth to the C 1774 control conductor causes the 2516 Y monitoring lamp to light up in junction 15 Y, which indicates to the operator in position number 1 on the 11 Y trunk board that the The call has been routed to the remote exchange ± to its destination, but until that time, no answer has been given to this call.



  When the call is answered at remote exchange A, the circuit
 EMI113.4
 of trunk line 8065 causes the battery to remain unconnected to the earth on the signaling conductor C 2074 and on the simplex conductor C 2065 which is connected to it, which keeps the signaling relay R 2070 activated in the
 EMI113.5
 interurban line circuit 2065 and causes the R 20 0 signaling relay to function in the 170 interurban line circuit. When operating, the R 2 '1 signaling relay closes, at contacts! L 4:!,. a circuit passing through them contacted 18641 and the. for energizing the R 1850 end of conversation relay.

   In operation, the end of conversation relay R 1850 opens, at contacts 1852. the circuit
 EMI113.6
 previously traced which applied the earth to the C 1774 control conductor of the 1770 junction, which causes the 2516Y monitoring lamp in the 15 Y junction to go out, indicating to the operator position number 1 of the Interurban table 11 the call was answered at the remote exchange

  <Desc / Clms Page number 114>

 A. At this time, the call from operator position number 1 of trunk table 11Y to main exchange B is routed either to the trunk table or to the called subscriber station of remote exchange A.

   In the event that the call is routed to the trunk table of remote exchange A, the operator of this table is informed, with regard to the routing of the call, that it continues in a classic. After the call has been routed downstream of the trunk panel of remote exchange A and the answer to this call or after the call is answered by the requested subscriber station of remote exchange A, the operator of the position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y at the main exchange B disconnects the junction 15 Y used, from its Y position circuit.



    Then, in the event that the operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A, or the called subscriber of this exchange, need to enter into communication with the operator of position number 1 of the trunk panel 11 Y of the main exchange B, the operator of central A handles the devices associated with her position, or the called subscriber handles her switching hook. In both cases, the trunk line circuit 2065 is controlled so as to substitute ground for the battery on the signaling conductor C 2074. this Inversion being repeated several times.

   In this way, the signaling relay R 2070, belonging to the trunk line circuit 2065, is kept in its working position and the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 functions suitably. Each. once the R 2040 signaling relay releases and then attracts its armature again, it opens then closes, at contacts 204L, the previously traced circuit which kept the R 1850 end-of-conversation relay actuated, so that the latter relay operates in such a way correspondents.

   Each time the R 1850 end-of-conversation relay releases and then attracts its armature again, it

  <Desc / Clms Page number 115>

 closes then opens, at contacts 1852, the circuit for applying the earth to the C 1874 control conductor of the 1870 junction. This operation causes a flickering of the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in the 15 Y junction, which alerts the operator from position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y to the main exchange B. The operator from position number 1 then reconnects junction 15 Y and its circuit for position 18Y, which establishes communication via the line interurban 2060 with the remote exchange A.



   From the above explanation, it will be understood that, when the operator of the trunk switchboard at the remote exchange! interrupts the communication at the end of the conversation, or when the called subscriber of the remote exchange A hangs up his receiver on the switch hook provided for this purpose, a constant pulse is transmitted by the trunk line 2060, which causes releasing the armature of the signaling relay R 2040 and, consequently, that of the end of conversation relay R 1850 in the trunk line circuit 170 ,, Following the process described above, By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 1850 closes, to contacts 1852,

   the circuit previously traced for the Inapplication of the earth to the control conductor 0 1774 of the junction 1770, which ensures a stable ignition of the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in the junction 15 Y by indicating to the operator the position number 1 of the . trunk switchboard 11 Y to the main exchange B that the communication is terminated, The operator in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y then causes the answer switch 16 Y and call switch 17 Y to return to the idle position of junction 15 Y. Returning to the idle position of call switch 17 Y causes the release of second trunk selector 1412 of trunk line circuit 170 and of the series of switches of remote exchange A.

   Following a process which will be described in more detail later.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 116>

 
 EMI116.1
 it will be assumed that after the aonemlnemenà of the call described above, by the intermediary of the trunk table from the remote exchange A to a more distant point, the operator
 EMI116.2
 from position number Id From the trunk panel 11 Y you main central Bq wishes to call back the trunk board from remote central A.

   A. oand effect, junction 15 Y is connected to, again to circuit 18 y of the operator position number 1 of the interurban switchboard 7,1 y, The operator of the name position 1 then activates the bell key, this that causes transmission
 EMI116.3
 an inrush current on the negative "teu1 '" eonaue of the conversation circuit ,. until the corzueturn o 1 71 of the junction 1770, by closing a circuit passing through the contacts 1863 ,, the winding
 EMI116.4
 . ment 03: L of repeater 1030, contacts 2022 and 2011. for energizing the reminder relay R 1960. More precisely, the indicated bell key is actuated repeatedly, so that the reminder relay R 1960 repeatedly draws and releases its frame.

   By attracting its armature, the R 1960 booster relay opens, at contacts 1961. The normally closed circuit which keeps the relay actuated.
 EMI116.5
 recall R 1950., so that the latter releases its frame a short instant later, given that it is the type with
 EMI116.6
 ra110hement deferred.

   On restoring, the pull-up relay R 1950 forms the contacts 1951. a multiple point at the contacts 1941 of the pull-up relay R 1940 actuated in the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the upper winding of the loop pulse relay R 1880, In addition, the relay of
 EMI116.7
 Recall R 1950 closes, at contacts 1952, an obvious circuit for the energization of the recall relay R 1940. so that the latter opens, at contacts 1941, the point previously indicated in the excitation circuit of the upper winding of the R 1880 loop pulse relay.

   Then, when the R 1960 booster relay releases its armature, it closed again, at the
MM-t # M contacts 1961. the previously mentioned circuit for energizing the R 1950 booster relay. So that the latter causes the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 117>

   release of the arma, tare of the recall relay R 1940 a short time later, given that this checkerboard relay is of the delayed release type.

   Consequently, for a short time interval, the two R 1950 and R 1940 booster relays are in their working position and, a short time later, the R 1940 booster relay is reestablished, During the time interval indicated the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the upper winding of the loop impulse relay R 1880 is interrupted at contacts 1941 and 1951 which are multiplied and, a short time later, when the return relay R 1940 releases its armature, it closes, at contacts @, the excitation circuit of the upper winding of the loop pulse relay R 1880 Consequently, the loop pulse relay R 1880 releases its armature,

   then attracts it again with each manipulation of the bell key in the operator position circuit 18 Y, so that the pulse relay R 1880 releases its armature, then attracts it again repeatedly when the the indicated bell key is activated in this way.

   Each time the R 1880 loop pulse relay is reestablished, it substitutes the battery earth on the signaling conductor C 2001, Conversely, each time the R 1880 loop pulse relay operates, 11 substitutes the battery. battery earthed on the signaling conductor 0 2001, Consequently, the signals transmitted on the signaling driver C 2001 keep the signaling relay R 2040 in the trunk line circuit 170 activated, and the signaling relay R 2070 in the circuit of interurban line 2065 releases its reinforcement, then attracts it again,

   which causes the L 3075 lamp associated with the operator position called to the trunk switchboard of the remote exchange A. The operator of the trunk panel of the remote exchange A then resumes communication and can converse with the operator of the remote exchange. position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B.

   As indicated

  <Desc / Clms Page number 118>

 previously, when the operator in position number 1 of the Interurban switchboard 11 Y at the main exchange B receives end-of-conversation signals, she causes the release of Junction 15 Y, so that the second interurban selector 1412 returns to idle and that the. earth is removed from the 1773 control conductor of the 1770 junction, which opens the previously drawn circuit which kept the selection relay R1910 activated.

   By releasing its armature, this last relay interrupts, at contacts 1911, the previously drawn circuit which kept the switching relay R 1860 and 11 actuated also opens, at contacts 1913, the previously drawn circuit which kept the switching relay R 2020 activated. By releasing its armature, the switching relay R 2020 opens, at contacta 2026, the previously traced circuit which kept the loop impulse relay R 1880 actuated, This one, by releasing its armature, terminating at contacts 1883, the circuit normal application of the earth to the signaling conductor C 2001,

     which keeps the R 2040 signaling relay in its rest position, indicating that the trunk line circuit 170 is free on the trunk line 2060. At this time, the R 2070 signaling relay is de-energized, which ensures the return to idle of the automatic switching devices of the remote exchange A in the case where the call in question is routed to a requested subscriber station of this central trunk switchboard of remote exchange A, the de-energized R 2070 signaling relay transmits conversational signals to this switchboard.

   The operator of this table can then cause the release of the outgoing switches in the conventional manner. At this time, trunk line 170 is completely released and indicates that trunk line 2060, connecting main exchange B to remote exchange A, is available for further use.

   

  <Desc / Clms Page number 119>

 
For routing the call described above from operator position number 1 on the trunk table
 EMI119.1
 From the main office B to the remote exchange A, the last exchange co-switching devices were used. In the event that the switching stage reached requires, for its operation, a time interval greater than the normal interval between the Digits, as determined by the pulse transmitter 21 AY at this time. moment related to his
 EMI119.2
 switching circuit 20 Y and from there to call switch 17Y,

   the indicated switching stage of the remote exchange A operates in such a way as to cause the substitution of the battery to earth on the signaling conductor C 2074 and, consequently, on the simplex conductor C 2063. so that the signal relay. R 2070 is kept actuated in the line circuit
 EMI119.3
 trunk line 8Q65 and that the signaling relay R 2040 operates in the trunk line circuit 170.

   In 1'.bnct1on. However, the RJ2MO¯ signaling relay closes, at eaatacts 2041. the circuit previously drawn for the relay exeitation
 EMI119.4
 end of conversation R 1850, When activated, this opens, at contacts 1852., the circuit passing through the contacts has 103, ±% fi and 2019. circuit closed at this time for the application of the earth to the control conductor 0 1774-from junction 1770. The relay 1850 also closes, at contacts 1851, a
 EMI119.5
 elmult passing through the contacts 2021 'and ppliqWlnt a negative resistance potential to the control conductor C 1774, given that the control relay R 2020 is actuated
 EMI119.6
 at the moment.

   When such a potential is applied to the control driver C 177 of the junction 1770, a circuit comprising the control switch C ... 2663 y .. and passing through the contacts 340 Y and 3621 Y is closed with a view to the excitement of. end of conversation relay R 3530 Y in. control circuit 20Y of the pulse generator. In function, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y stops the operation of the pulse transmitter 21 AY.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 120>

 



   When the indicated switching stage of the devices of the remote exchange has finished functioning so that the next digit can be received, the potential of the signaling conductor C 2074 is inverted and becomes positive so that the signaling relay R 2070 of the junction circuit 2065 is maintained, actuated and the signaling relay R 2040 of the trunk line circuit 170 releases its armature.

   On reestablishing itself, the signaling line R2050 opens, at contacts 2041, the circuit which maintains the end of conversation relay R 1850 and the latter, by releasing its armature, interrupts the circuit traced below at contacts 1851. above for the application of a negative resistance potential to the control conductor C1774 of the function 1770 and closes, at the contact at 1852, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 1774, When the battery is thus removed from the control conductor 0 1774 of the junction 1770, the circuit previously processed,

     which kept the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y actuated in the 20 Y circuit of the transmitter, is Interrupted, By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y controls the pulse transmitter 21 AY, and the The next digit is then transmitted by this pulse transmitter in the manner previously explained.



   In the event that the deferred dialing signal transmitted from the switchgear of the remote exchange through the trunk line 2060 to the trunk line circuit 170 persists for an abnormal time interval, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y is maintained. actuated in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse generator during said abnormal period, obviously. The condition indicated above is fulfilled when any switching stage of the automatic devices of remote A is in

  <Desc / Clms Page number 121>

 
 EMI121.1
 presence of a case of total readiness.

   Accordingly, in this case, the end of reversing relay R 3530 Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter is kept actuated for an abnormal time interval. This relay causes
 EMI121.2
 Pulse frequency control device provided in the 20 Y control circuit of the pulse transmitter and by means of which 120 earth pulses are applied per minute to the occupancy lamp 2604 Y in the function 15 Y. The flickering of the occupancy lamp 2604 Y
 EMI121.3
 at a frequency of 120 ib Iz pc1T minute indicates to the operator from position number 1 at interurban ta-bloau 11 Y that the interested call, routed through junction 15Y,

   has reached a blocked connection floor uu central remote to The operator from position number 1 on the interurban switchboard 11 Y
 EMI121.4
 lowers the key "errors" of the set of '22 Y to cause the release of the control circuit 20 y and the pulse emitter 21 Yet of the number registers 83¯BX¯¯ connected to this circuit, When the circuit control 20 Y is thus released, 11 a modification of the relays in the
 EMI121.5
 junction 15 Y and the occupancy lamp 260i l flickers at a frequency of 60 fols per minute,

   which indicates to the operator in position number 1 of the Interurban 11 Y table that the
 EMI121.6
 control circuit g.0 Y of the pulse transmitter and the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y connected to this circuit were disconnected at this time from junction 15 Y. This attendant then proceeds to release the call switch 17 Y
 EMI121.7
 of the onct1o:!: '\, which causes the release of the second trunk selector% * of the trunk line circuit 170 and of the switching devices of the remote exchange A,
 EMI121.8
 following the process outlined above.



  In the preceding description of the operation of the switching devices of the remote exchange A, when any stage of any oOJID1uttt: t1on is in the presence of a case of total occupation, it is assumed that a stable signal of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 122>

 delayed dialing etact returned by signaling conductor C 2074 during an abnormal time interval.



  However, the switching devices of the remote exchange can be designed in such a way that they return 240 alternating positive and negative pulses per minute to the signaling cor. C 2074 when any stage is in the presence of a case of total occupancy. When this - arrangement is provided, the 240 alternating positive and negative pulses transmitted per minute on the signaling conductor 2074. keep the signaling relay R 2070 actuated in the trunk line circuit 2065 and cause repeated excitation and de-excitation at the same rate of the R 2040 signaling relay in the trunk line circuit 170.

   At this moment, the signaling relay R 2040 attracts and releases its armature, which causes an analogous operation of the end of conversation relay R 1860 which then transmits alternately positive and negative impulses through the control conductor 0 1774 from junction 1770 to end of conversation relay R 3530 Y from control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter.



  When the end-of-conversation relay R 3530 Y of the control circuit 20Y of the pulse generator operates and then restarts twice rapidly, at a rate corresponding to the indicated 120 earth pulses per minute, it automatically causes the release. of the control circuit 20 Y and of the pulse transmitter 21 Y connected to this circuit in a manner substantially identical to that which follows a normal release of these elements at the end of the transmission of all the digits recorded in the digit recorders 21 BY, liberation described above in outline.

   As a result, the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter causes the control relay R 1980 to operate in the trunk line circuit 170 and, therefore, that of the switching relay R 2020 and that of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 123>

 R 1970 control relay, all following the process described above.

   Thus, the successive excitation and de-energization of the signaling relay R 2040 taking place at this moment cause a corresponding operation of the end of conversation relay R 1850, so that the earth present at the contacts 1852 is alternately connected to the conductor of control C 1774 from junction 1770 and disconnected from this conductor, which is, at this moment, cut off from call switch 17 Y, due to the interruption of control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter .

   The earth pulses applied at the frequency of 120 per minute to the C 1774 control conductor of junction 1770 cause a corresponding flicker of the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y, which indicates to the operator of position number 1 to trunk switchboard 11 Y that a blocked switching stage has been encountered in the automatic switching devices of the remote exchange then A.

   The operator indicated proceeds to release the call switch 17 Y, which produces the release of the second interurban selector 1418, of the trunk line 170 and of the automatic switching devices of the remote exchange A, all following the process previously described.



   With regard to the routing of the call described above between the operator position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y at the main exchange B and the remote exchange A, it has been indicated that the call switch 17 Y of the function 15 Y and the second trunk selector 1412 had been operated successively to establish selections of trunk groups then the selection of a free trunk in the group first selects the tcut before the 1770 trunk leading to the circuit of trunk line 170 is selected by the second trunk selector 1412. Accordingly,

   the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 You the second long distance selector 1412 may be in the presence of a case of total occupation. In this Case the one of the two switches

  <Desc / Clms Page number 124>

 indicated that is in the presence of this state of total occupation operates in such a way as to cause the forwarding, either of
120 earth pulses, i.e. 240 pulses alternately positive and negative on the associated control conductor which returns in return to the control conductor C 2663 Y and, from there, to the control circuit 20 Y of the following pulse transmitter the wiring used in the switch concerned.

   In the event that 120 earth pulses are returned every minute to the control conductor C2663 Y. the end of conversation relay
R 3530 Y is not energized and the control circuit 20 Y acts on the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y, so that the other recorded digits are transmitted despite the total occupation Indicated, After the transmission of all the digits stored in the pulse recorder 21 Y, the control circuit 20 Y operates in the manner previously explained and causes the call switch 17 Y to open, so that the monitoring lamp 2516 Y flickers as a result of.

   return of 120 earth pulses per minute to the control conductor of the switch which is in the presence of the case of total occupation, which indicates to the operator in position number 1 this total occupation.



   On the other hand, 'in the case where the switch, which is in the presence of the case of total occupation, sends back alternately negative and positive pulses at the frequency of 120 earth pulses per minute on the control conductor C 2663 Y, the end of conversation relay R 3550 Y, in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter, is energized and de-energized intermittently, as explained above. When the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y attracts and releases its armature twice in a row, the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y is automatically released at the same time as the control circuit 20 Y of this device, which causes the cut of the call switch 17 Y.

   the whole following the process explained previously. After the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 125>

 
 EMI125.1
 15 Y junction call switch, alternately negative and positive pulses returned <!? yêes on the control conductor of the, oom: n.utator which is in the presence of the case of total cupation causes the monitoring lamp 2516 Y of junction 15¯Y to flicker, which indicates the status of total occupancy met with the operator of position nwaé-rv 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 'The operator of position m! meme 1 of the trunk switchboard, who realizes the state of total occupancy on the junction 15 Y, releases the switch
 EMI125.2
 17 Y and, therefore, the second toll selector
 EMI125.3
 m8 if it is linked to this C # amateur,

   the whole following the process described pr (, e, 6demment.



  ± ± ± 1 ggov ± nant dy ¯tablju ii ± f¯-rb¯ai ± of central h1-Sncil B and µestined at wn¯É ± stfl ± jaboQ1rf¯ù central local-a '.



  An interurban call, originating from the central
 EMI125.4
 primary ± or routed to this primary exchange from
 EMI125.5
 the remote exchange D. ost tinally transmitted to the trunk switchboard There and can be routed from there to the local exchange G, For example, a long distance call can be routed to operator position number 1 of the trunk switchboard. 11 Y bath, via the 16 Y response controller
 EMI125.6
 from junction 15 Y and, from the, to the position circuit
 EMI125.7
 operator 18 Y, on which the operator of this position activates the set of keys 22 y which acts on the control circuit 20 y and on the pulse generator 21 to Y and the digit recorders Sl¯¯gZ connected to this circuit, so
 EMI125.8
 that figures are recorded in these latter bodies.
 EMI125.9
 



  The gl¯ây pulse transmitter is then controlled by the 21 EY digit recorders so as to transmit the pulses of the first digit to the switch of app> 1 17 Y of junction 15 Y, the call switch 17 Y of the junction
 EMI125.10
 15 Y then selects the group of second interurban selectors,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 126>

 including in particular the second long distance selector 1412, then a second free long distance selector in this group.

   Then, the pulse transmitter 21 AY transmits the pulses of the digits. following, by the call switch 17 Y, to the series of commuta. outgoing trunk turns, in a well-known manner, Assuming that the call switch 17 Y of junction 15Y selects the second selector 1412, the next digit is betrayed to this second selector, which in turn selects the group of third long distance selectors comprising in particular the third long distance selector 1406 then, in this group, a third free long distance selector, Assuming that the second long distance selector 1412 precisely selects the third long distance selector 1406, the following digit is transmitted to this third selector,

   which in turn selects a group of junctions comprising in particular the 880 A junction leading to the group of junction circuits comprising in particular the junction circuit 50, then selects from this group a free junction, Assuming that the third interurban selector 1406 precisely selects the junction 880 A which ends at junction circuit 50, it applies earth to the control conductor 0 883 of the junction, 880A, which closes the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the interurban selection relay R 850, When operating , the trunk relay R 850 indicates that the junction 880 B 'is cut to the originating trunk selectors 513X, etc ...

   and to the outgoing trunk selectors 511 X. etc. belonging respectively to the two groups which have access to this junction, then said relata activates the switching relay R 720, all these operations taking place according to the process described above.

   Additionally, when the third toll selector 1406 selects. 'junction 880 A, the potential of the battery is applied, through resistor 526 and cnntaets 525 and '683 of the junction circuit 50, to the control conductor C 884 and this battery potential is applied in return to the control conductor C 8663 Y which terminates t at the control circuit 20Y of the pulse generator, which

  <Desc / Clms Page number 127>

 
 EMI127.1
 generates the excitation of the end of conirersatlon relay R 35Q X, so as to determine at this moment a delay in the operation of the pulse transmitter 21 AY.

   All these operations
 EMI127.2
 take place according to the process explained above. Consequently, the junction circuit 50 returns at this moment a delayed transmission signal to the control circuit 20 Y of the transmitter.
 EMI127.3
 pulses, given that the switching devices of the local exchange 0 are not able to receive a digit, to return to the junction circuit 50, when operating, the switching relay R 720 established, to the contacts 723,
 EMI127.4
 727, 722 'and there is a connection between the line relay R 760, the differential relay R 750 and the conductors a 881 and C 8..ê, g of the junction 880 A.

   This connection is swept by the series of switches and by the transmitter control circuit.
 EMI127.5
 20 Until there is a closed circuit in the pulse generator 2.! A ... I .. However, this closed circuit is balanced in this transmitter, which causes the energization of the line relay R 760 while preventing that of the differential relay R 750. When operating, the switching relay R 720 produces the excitation of the R 510 control relay, which itself produces, the excitation of the R 610 end of conversation relay and the latter causes its
 EMI127.6
 ltexelthtten turn of the current reversal relay R 730 ,, all in the manner previously described.

   When operating, the relay
 EMI127.7
 current reversal R7.50 reverses the polarity of the differential relay R 750 and that of the line relay R 760 with respect to the C Sel and C E8 conductors of the 880 A junction. Touilefo: 1.e, this Inversion has no effect given that a simple loop
 EMI127.8
 is closed in the pulse generator 21a between the coanduotours of junction 880A at this time.



   When operating, the R 760 line relay closes. to the
 EMI127.9
 contacts 761. the processed loop circuit oomprermnt the trunk line 500 cpl, ends at the local exchange Ce so that the junction circuit of said contral C acts and causes the connection of the automatic switchgear, this

  <Desc / Clms Page number 128>

 operation requiring some time. In addition, the line relay R 760 causes the excitation of the sticking relay R 770 and this closes the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the right winding of the response relay R 740.

   At this moment the left winding of the response relay R 740 is energized in the closed circuit which terminates via the trunk line 500 at the local exchange C, but the polarity of this line 500 is such that the last relay indicated is not not actuated. When the switchgear of the local exchange a is associated with the trunk line 500 and when said apparatus is ready to receive a digit, the positive and negative potentials are reversed at the local exchange C on the conductors of the trunk line 500, so that the left winding of the response relay R 740 of the junction circuit 50 is polarized so as to operate,, When operating, the response relay R 740 causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 520,

   which causes the armature of the R 510 control relay to release a short time later. The control relay R 510 causes, in turn, the release of the armature of the end of conversation relay R 610 and this in turn causes the de-energization of the current reversal relay R 730, the everything in the way explained above. By releasing its armature, the current reversing relay R 730 reverses again the polarity of the differential relay R 750 and of the line relay R 760 with respect to the conductors C 881 and 0 882 of the trunk line 880A, without effect.

   While operating, the end of conversation relay R 520 opens, at contacts 525, the circuit previously drawn for the application of a battery to the control conductor C 884 of the 880 A junction and closes, at contacts 524, a conducting circuit by contacts 665, 614 and 683 and applying a ground to the control conductor C 884. When the battery is replaced by the ground on the control conductor C884 of the junction 880 A and, consequently, on the conductor of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 129>

 
 EMI129.1
 command C 36 65 Y which leads to the control circuit 20 Y of the impulse transmitter, the circuit which kept the end of conversation relay R 6550 1 activated is interrupted.

   By 'releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 5550 Y causes a new operation; of the #maker of bnpu18ions, 31 AY. so that the next digit is transmitted through the loop comprising the '0 861 and C 883 conductors of the 880 A junction, causing a corresponding operation.
 EMI129.2
 line relay R 760 * This causes the R 810 digit relay to close and repeats, at contacts 661, the pulses of the digit received by the closed circuit comprising the interurban line 500 which ends at the switching devices. -
 EMI129.3
 tlon from local exchange 0.

   The R810 digit relay energizes the R 620 auxiliary digit relay and this generates the first phase of the relay's staggered operation.
 EMI129.4
 R 6401 # bypassing the whole following the process explained previously, The sticking relay R 770 and the digit relay R 810 are kept activated during the transmission of the digit
 EMI129.5
 and the digit relay R810, causes the left winding of the response relay R 740 to be short-circuited.
 EMI129.6
 and, consequently, the relaxation of the frame of the latter rolais, all following the process already mentioned.

     'A short time after the end of the transmission of the digit in question, the line relay R 760 remains actuated, which causes the armature of the digit relay R 810 to release a short time later.

   By releasing its armature, the R 810 digit relay causes the R 740 response relay to be energized again and, a few moments later, the re-establishment of the auxiliary digit relay. R 620. By releasing its armature, the auxiliary digit relay R 620 causes the second and last
 EMI129.7
 phase of the staggered operation of the R 640e monitoring relay, all following the process described above.

   Similarly, the following digits are transmitted from the pulse generator 21 AY to the junction circuit 50, then

  <Desc / Clms Page number 130>

 repeated by the line relay R 760 on the trunk line 500 to the automatic switching devices of the local exchange C, so that the last stage of the switching devices selects the line which ends at the requested 3 * subscriber set and test that line to determine if it is free or busy, in a per se classic way,
After transmission of the last digit stored in Si BY, the 21 AY pulse generator activates the R 3610 Y release relay of the circuit,

  control 20 Y of the pulse transmitter and the loop circuit between said transmitter, the differential relay R 750 and the line relay R 760 of the junction circuit 30 ′ open at the contacts 3613Y.



   In addition, when operating, the release relay R 3610 Y closes, at contacts 3612 Y, a circuit for the application of the earth through the winding of the control relay R 3600 Y, to the driver. negative 0 '2661 Y and, consequently, to the negative conductor C 881 of junction 880 A.



  The battery is applied via the lower winding of the line relay R 760, contacts 656, the lower winding of the differential relay R 750. contacts 727 and 652, repeater enrollment 631 630. and from contacts 723 and 731 to line conductor C 881 of Junction 880 A, to junction circuit 50. Consequently, a series circuit is closed at this time for the energization of the control relay R 3600 Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter and of the differential relay R 750 of the junction circuit 50 and for maintaining the armature of the line relay R 760 in the working position in the same junction circuit.

   While operating, the differential relay R 750 closes, they contacts 751, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the control relay R 680, which opens, while operating, aax contacts 683, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the earth , to contacts 665, to the control conductor C 884 and closes, to contacts 682, a circuit for the application of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 131>

 battery, via the windings of the interurban relay R 530 and the interurban relata R 540., on the conduc-
 EMI131.1
 C884t control tower At this time,

   earth is applied via contacts 3621 Y of the R 3620 Y sticking relay actuated to the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter, via the winding of the end of conversion relay.
 EMI131.2
 tion? 3550 Y and by contacts 5404 Y, to the control conductor C 2665 Y, In this way, a series circuit is closed for the excitation of 1 winding of the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y in the control circuit. 20 Y control of the pulse transmitter and the windings of the Inter- relay
 EMI131.3
 interurban R 530 and interurban relay R 540 of junction circuit 50.

   When said series circuit is closed, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y and the long distance relay R 540 both attract their armature. On the other hand, the relay
 EMI131.4
 interurban R 530 does not attract its own, since it is of the marginal type. By switching off, the interurban relay R 540 causes the excitation of the auxiliary interurban relay R 670 ot the latter itself causes the excitation of the.
 EMI131.5
 R 650 coamutation relay all following the process explained previously.

   In addition, the R 670 auxiliary interurban relay closes, at contacts 675, the pre-determined circuit drawn for maintaining the working position of the relay armature.
 EMI131.6
 control R 680 and, when operating, the R 650 control relay closes, at contacts 657, the holding elloult previously drawn for the collago of its own armature.

   In addition,
 EMI131.7
 the switching relay R 650 closes a cirouot on contacts G55m passing through contacts 663, resistor 685 and contacts 727 ', for 3Bac.tat3.on of the lower winding of line relay R 760e, which maintains the latter in its working position after the interruption of the series circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the lower winding of the line relay R 760. of the lower winding of the differential relay
 EMI131.8
 R 750.

   and winding of the acéizande relay R5600t More

  <Desc / Clms Page number 132>

 precisely, the switching relay R 650 opens the indicated series circuit, at contacts 652 and 656, so that the differential relay R'750 of the junction circuit 50 and the control relay R 3600 Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse generator both release their armature.



  * A short time later, the bonding relay R 3620Y of the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter is reestablished and opens, at contacts 3621 Y, the previously processed series circuit which kept the end of relay actuated. conversation R 3530 Y in the control circuit 20 Y and the long distance relay R 540 in the junction circuit 50.

   By releasing its armature, the interurban relay R 640 produces the de-energization of the auxiliary interurban relay R 670 a short time later, given that the latter relay is of the delayed release type, The auxiliary interurban relay R 670 in turn causes the de-energization control relay R 680 all these operations taking place according to the process described above.

   By releasing its armature, the control relay R 680 terminates again, at contacts 683, the circuit previously drawn which, passing through contacts 665, applies earth to the control conductor C 884 of junction 880 A and, at this moment , the auxiliary sticking relay R 1610. when de-energized in the control circuit 20 Y, itself de-energizes the disconnection relay of the pulse generator R 3630 Y ,, The enabling relay R 3610 Y releases then its armature a short instant later, which brings about the complete release of the control circuit 20 Y and of the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y connected to this circuit so that the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y is cut,

   then connected to the 18 Y position circuit from the operator position number 1 to the 11 Y trunk board, all following the process described previously, Unapplication of earth in, 0 884 the junction circuit 50 to the junction control conductor 880 A closes a circuit ensuring the lighting of the monitoring lamp.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 133>

 launches 2516 Y, so as to indicate the position to the operator. number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y that the call has been routed to the called subscriber station of the local exchange C, but the subscriber of the called station has not yet answered the call.



   As indicated previously, the final switching stage of the local exchange C proceeds at this moment to the test of the line which results in the posto of the requested subscriber assuming that this line is free, a inrush current is transmitted by final switching stage in a conventional manner then, when the called subscriber answers the call}, the final switching stage of the local exchange C operates in such a way as to establish a communication between the operator position number 1 of the interurban switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B and the called subscriber set of the local exchange C, In addition,

   the final switching stage of the local exchange 0 operates at this time in such a way as to reverse the positive and negative potentials on the interurban line 500, so that the left winding of the response relay R 740 of the junction circulates 50 a polarity such as this complaint is re-established. This loosening causes the operation of the end of conversation relay R1610 and, consequently, the interrupton at contacts 614 of the circuit previously drawn for Inapplication of the earth to the control conductor C 882 of the junction 880 A, which causes the extinction. of the surveillance lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y.

   This extinction indicates to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y that the subscriber under control of the local exchange C has answered the call routed through junction 15 Y. Said operator then disconnects junction 15 Y do its 18 position circuit Y.



   The called subscriber of local exchange C can, by manipulating his switching hook, transmit supervisory signals to the operator in position number 1 at trunk switchboard 11 Y of main exchange B. For example, when the subscriber requested from the local exchange C hangs up his receiver on

  <Desc / Clms Page number 134>

 the switch hook provided for this purpose, the finished switching stage of the neighboring exchange C operates in such a way as to reverse the application of the negative and positive potentials on the trunk line 500, which gives the left winding of the response relay R '740 in the junction circuit 50 a polarity such that the latter relay attracts its armature, When operating,

   the response relay R 740 produces the de-energization of the end-of-conversation relay R 610 and this de-energization closes, at contacts 614, the previously traced circuit passing through contacts 665 and applying earth to the control conductor C 884 of the Junction 880 A, which has the effect of igniting the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y, all of these operations taking place following the process described above.

   The switching on of monitoring lamp 2516 Y indicates to the attendant in position number 1 on the interurban switchboard 11 Y that the communication routed by junction 15 Y has been interrupted by the called subscriber of the local exchange C.



   The operator already indicated then causes the release of the call switch 17Y from the junction 15 Y. The second long distance selector 1412 and the third long distance selector 1406 are then released in a conventional manner, which causes the elimination of the potential. of the C 883 control conductor of the 880 A junction. This removal of the earth potential on the C 883 control conductor causes the release of the relay armature. long distance selection R 850 in the junction circuit 50 and, consequently, the de-energization of the switching relay R 720.

   On restoring, the switching relay R 720 opens, at contacts 727 ', the bonding circuit previously drawn for the energization of the lower winding of the line relay R 760, so that the latter in turn releases its armature, all following the process explained previously, By releasing its armature, the line relay R 760 opens, at contacts 761, the loop circuit which ends, through the trunk line 500, to the devices

  <Desc / Clms Page number 135>

 automatic switching of the local exchange C, so that los said switching devices are brought back to idle, which indicates that the line leading to the called subscriber of the local exchange C is free.

   In addition, 1c line relay R 760 causes the de-energization of the R 770 sticking relay a short time later and this itself causes the de-energization of the R 640 shunt relay of the R 650 switching relay and of the end relay. conversation R 520. the whole following the process described above.

   On the other hand, the line relay R 760, by opening the loop which ends, via the interurban line 500, at the local exchange C, causes the de-energization of the response relay R 740 and the end of conversation relay R 520. in releasing its armature, forms again at contacts 525 the primitive circuit previously drawn for the application of the battery to the control conductor C 884 of the junction, 8801:

  ., $ the whole following 10 process explained previously., Finally, the battery is applied at this moment, by the intermediary of the winding of the selection relay 10cal R 860 to the control conductor C 885 of the junction 880 B, this which indicates to the outgoing trunk selectors 513 X, etc ... ot 511 X etc ... back two groups which have access to this junction that it is free.

   On the other hand, the battery is also applied through the winding of the trunk select relay R 850 to the control conductor C 883 of the junction 880 A, which indicates to the third trunk selectors 1406 etc., , who have access to this junction that it is free.

   At the same time, the junction circuit 50 is completely free and the trunk line 500 which connects the main exchange B to the local exchange 0 becomes available for a new use,
With regard to the routing of the call described above ... from the operator position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y at the main exchange B to the called subscriber station of the local automatic exchange 0, it will be noted that the final switching stage of the switchgear of the local exchange C

  <Desc / Clms Page number 136>

 may observe, during the test of the line, which leads to said requested set, that said line is busy.

   The final switching stage then opens the loop circuit comprising the interurban line 500, which causes the armature of the response relay R 740 to release in the junction circuit 50. In addition, the final switching stage of the local exchange Ç returns a busy tone current on trunk line 500.

   On restoring, the response relay R 740 causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 610 and this half r. The relay opens, while operating, at contacts 614, the previously traced circuit which applied earth to control conductor C 884 of junction 880 A. Which has the effect of extinguishing monitoring lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y, so to give the operator in position number 1 on the trunk switchboard 11 Y answer monitoring signals.



  However, the busy tone current returned on the trunk line 500 is repeated at this time by the junction circuit 50 through the 880 A junction and through the series of intermediate switches to the 18 Y position circuit of the - d position. operator number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y, so as to indicate to said operator the occupation condition encountered.



   In addition, with regard to the routing of the call described above from operator position number 1 to trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B to the called subscriber of the local automatic exchange C, it will be noted that the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y, the second toll selector 1412 or the thirteenth toll selector 1406, belonging to the series of switches of the main exchange B may be in the presence of full occupancy.

   In this case, the one of these switches which is in the presence of said total occupation opens the loop circuit which leads to the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter at this moment and causes the application, to the control conductor C 2663Y which leads to the circuit.

   control 20 Y of the pulse transmitter,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 137>

 120 earth pulses or 240 alternating negative and positive pulses per minute depending on the wiring used for the switch ,, Applying 120 earth pulses per minute to the control conductor C 2663 Y has no effect, so that 1 The pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y transmits the rest of the digits, which ensures the release of said recorder and of the control circuit 20 Y and the total disconnection between the response switch 17 Y and the junction 15 Y, according to the process outlined above.

   Consequently the 120 earth pulses applied per minute to the control conductor of the switch which is in the presence of the case of total occupation, produce at this moment an intermittent flickering of the monitoring lamp 2516 Y of the junction 15 Y, from manias to Indicate the condition of total occupation encountered to the operator of position number 1 of the interurban switchboard 11 Y.



  On the other hand, the application of 240 alternately positive and negative pulses per minute to the control co nducer C 2663 Y which leads to the control circuit 20 Y brings about the premature and instantaneous release of the control circuit 20 Y and of the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y which is connected to said circuit, so that the call switch 17 Y is cut off from the junction 15 Y, all in the manner previously explained, At this time, the application of 240 alternating positive and negative pulses per minute to the switch which is in the presence of the full occupancy condition produces an intermittent flickering of the 1-r, 2516 Y monitoring miJe in the 15 Y junction.

   which indicates the occupation condition to the operator of position number 1 of the 11 Y trunk table.



   On the other hand, with regard to the routing of the call described above from the operator position number 1 to the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B to the called subscriber station of the local exchange C , any of the switching stages which precede the final stage in the automatic switching apparatus of local exchange-0 can be

  <Desc / Clms Page number 138>

 find in.presence of a case of total occupation, At this moment, said switching stage opens the circuit comprising the trunk line 500 and ending in the junction circuit 50, which causes the application of a busy tone said circuit, When the loop circuit comprising the trunk line 500 is thus open,

   the response relay R 740 releases its armature and causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 610 in the manner explained previously.



  When the end-of-talk relay R610 operates at this time, it opens, at contacts 614, the previously drawn circuit which, passing through contacts 665, applied earth to the control conductor 0 884 of junction 880A and closes, to contacts 613, an additional circuit passing through contacts 524 and 659 and applying the battery, through resistor 526, to the control conductor C 884. This application of the battery to the commando conductor 0 884 causes the transmission of a signal transmission waiting which is retransmitted to the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter by determining the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y in this circuit.

   At this moment, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y is actuated for an abnormal time interval, which causes the operation of the distribution device in the time of the pulses provided in the control circuit 20 Y, so that 120 earth pulses are applied per minute to the occupancy lamp 2604 Y in junction 15 Y and produce a flicker of the occupancy lamp 2604 Y at a frequency of 120 times per minute, 'which indicates to the operator of position number 1 of trunk switchboard 11 Y that the interested call being routed through Junction 15 Y has reached a blocked switching stage at the local exchange C.



  The operator of position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y then lowers the "errors" key of the set of keys 22 Y to release the control circuit 20 Y and the pulse transmitter 21 AY and record them. digits 21 BY command-

  <Desc / Clms Page number 139>

 
 EMI139.1
 dice: P & .10 said circuit.

   When the control circuit 20 Y is thus released, a modification of the relays occurs in Junction 15 Y, and the occupancy lamp 2604 Y flickers at a frequency of 60 fol pax minute, which indicates to the operator.
 EMI139.2
 of position number 1 of the trunk table: l; .1.J: .. J that the control circuit 20 Y and the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y controlled by this circuit were at this time disconnected from junction 15 Y.

   Said operator then proceeds
 EMI139.3
 the resetting of the application switch 17 Y of the junction 15 xyz which proviiiie the release of the second selector 1412, of the third elector 1406, of the junction circuit 50 and of
 EMI139.4
 The local exchange CoMutation apparatus in the manner explained above.



  Call 2 coming from the înüorurbaïn switchboard of the main exchange 3 and destined - li!. ':: .- t subscriber c.u central rLo. zn: D1
A call originating from the remote exchange B or routed to this exchange from the local exchange C,
 EMI139.5
 is finally trunstfils Up to the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the latter exchange and can then be routed to the exchange
 EMI139.6
 distant D, By eeillple; a long distance call can be routed to the operator position number 1 of the Interurban table IlY via the call switch 16 Y of the junction 15 Y, and transmitted to the circuit \ 1 of position 18 Y .



  The operator of this position then activates the set of keys
 EMI139.7
 22 Y. so as to act on the circuit of o almond 20 АT and on the transmitter of pulses 21 AYat will register them of digits 21 BY commanded by said cll'c ', i.lt .. The digits are then recorded in the ene: strers of digits ± ± g ±. The 21 AY pulse transmitter is, in turn, controlled by the 31 BY digit registers, so as to transmit the loop pulses of the first digit to the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y Said switch selects the group of second 1nl.; Erurban selectors, including in particular the selector

  <Desc / Clms Page number 140>

 long distance 1412 then, in this group, a second free long distance selector.

   At this time, the pulse generator 21 Y transmits the loop pulses of the following digits through the call switch '17 Y to the starting switch series, in a well known manner, assuming that the switch d 'call 17 Y of junction 15 Y precisely selects the second selector 1412, the following digit is transmitted to this second selector, which in turn selects the group of third long distance selectors comprising in particular the third long distance selector 1406 ¯ then, in this group, a third free long distance selector. Assuming that the second long distance selector 1412 precisely selects the third long distance selector 1406, the next digit is transmitted to said third selector,

   which in turn selects the group of junctions comprising the junction 1280A leading to the group of junction circuits comprising in particular the junction circuit 90 then selects, from this group, a free junction. Assuming that the third trunk selector 1406 selects the 1280 A junction leading to the junction circuit 90, the third selector 1406 applies ground to the control conductor C 1283 of the 1280 A junction, which closes the circuit previously drawn for the excitation. of the interurban selection relay R1180. When operating, the Interurban R 1180 selection relay causes the R 1120 switching relay to be energized, which in turn causes the R 90 delay relay to be energized.

   Relay R 920 in turn causes the end of conversation relay R 935 to be energized a short time later, and switching relay R 1120 connects the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 1080 and of the differential relay R 1090 to conductors C 1281 and C 1282 of the junction 1280 A, the whole following the process previously explained.



  When the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 1080 and of the differential relay 1090 are connected to the conductors C 1281 and 0 1282 of the junction 1280 A, a circuit is closed for the energization of the windings of these two relays.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 141>

 in series, since a single loop circuit is closed on the 1280 A junction conductors in the transmitter
 EMI141.1
 of Pulses 21 .X by the intermediate switches. When said circuit is closed, line relay R 1080 attracts its armature, but differential relay R 1090 does not attract its own, since said loop circuit is balanced.



    While operating, the line relay R 1080 causes the excitation of the R 1050 bonding relay and closes, at contacts 1083, the connection previously drawn between the lower winding of the
 EMI141.2
 CI11i1Ver'satlon end relay R1170 and signaling conductor C 905.

   The battery is then applied, by the lower end of conversation winding ¯1170 to the signaling corrlector ¯905 and to the sjxaplex 0 901 conductor which is connected to it ot, by cc nsequentb to the conductors of the interurban line 900 which ends at the remote central D. This application of the battery via the Lower winding of the
 EMI141.3
 end of conversation relay R l170 to the simplex conductor C 901 does not cause the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 1170, given that this is of the marginal type.

   On the other hand, this application causes the powering of the
 EMI141.4
 junction circuit of the signed exchange 610, which associates the automatic switching apparatus of this exchange with the trunk line 900. This operation may require a certain time. In addition, the Interurban selection relay R 1180 occupies junction 1280 B accessible to outgoing interurban selectors 515 X etc.,. known previously discussed.



   Likewise, when the third interurban selector
 EMI141.5
 14Q6 selects the 1280 A junction, the battery applied in the junction circuit 90 is passed through resistor 1027 and contacts .p, 6 and ± 062 to the control conductor ('] 148 of the 1280 A junction and, from there, p4.r the intermediate switches, to the control conductor 66 'which leads to the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter. The circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the end of conversation relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 142>

 R 3530Y in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter is then closed. When operating, the end of conversation relay R 3530. prevents further operation of the pulse transmitter 21 AY.

   All these operations take place according to the process described above.



   When the remote exchange switchgear D is associated with the trunk line 900 and when it is able to receive a digit, the low resistance earth potential of this switchgear is applied to the trunk line 300 and., consequently, to the simplex conductor C901 and to the signaling conductor 0 905 which is connected to it, which causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 1170 in the junction circuit 90. When operating, the end of conversation relay R 1170 causes the excitation of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R1150, which itself causes by operating the excitation of the control relay R1020, the whole following the process described above.

   When operating, the control relay R 1020 causes a short instant later, the de-energization of the delay relay R 920. The latter relay, by releasing its armature, causes the de-energization of the end of conversation relay R 935. While operating, the R 1020 control relay opens on the other hand, at contacts 1026, the direct circuit previously drawn which applied the battery to control conductor C 1284 of the 1280 A junction and, by releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 935 forms a circuit passing through contacts 1016 and 1025 and applying earth to the control conductor C 1284. When, on the control cord C 1284 of junction 1280,

   the battery is replaced by the earth as, consequently, on the control conductor C 2663 Y which leads to the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter the circuit previously drawn, which maintained, actuated the end relay conversation R 3530 Y in the control circuit 20 Y is interrupted.

   By releasing his

  <Desc / Clms Page number 143>

 armature, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y ensures the continuation of the operation of the Pulse 21 AY transmitter, and one or more additional digits are then transmitted by the series of intermediate switches to the junction circuit 90,
The next digit received on the 1280 A junction and from the 21 AY pulse generator produces a corresponding operation of the line relay 1080 in the junction circuit 90, so that the R 1050 digit relay is actuated. In operation, the relay of numbers? 1030 initiates the first phase of the staggered action of the R 940 bypass relay, all following the process described above.

   The sticking relay R 1050 and the digit relay R 1030 remain activated during the transmission of the digit. The line cell R 1080 repeats the pulses of the digit them contacts 1083 on the signaling conductor C 905, the simplex conductor C 901 and the trunk line 900, up to the first floor of the switchgear of the remote exchange D , The end-of-talk relay R 1170 and the auxiliary end-of-talk relay R 1150 also operate corresponding to the digit pulses without further effect at this time.

     At the end of the transmission of the digit, the line relay R 1080 is maintained in its working position, which keeps the end of conversation relay R 1170 and the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 activated, and this causes a short moment later, the release of the armature of the number relay R 1030. By releasing its armature, the number relay R 1030 causes the second and last phase of the staggered operation of the bypass relay R, 940, the following whole the process described above.

   At this moment, the junction circuit 90 has received the first digit and repeated it, via the trunk line 900, to the remote exchange D, which causes a corresponding operation of the first switching stage of the apparatus. from this central. The other figures

  <Desc / Clms Page number 144>

 are transmitted by the pulse generator 21 AY of the junction circuit 90, then repeated by the trunk line 900 to the automatic switchgear of the remote exchange in an identical manner. At this time, the final stage of the remote exchange switchgear D has selected the line terminating at the called subscriber station and is testing that line to determine whether it is free or busy.



   After transmission of the last digit by the pulse generator. 21 YY ,. the release relay R 3610 Y in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse generator is actuated and opens, at contacts 3613Y, the loop circuit which ends at junction circuit 90. and closes, at contacts 361 the circuit previously plotted for the application of earth, through the 3600 Y control relay winding, to the negative line conductor C 2661 Y and, therefore, to the negative conductor C 1281 of the junction 1280A.

   At this moment, the battery is applied, through the lower winding of the line relay R 1080 of the junction circuit 90, contacts 956 of the upper winding of the differential relay R 1090 of the contacts 1112, 1124 and 952, of the winding 913 of the repeater 910 and of the contacts 1122, to the negative conductor C 1281 of the junction 1280 A. Consequently, a series circuit is closed at this moment and keeps the line relay R1080 activated by actuating the differential relay. R 1090 in the junction circuit 90 and the control relay R 3600 Y in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse generator.

   While operating, the differential relay R 1090 closes, at contacts 1091, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the control relay R 1060 and the latter interrupts, while operating, at contacts 1062, the circuit previously drawn for the application. from earth to control conductor C 1284 of the. junction 1280 A and closes, on contact!
1061, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the battery, through the windings of the interurban relay R 925 and the interurban relay R 930. to the conductor of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 145>

 
 EMI145.1
 command Q;]. 2840 At this time, a separate circuit is closed for energizing the windings of the trunk relay R 25 and the relay i1 = ter-inte-i; .bai ;;

   R ± O in junction circuit 00 and winding of the end of conversation relay R 3530: in the control circuit 20¯Y of the pulse transmitter, Consequently, the end of conversation relay 3530 Y and the TI 925 long distance relays both attract their reinforcement.



  On the other hand, the inter-im, erurban relay R 93Q does not attract
 EMI145.2
 its own, since it is of the marginal type. By operating,
 EMI145.3
 the relay in'ierL1 = 1? Jain ÀR f25 caused the excitation of the auxiliary interurban relay R 1040 and this one causes 7 ui.:ie while operating, the excitation of the communication relay; 050 all following the process outlined above. When operating, the switching relay "1 9.5q closes, at contacts 955, a circuit passing through the cO: 'ltacts 101:.? And through the resistance.
 EMI145.4
 associated for energizing the lower winding of the relay
 EMI145.5
 of! yne R 1080 'which j ;; = 1¯x. ## ej "it; ie the last momentary relay actuated.

   In addition, the copulation relay; 7. 95Q opens, at contacts and 952 'the circuit preceded traced for
 EMI145.6
 series excitation of the lower winding of the
 EMI145.7
 lignēR 1080, to wind it: upper slow of the differential relay. p 10J0 in the junction circuit 90 and of the co relay winding; n;: anâe n 3600 Y in the control circuit 0 Y
 EMI145.8
 of the pulse generator. As a result, the relay
 EMI145.9
 differential 1090 and the control relay, nde R 3600 release
 EMI145.10
 both their frame.

   A short while later, the relay
 EMI145.11
 switch E-12PO X, Gans the 20 Y control circuit, is reestablished and opens, at contacts 3621 X, the series circuit. Recede trace to keep the armature of the end of conversation relay in working position T 50 Y in the circuit, control 20 Y of i 'é;: iettei-ir of pulses and that of the long distance relay fl 92Eb in the junction circuit gO,
 EMI145.12
 as explained previously. By releasing its armature, the relay
 EMI145.13
 in.terul'bain.JL925, causes the interurban relay to de-energize

  <Desc / Clms Page number 146>

   auxiliary R 1040 for a short time no longer tara and the latter itself, by releasing its armature, de-energizes the R 1060 control relay.

   On restoring, the control relay R 1060 closes, at contacts 1062, a circuit passing through contacts 1025, 939 and 1016 and applying the earth to the control conductor C 1284 of the junction 1280 A. At this moment, the- control circuit 20 Y and the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y have been completely released, which produces a total disconnection between the call switch 17 Y and the junction '
15 Y.

   In this way, the junction 1280 A is connected at this moment directly to the call switch 17 Y, so that the application of the ground to the conductor, control C 1284 of this junction has the effect of igniting the lamp of surveillance
2516 Y to indicate to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y, that the call has been routed to the called subscriber of the remote exchange D, but that, until that moment, said call n did not receive a response.



   Assuming that the final switching step of
The apparatus of the remote exchange D submits the line leading to. 1. The subscriber requested to a test and determines that this line is free, a inrush current is transmitted by this final switching stage on said subscriber line in a conventional manner, after which, when the called subscriber answers the call. 'call, this final switching stage establishes a communication between the operator position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y. of the main exchange and the called subscriber of the remote exchange D.

   On the other hand, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D increases- at this moment the resistance of the circuit applying the earth to the trunk line 900 and, consequently, to the simplex conductor C 901 and to the signing conductor. C 905 so that the end of conversation relay R 1170 in the junction circuit. 90 releases its frame, since it is of the marginal type. On recovering, the end of conversation relay R 1170 causes de-excitation.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 147>

 tion of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 and this
 EMI147.1
 last, by releasing his r ..: aituxe causes the operation of the end of conversation relay? 93E, all following the process outlined above.

   When operating, the end of con ùer> sation relay R 935 opens, at the contacts g39e the circuit previously drawn which applied the earth to the corner conductor, ande C 1224 of junction 18 Q¯j, so that the monitoring lamp 2516 Y of junction 15 Y is off, indicating to the attendant position number 1 in the table. interurban 11 Y of the main exchange B, that the subscriber of the
 EMI147.2
 from the remote central D a. answered callback. Said operator then performs the disconnection of junction 15 Y from its position circuit 1.8 Ym L9 a: oorzmé deuiand, - from the remote exchange 17 can transmit monitoring signals to the operator. of position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange by manipulating its switching hook.

   For example, when the called subscriber of the remote exchange D hangs up his receiver on the switching hook provided for this purpose, the final switching step of the remote exchange D reduces the resistance of the circuit applying the earth to the trunk line 900, this which produces a new function-
 EMI147.3
 end of conversation relay R 117Q 'in junction circuit 90, When operating, the end of conversation relay
 EMI147.4
 Sation H 11? 0 causes an excitation of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 and this causes the release of the arna.t. '. iz> e of the end of conversation relay R 935, according to the process previously exposed. By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 935 closes at contacts 939,

   the previously drawn circuit passing through the contacts 1016, for the application of the earth to the conductor
 EMI147.5
 CJL284 of junction 1280 A which turns on the surveillance lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y by indicating to the attendant position number 1 of the trunk panel
 EMI147.6
 main due-central the condition of the circuit. The operator

  <Desc / Clms Page number 148>

 from position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y then disconnects the call switch 17 Y and the junction 15 Y. so as to cause the return to the idle position of the second interurban selector 1412 and of the third interurban selector 1406, in a conventional manner.

   The earth is then eliminated from the control conductor C 1283 of the junction 1280 A, which causes the armature of the interurban selection relay R 1180 to be released in the junction circuit 90. By releasing its armature, said relay causes the release. return to rest of the switching relay R 1120 and indicates that the junction 1280 B is free to the outgoing trunk selectors 513 X, etc. which have access to said junction, all following the process described above.

   In addition, the interurban selector relay R 1180 causes the R 950 switching relay to return to the rest position, which then interrupts, at contacts 955, the circuit previously drawn for the energization of 1) winding: lower. of the line relay H 1080 and this last relay then releases its armature causing the release of that of the bonding relay R 1150. a short time later and, consequently, that of the control relay R 1020 and of the relay R 940 bypass, all following the process described above. On restoring, the switching relay R 1120 interrupts, at contacts 1124 ',

   the connection previously established between the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170 and the signaling conductor C 905, so that the last so-called relay also releases its armature, causing the release / end of the relay. auxiliary conversation R 1150.



  On the other hand, the switching relay R 1120 closes, at contacts 1125. the normal connection previously established between the input selection relay R 1240 and the signaling conductor C905. As a result, trunk 90 is at this time completely released, and the 1280 A trunk is indicated as free to the third trunk selectors.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 149>

 
 EMI149.1
 .4065 etc ... which have access to said junction.

   The trunk line 900, which connects the main exchange B. to the remote exchange 12. becomes available for a new use.
 EMI149.2
 Of course, when the lower IJer # 6 of the end of conversation relay R 11 0 is disconnected from the C 905 sinalization conductor, the switchgear of the remote exchange It is released indicating that the line which terminates at the subscriber request is free.



   Regarding the routing of the call here written above from the position of operator number 1 in the table
 EMI149.3
 interurban 11 Y from the main exchange B to the called subscriber station of the remote exchange D, it will be noted that the final switching stage of the apparatus of the remote exchange D could find oce ;;. yJ e the line resulting in the requested subscriber.



  In this case, the final coagulation stage opens the simplex circuit comprising the trunk line 900 and the glass potential of the simplex conductor C 901 and the signaling conductor C 905 which is connected to it is eliminated, which
 EMI149.4
 determines the 1 ellchei: ient of 11 st.1aturE :: of the end of conversation relay l 117Q in trunk circuit 90. In addition, the final coa-mutation eu.ae of 1 switchgear from the remote exchange D returns a busy tone on the 900 trunk line.

   By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay H 1170 causes the relµj3'liëment of that of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 'which in turn causes the operation of the end of conversation relay K s35 and this opens. , by operating, at the contacts, 39, the previously trnced circuit which applied the earth to the conductor of co :. r, ande C 1284 of junction 1 2 0 À, which causes 1 extinction of the monitoring lamp, 251.6 y:

   in the junction 1a Y and tran; if <. and to the operator in position nLiL, .ér, o 1 of the interurban table 11 Y for monitoring indications. However, the busy tone returned on the
 EMI149.5
 li, ne interurban 900 is at this moment repeated by the circuit

  <Desc / Clms Page number 150>

 of junction 90 on junction 1280 A and by the series of intermediate switches to the circuit of position 18 Y of the operator position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y, so as to indicate to said operator the condition of the circuits.



   In addition, with regard to the routing of the call described above from operator position number 1 of the trunk table. 11 Y from the main exchange to the called subscriber station of the remote exchange D, the call switch
17 Y of junction 15 Y the second interurban selector
1412 or the third trunk selector 1406 may either be in the presence of full occupancy.

   The one of said switches which is in the presence of this case of occupation opens the loop circuit which ends at the pulse emitter 21 AY and applies either 120 earth pulses or 240 alternately negative and positive pulses per minute to the conductor C 2663 Y control circuit which leads to the 20 Y control circuit of the pulse generator
Applying 120 earth pulses per minute to the C 2663 Y control conductor has no effect, so that the 21 AY pulse generator transmits the rest of the digits stored in the 21 BY loggers, all these transmissions being at this time without effect.

   The control circuit 20 Y and the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y are now released and the call switch 17 Y of junction 15 Y is switched off.



   In this way, the 120 earth pulses applied every minute to the switch which is in the presence of the full-torque event produce a corresponding flicker of the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in the junction 15 Y. to indicate the said, occupation of position number by the operator
1 of the interurban table 11 Y.

   The operator in position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y releases the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y and, consequently, of those of the originating trunk switches which were activated.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 151>

 
 EMI151.1
 On the other hand, the non-application of 240 alternating slow negative and positive pulses per minute to the driver of
 EMI151.2
 command C 2ô '=) 3 1 (which leads to the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse en; etie> 1r' causes an operation in1.e, C ';

  , ittent of the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y and, consequently, a premature release of the control circuit coJ2p¯Y of the pulse recorder-transmitter 21¯Y controlled by said circuit, all following the process previously exposed.



  Consequently, the call switch 17 Y of the junction
 EMI151.3
 15 Y operates again and produces a horn flicker, ceasing from monitoring lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y, which indicates to the operator of position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y the busy state. .



   In addition, during the routing of the call described above between the operator position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y of the main exchange B and the called subscriber of the remote exchange D, any switching stage preceding the final stage can be in the presence of a case of total occupation.Under these conditions, said switching stage interrupts the circuit which applied the earth to the trunk line 900 and, consequently, to the conductor
 EMI151.4
 , simplex C 901 and to the signaling conductor, Ç Jl.QQ., and the end of conversation relay TI 117Q of the junction circuit 90 releases its armature. On the other hand, the calling floor applies a busy tone to trunk line 900.

   By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 1170 causes the de-energization of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150 and the latter itself causes the operation of the end of conversation relay.
 EMI151.5
 '? 035 and, therefore, 19 imi.erution to contacts a3 of the previously traced circuit $ him, passing through contacts 1016, applied earth to the control conductor .S¯-L2S4 of junction 1280 A and closes, at contacts 38 a circuit passing through contacts 959, 1025 and 1062 for the application

  <Desc / Clms Page number 152>

   from the battery, via resistor 1027, to the control conductor C 1284.

   This application of the battery to the control conductor C 1284 of the junction 1280 A and, therefore, to the control conductor C 2563 Y which terminates in the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse emitter completes the circuit previously drawn for the energization of the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y in the control circuit 20. Y At this moment, the end of conversation relay R 3530 Y remains actuated for an abnormal interval of time, causing the distribution device to operate in the time of the pulses, provided in the control circuit 20 Y, so that 120 earth pulses are applied every minute to the occupancy lamp L 2604 Y in the junction 15 Y.

   The flickering of the L 2604 Y busy lamp at a frequency of 120 times per minute indicates to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y that the call concerned, routed through the .1 unction '15. Y, reaches one: switching stage blocked at the remote exchange D. The attendant in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y then lowers the "errors" key from the set of keys 22 Y to release the switching circuit. control 20 Y and the pulse emitter 21 AY, as well as digit recorders 21 BY controlled by said circuit.

   When said control circuit is thus released, there occurs in junction 15 Y a modification of the relays which causes the occupancy lamp 2604 Y to flicker at a frequency of 60 ignitions per minute, which indicates to the operator to position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y that the control circuit 20 Y and the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 Y controlled by said circuit were at this moment disconnected from junction 15 Y. Said operator then proceeds to setting to the rest position of the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y, which causes the release of the second toll selector 1412, the third toll selector 1406, the trunk 90 and the switching apparatus. from the remote exchange D,

   all follow the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 153>

 
 EMI153.1
 process exposed lJ11ecedeul.c.erltG <, - 1''LP tOVTiT¯T¯ DU T .-, 3: L.3LIT 1: T'¯: t.'3. ".R I7 '': .TT =? TL PTnNCIP1 B ET:;: X:;:; TF3 AW / 1BOi'ùig, PPR \ T3NL.l'JT <= [fDIT CE? i'fl1L "l A long distance toll call originating at t *] Jleaia toll 11 Y from the main exchange there, or routed to said switchboard from a remote point, can be transmitted to a local subscriber station belonging to said
 EMI153.2
 central.

   For example, an iwter 3rba.n call can be routed to operator position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y through the answer switch 16 Y of the 1.5 Y junction, then transmitted to the trunk circuit. position
 EMI153.3
 1.ê ... X ..

   The oàoérj, tzaice of this position then actuates the set of keys 22 Y to operate on the control circuit 20 Y9 on the cleaner d1'i, pulses 21 11Y and on the digit recorders 21 BY commanded by said circuit-, Numbers are
 EMI153.4
 then recorded in 21 BYo The pulse transmitter 21 .Y is in turn com (i1é.md8 by the digit recorders 21 EX, so as to t-rarsa! and Ur the loop pulses from the first digit to the switch call 17¯Y of junction 1li..X.



  The call author 17 Y of the junction 15 Y selects the group this junctions include noted, the junction 2100 which leads to the group of local junction circuits including in particular the local junction circuit 210, then selects in this group a free junction. Assuming that call switch 17 Y of junction 15 Y precisely selects junction 2100 which terminates at local junction circuit 210, call switch 17 Y applies ground to control conductor C 2103 of junction 2100, c which closes a circuit passing through contacts 2111. for energizing the selection relay R 2115 in the local junction circuit 210.
 EMI153.5
 



  Junction 2100 which terminates at local jorction circuit 210 is indicated at this time as free by the presence of a battery potential applied through

  <Desc / Clms Page number 154>

 the winding of the selector relay R 2115 and of the contacts 2111 to the control conductor C 2103, since the second interurban selector 1411 is free at this time. More precisely, the second trunk selector 1411 individually belongs to the local trunk 210 and it is free at this time, since the busy cut-off relay R 2110, which belongs to the local trunk circuit 210,

    is in its rest position o When the second interurban selector 1411 is selected by one of the arrival selectors of the group comprising in particular the 'arrival' selector 1403, said second selector causes Implication of a battery potential in the control driver - the .1 unction 2195. de C 2198 / which connects the second interurban selector 1411 to the local trunk circuit 210.

   This application of a battery potential to the control conductor C 2198 of junction 2195 closes a circuit passing through contacts 2118 and ensuring the energization of the occupancy cut-off relay R 2110 in the local circuit 210 * When operating, said relay R 2110 opens, at contacts 2111, the circuit previously drawn which applied the battery, 'via the 7 ¯ winding of selection relay 2115, to the control conductor C 2103 of junction 2100 and closes, to contacts 2112, an obvious circuit for the application of earth to said control conductor C 2103, indicating that junction 2100 is occupied at call switches 17 Y, etc.

   Y junctions, etc ... which have access to said 2100 junction.



   The operation of the local junction circuit 210 will now be examined after the selection of the. junction 2100 by call switch 17 Y of junction 15 Y. When operating, selection relay R 2115 closes, their contacts
2117, a circuit applying earth to the control conductor
C 2198 of junction 2195 and further closes to contacts 2119 a circuit passing through contacts 2166 and applying earth to the control conductor C 2199 of junction 2195.



  '' The application of the earth to the control conductors C 2198

  <Desc / Clms Page number 155>

 and C 2199 of the junction 2195 which leads to the second long distance selector 1411 indicates that the latter is busy with the incoming selectors 1403, etc ... which have access to said second selector.



   In addition, the closed loop in the pulse transmitter
 EMI155.1
 31 AY is extended at this time through the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter by the conductors ëâS2¯Y and 2662 Y and by the call switch z from junction 15 Y to the conductors C 2101 and C 2102 of the jonc.t: .o.ti 2100.

   The conductor C 2101 is connected, through the intermediary of the contacts 2123, 2141, 2101 to the conductor C 21) 16 of the junction 2195 and the conductor C 2102 is connected, through the intermediary of the contacts 2125; 24 and 2: 5 to conductor C 2197 of junction 21950 Conductors C 219µ and ¯2 of junction 21P5 abc, utiss611 \, to line relay of second F, ÉI¯ :: C teL1¯ 'il':

   tei ïlrtia7.n .l.'L.i.-! j which: ± 'e1', [,: e un. loop circuit for the excitation of said 1'c.; lÜC, such that the second trunk selector 1411 is sensitive to transmission
 EMI155.2
 of the next digit by the pulse generator .ill: .. J1² The next digit transmitted by the pulse generator 21 AY activates the second interurban selector 1411 of an obvious basket and the said second selector selects the group of third long distance selectors comprising the third long distance selector 1413 then, in this group, a third free long distance selector.

   Assuming that the second trunk selector 1411 selects
 EMI155.3
 ;;: r8ciséw, ol ".t the third interurban selector 413) this is activated by the following digit transmitted by the emits
 EMI155.4
 pulses 21! .Y and select ul; groups of, long distance connectors then, in this -cou: e9 a free long distance connector. Assuming that the a, y, el considered is completed up to. Bbo1lr post; Ó ordinary T? belonging to the main exchange. B, the trunk connector selected by the third selector 1413 can access the subscriber line 407 X which terminates at the requested normal subscriber station TP.

   The interurban driver of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 156>

 group 1414 is then responsive to the transmission of the next two digits by the pulse sender 21 AY and selects said line 407 X, after which said trunk connector tests said line to determine whether it is free or busy.



   After transmission of all the digits stored in the 21 BY loggers by the 21 AY pulse generator, the control circuit 20 Y and the 21 Y pulse generator digit logger are released, as previously discussed. More precisely, following the release of the armature of the sticking relay R 3620 Y in the control circuit 20Y of the pulse transmitter, release which precedes that of the armature of the relay, releasing R 3601 Y, a Battery is momentarily applied through resistor 1612 and contacts 3623. 3616 and 3404 Y to control conductor C 2663 Y and hence to control conductor C 2104 of junction 2100.

   A circuit passing through contacts 2127 is thus closed and ensures the excitation of the upper winding, of the switching relay R2120 in the local junction circuit 210, so that said relay R 2120 operates and closes, at contacts 2129 , a holding circuit passing through the contacts 2116 and ensuring the excitation of the lower winding of said relay, and a multiple circuit passing through the contacts 2176 and ensuring the excitation of the control winding R 2180. However, the latter relay does not work immediately, since it is of the delayed attraction type.

   In addition, the switching relay R 2120 opens, when operating, at contacts 2128 and 2125, the connection 'previously established between conductors C' 2101 and C 2102 of junction 2100 and conductors C 2196 and C 2197 of junction 2195 and applies to the contacts 2123 and 2124 a repeater in branch on the conductors C 2101 and C 2102 of the junction 2100, Said branch is established as follows:

   

  <Desc / Clms Page number 157>

 
 EMI157.1
 e i 1 a 'üei: #. iL: \: ': 1. bzz COll'J.uc't.el.11 '210J .. # contacts 2123, / winding 2171 of repeater 2 170 8111 "), JL; ,, CDl., (7Li relay of ellc: .Ü, SS2; , ent ¯14Q j .'esistance
 EMI157.2
 21.47, contacts? 33 and conductor C n02, 5 ct- s
 EMI157.3
 
 EMI157.4
 er: ccu Lt. '.' 1! GI14: 1? 3 of the 8,, J ;; teu: c ± µQ, winding of the relay, of:, :: c ;; Jiii! 8nde c7. ' ao7e: c: 150 concie]! 0ElteI11 'g # 49, and the ter.'e. In addition, the relay of E ,, C 0 r: 111: 11. l. of . Q I l .t -'1.0 ap; .lique, at contacts 212î and 212S, u, n other e: 1'C '- ::' tGi1 'in shunt on conductors ?? H96 e t C a3lg? from junction 2195 as follows; conductor C 2196, contacts '') ll <1'1 '", =: 1. And 210" wound!: LGiî- ;,' 1 .. ôi = 3'N''tee, lr 'C e :: r', cÙe (.181l 'of the relay test = 2 ..

   J9 contacts 2183, winding 2174 of repeater 2170, contacts 212: 3. ¯21 and 2165 and C'ā (lllctor C: 21970
 EMI157.5
 In the case where the group's long distance connector
 EMI157.6
 do not laugh .i: 'unctionl1 de Li neutralize The loop circuit which returns by the jo: lc t.ioh: 195 the winding of the
 EMI157.7
 test relay¯3 2175¯ is energized, attracts its armature and opens,
 EMI157.8
 au c; Ia2cts lây The preceding circuit trace for the excitation of i, enro = 1ie; .àer = -i of the control relay E 218Q, which prevents the .JIîC 7..¯'1¯, ¯..CI ? .v of this last relay at this time.
 EMI157.9
 When the group 1414 trunk connector is working
 EMI157.10
 so as to neutralize the loop circuit which returns via
 EMI157.11
 junction 2195., the circuit which kept the
 EMI157.12
 test relay 1? 2175 est .rii.e-r- O! Tipu9 c.e 80:

  1.'te Ç, ue ', leèit relay releases its aamt, ux'e and re: 1 ..' 8 ;. 1,, 8, au.- contacts 217B "the previous circuit: ent traced for -Theexci- @ üat-ion of the com winding, [lb.nè.e 'c 2130 this one running for a short time more t.? -1 'r En was in operation; the control relay R 2180 JI "'" 1.i1'tel ": 'OïfyJ-t to contacts lli1" the repeater bypass previously established pressing by the 8l1l'out of the test relay
 EMI157.13
 ? 2175 and opens, moreover, at contacts 8829 a circuit -; J: m: crx: tcci: J: 2; ü; \ OOl .. <X! T &;} OC ': IDG "wOO.ïi # :;' ëèG @ t obvious name 'le & nL ferrie for shorting the prou.2e; .e, .- t lower tone relay R 2130.

   Relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 158>

 R 2181 also closes, at contacts 2182 and 2184, a circuit bypassing the upper and lower windings of the end of conversation relay B 2190 in; ery with the lower winding of the tone relay R 2130 on conductors C 2196 and C 2197 of junction 2195 which ends at the trunk connector of group 1414.

   Said branch is established as follows: earth, lower winding of R 2190, contacts 2184, winding 2174 of repeater 2170, contacts 2126, 214 ± and 2165, conductor C 2197 and battery, upper winding of R 2190, contacts 2182 winding, 2172 du "repeater 2170, lower winding of R 2130, contacts 2121, 2141 and conductor C 2196. When said branch is closed, neither the end of conversation relay R 2190, nor the tone relay R'213Q, operate, due to the high impedance of the branch circuit in the trunk connector of group 1414.

   In addition, the application of an earth in the local junction circuit 210, to the control conductor C 2199 at this time prevents the operation of the trunk connector of group 1414 and the application of an inrush current on line 407 X which results in the requested normal subscriber station TP, even if the test carried out on said station indicates that it is free at this time.



  In addition, the control relay R 2180 closes, by operating, at contacts 2185, a circuit passing through contacts '2193 and 2128 and applying earth to the control conductor C 2104 of junction 2100.' which turns on the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y, indicating to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk line 11 Y that the call has been routed to the called subscriber's extension at the main exchange B.



   At this time, in the event that the trunk connector of group 1414 determines the unoccupied line 407 X which terminates at the normal subscriber station of busy tone on the previously traced branch and passing through the conductors.



  .from junction 2195 De Bette manner, said busy tone is repeated by the conductors of junction 2100 which terminate

  <Desc / Clms Page number 159>

 in return to the position circuit 18 Y from the position
 EMI159.1
 ci * operator number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y, e which indicates to said operator the state of occupation of the line of the subscriber request. On the contrary, in the case where the connector
 EMI159.2
 of group 14L4 determines: ¯the line = ne 407 X which ends at the subscriber station normul der;

  , ends EP is free, no other operation takes place at this time. When the operator in position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y wishes to call
 EMI159.3
 the subscriber of the normal set asks for TP, she activates the call key:.: onvl :: 'u',: 19, which causes the application of a call current to the driver C 2102 of junction 2100, by closing an obvious circuit substantially identical to that
 EMI159.4
 who was, arecédec: .en :. trace for the excitation of the corn relay :: Uiac.e of a; pel 3 2150 When operating, the control relay, call! ande R 2150 fe1- ;;

  . <These contacts 211 a circuit passing through contacts 2144, and 218.'5 for the excitation of the flow of the call relay IL 2160, and the latter relay operates a co. # iflt instant later, since it is both the delayed action and iflelàùhernen.t type ..



  When the attendant at position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y returns said bell key of its circuit from position 18 Y to its normal position, the energizing circuit of the call control relay R 2150 is interrupted and said relay released its armature by interrupting,
 EMI159.5
 contects 1;} the circuit previously drawn which kept the call relay R 2160 actuated, and the latter releases its armature a moment later.

   While operating, the
 EMI159.6
 call relay @@ interrupts, at contacts 2161 and 1L5 the connection between conductors C 219¯q and 1 gi? "of junction 2195 and the upper and lower windings of the
 EMI159.7
 3¯2i.9Q end of conversation relay and closes, at contacts 2163 and 21fA, an obvious circuit passing through the bell supply conductor C 2148 ensuring the application of an inrush current to the conductors C 319'3 and C 8197, which is

  <Desc / Clms Page number 160>

 without particular effect at this time.

   Also, by operating) the call relay ?! 2160 interrupts, at contacts 2166, the circuit previously drawn for the nonapplication of earth to control conductor C 2199 of junction 2195, which causes the armature of the bell cut-off relay to release in the trunk connector of group 1414 and establishes an automatic ringing call on line 407 X that terminates at. normal subscriber station requested TP.

   When the R 2160 call relay releases its armature again, it returns the local junction circuit 210 to its original state in which the upper and lower windings of the R 2190 end of conversation relay and the lower winding of the tone relay R 2130 are bypassed on condu.ctors C 2196 and C 2197 of junction 2195.



   When the ring cutoff relay of the group 1414 trunk connector releases its armature to trigger the automatic ringing call on line 407 X, as previously indicated .; the impedance of the circuit previously drawn and passing through the upper and lower windings of the end-of-talk relay R 2190 and through the lower winding of the tone relay R 2130 is slightly reduced, which causes partial operation of the switch-off relay. R 2130 tone without operation of the R 2190 end of conversation relay.

   More precisely, the tone relay R 2130, during said partial operation, closes to the contacts 2131 a circuit passing through the contacts 2192, the capacitor 2178, and the tone connector 2177 for energizing the upper winding of said relay. The tone current flowing through the circuit traced by the upper winding of the R 2130 tone relay induces a corresponding tone voltage in the lower winding of said relay and said voltage is applied across the windings 2172 and 2174 of the repeater 2170.

   An analogous tone voltage is then induced in windings 2171 and 2173 of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 161>

 
 EMI161.1
 repeater 217Q and a corresponding tone current is returned to the circuit of the -OSÍT, ioL 2.:LY from position e1 'O) 0X'é, -i., J.'ice ncl: 1lSj.'O 1 C: L1 ua! Wa ¯2ctli long distance 1 1T this, which indicates to said operator that the ringing of the set of the normal subscriber called TP is triggered.



  When the 8bon ", 6 of the requested normal po141e P answers the call, the C'ïlYlï'lr¯C'u.2: 1 long distance of group 1414, interrupts Inapplication of the inrush current on the 1 in 407 and continues to operate by reducing the impedance of the circuit: CWC2dei: 'tfcCrl traces ¯Jb' the conductors C 121Q ± and C 2127 of 1G junction 219,; 5 so that the tone relay: '1; 0 operates fully and opens , at contacts lli; 1J a circuit'Je toi ';:. iii; é: isuri comprising resistor 2134 and capacitor 2135 mounted in shunt on windings 2l7 and 77 "at repeater 211.Q, enclosing at c:

  or tacts 2132, an obvious circuit to short-circuit the lower winding of said reliiso When the lower winding of the tone relay 21,30 is thus short-circuited,
 EMI161.2
 the impedance of the circuit previously traced by the windings
 EMI161.3
 upper and lower 'of the end of conversation relay] ¯21 and by the conductors C 2L96 and C 2197 of the junction ± fi e, 5i still further reduced, so that said 1'818is ::.:; 2JJ2.Q
 EMI161.4
 works. When operating, this relay closes, at the contacts
 EMI161.5
 .ê1.fJl, a holding circuit weighing the contacts .31 for the excitation of the sup.pé-1 winding of the relay this tone R 2130, this ¯a; zi méiÍntien ': ..

   C0 last in his. working position and opens; them contacts] 19, the circuit previously traced by 1 <; tone conductor C 2177 for ion of i 'en; Ji; 1- # zizn.i upper of tone relay 3. From p1; .1.3, said relay 11 81S0 interrupts, at, w> i contacts ± 1 ± 53, 'the circuit l71' .Cde;: .. v: rl 'traced for the application of the earth to the conductor of comr..nnde ç ::;:! .. 04 of the junction 210, Q, which turns off 1 , has, lamp this surveillance 851- ':; , in the junction j¯.5 y and t: E # lS; ',: 8t at the opera Lrice of position number o 1 of the interurban table 1IL¯Y of N1,: C1 = 111? response monitoring.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 162>

 



  At this time, a telephone communication is established between
 EMI162.1
 the calling oper8tJice of position number 1 of the trunk switchboard '11 Y and the normal subscriber station requested TP of the main exchange B.



  The normal 8DOnrl'é requested yp can send: r'e Ôes monitoring and end signals (the conversation with the operator from, position number 1 by manipulating his switch hook. For example, when this subscriber hang up
 EMI162.2
 receiver on said .co.nu hook:

  = u.tstiori, the trunk connector of group 1414 works' in such a way that it increases the impedance of the ..circuit previously traced by the conductors C 2196 and C 2197 of the 'junction 2195 which produces the release of the' armature of the end of conversation relay R 2190 in the local junction circuit 210.

     'In
 EMI162.3
 'releasing its armature, the end relay c = .e conversation R S190 closes, at contacts 2193, the circuit previously drawn for the nonapplication of earth to the control conductor C 2104 of junction 2100, which lights the lamp again monitoring 2516 Y in junction 1..5 Y and gives the attendant position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y
 EMI162.4
 81k signals at the end of the conversation.

   The operation of position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y then proceeds to disconnect the call switch 17 Y from the line 15 Y and the earth which was applied to the conductor of
 EMI162.5
 Command 'C 2103' of junction 2100. is eliminated, which causes the armature of selection relay 2 2115 to be released in the local junction circuit 210. By releasing its armature,
 EMI162.6
 the selection relay R 2115 opens the contacts ^ ll09 the trace hold circuit for energizing the lower winding of the switching relay R <Zl2Q. and the winding of the control relay R 2180. In this way, said relays are reestablished.

   In addition, the selection relay R 2115 opens, at contacts 2117, the circuit previously drawn for the application of earth to the control conductor.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 163>

 
 EMI163.1
 t. 2198 of 1 =, junction rC, "7 ce; ij has the key effect of releasing the second toll selector ± ± l, the third toll selector l: 111 and the trunk connector of the. Group l4l.f !, the tOiJt el 'ill18 manicrc C1Ç..2S11.¯le 1) In this way; la is 407 X which leads to a normal called subscriber station ± is indicated CO; .¯¯'¯c. 1'ï'ï:

   5. l '': J ...-,) "8i1l ::,.; E switching which has access li, Gi = -e 1" ', L so: = ¯ aifli-; i;. "- i -ire, ie i? ezaix Dedite lÍ1C. '.Jn J: e. é.l.¯'nt;' 2 its armature, the relay cie GOï: ï:; l-ïc. ilOf! ia 212C interrupts, at contacts 2121 and ± ±, the deriveticn 'é, a'. 'C'CC.'¯': i - ::: = '": -, established between the windings?' !!.-'... 7. i7.:G and higher of} - '':;: é'i, 3 of -2ir of CO: l \ i81 "'scftion R 21O and conductors C 219: 3 and',: ..% junction 2195 , and closes, at contacts G "" 1 and 2125 li) original connection precGc.1errunent. established between z i. cs.;, i>; id;: c .l; e ai, C 8101 and C 2102 of junction 2100 and the con: .lJcteUl'i3 C 219: 3 and C ù q17 de'la junction: 3185 ,,, By releasing its i3l '", èl, tuI'e, the end of conversation relay .1. , '. c int:) 111'Or ": k) ti at contacts g191 the circuit of Ïi! r'.: LY1-LleCl 'of:

   tr & c'j 1¯Wiï '! energization of the upper winding of the tone relay 'R 130. so that the latter releases;' U? -¯ turn its "'-1,., -". "- \ 11'8 ce; i, ç = i ;; # nt, the local junction circuit 210 is co, llpleto,: 8r: t 1'iz.l: Te: qe which indicates that the junction 200 which terminates in the circuit is free at the response switches i. r9 etc ... of CO! II: E: iO! 1w: L5 v which have E., CCB1 S. said junction thanks to the application of a negative potential for the winding of the selection relay n¯2115 to the control conductor C¯¯¯2103 of junction 2100.

   Likewise, the second long distance selector 1411 is indicated as free to incoming selectors 1403, etc ... which have access to said second selector, ': 1': 'n on the application of a negative potential by the winding of the occupancy cut-off relay '..', ln to O! ''. r.a '! li: t: L: .L' of control C 212) of the junction.? 195o Regarding l '' communication routing
 EMI163.2
 described above between the operator's position number
 EMI163.3
 du 't 2 (1)]. (; 811 j¯¯n¯TeT'īlï'J2J¯ ?? 1. ï and the post ci' rll.?O1SlCr-l 'Y101'; :: ctl cie, 'ú.nd8 9 we will notice lll' 8.er:.:

  s the transmission of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 164>

 end of conversation monitoring by said called subscriber, in the manner 'expbsée above, the operator of position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y may wish to enter into communication again with said subscriber. For this purpose, Empress of position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y, actuates the appropriate call key of its circuit of position 18 Y, which operates the call control relay R 2150 in the manner previously explained. , which causes the R 2160 call relay to operate.

   While operating, the inrush relay R 2160 closes, at contacts 2162 and 2164, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the inrush current from the local junction circuit 210 through junction 2195 and through the series of intermediate switches on line 407 X terminating at the requested normal subscriber station TP. Then, when the attendant returns said call key from her circuit 18 Y to the rest position, the R 2150 call control relay releases its armature, which causes the release of that of the R 2160 call relay. .

   When the subscriber of the normal called station TP picks up again, the circuit previously drawn for the energization of the end of conversation relay R 2190 in the local junction circuit 210 is again closed, which causes said relay to operate again and opens, at contacts 2193, the circuit traced for the application of the control conductive soil C 2104 of junction 2100, which results in a new extinction: of the monitoring lamp 2516 Y in junction 15 Y. This extinction indicates to the operator in position number 1 on the trunk table, 11 Y, that the called subscriber picked up again.



   In addition, with regard to the routing of the call described above from operator position number 1 of the toll table 11 Y to the called normal subscriber station TP, the telephone switch call 16 Y from junction 15 Y. the second toll selector 1411, the third toll selector 1413 can either be in the presence of a case

  <Desc / Clms Page number 165>

 
 EMI165.1
 ë.'C} \ 'C1J¯, tio: J tothle.

   The COI.l.:-étL1 which is in the presence of '0.c.it Cr; S of occupation operates the: .i': ¯w of loop which ends
 EMI165.2
 
 EMI165.3
 in return ppr junction 2195 to junction cjrcl.1it loc ':;', l :: 110 and apply) saw 120 earth pulses, that is 240 Hiterratively Yz? tive and positive pulses per minute to the control conductor C¯2l99 of junction 2195.

   However, 'the pulse generator; "' 1 rv 0 -, j'l ':' Il 'à t'C' :: 1'1'- ',' ,," - 0, 1'8 le remainder of the digits recorded in the recorders 1¯., so that the control circuit 20 Y and the el1I'e;:; Íst, reur-é: Pulse letter f1 .... Y oJoixi; = 6J = iléù pàoi this circuit are released, which causes a cut. ::::, é2: 5r, Üe of CO [lld; Ut8t'Ul 'd' &: y: e1 l7¯Y of junction 1.5 Y , all following the process exposed by pr. <éoJédei1nie> .; tn In this case, after the. # reception (on :; all digits through the local trunk 1Q9 on -r¯1.r?: ¯: ¯ switching :: - 1 18Q and the : control relay :: nîünde R 2180 are in operation, as explained above; '.;

   .ent, so that earth is applied to the control conductor Q 2104 of the jo ': ctiún 11.QQ, which causes the a.ltulla 5. ± 1.a monitoring lamp 2510 Y in the jOilction 12. ... X- The operator of position number 1 of tebleau. interurban 1, Y, proceeds c: to the application, of the current Ringing on the junction g1QQ to cause the operation of the call control relay "1.5G and the call relay .B .2L:; Q, as explained above. However, the call relay R¯21o0 does not produce any effect when operating 1, a; <if it interrupts at contacts E1.9. ±., the application of the earth to the conductor of CJiri't.ct'îC.e C 81Q.

   Accordingly, no high impedance circuit capable of ô. e: #i ter the lower winding of the tone relay R Sl30 is not closed due to the release of 81 '"2, tUi" <of the relays E, ¯2150 and ± ± $, Thus, said relay cannot operate on the B.rtiE: 1.le :, l1t, so that no dial tone intended for the calling party is applied by the 9100 junction to circuit 18 Y from operator position number 1 of trunk switchboard 11 Y and said operator is then
 EMI165.4
 immediately informed that one of the selectors in the
 EMI165.5
 interM'urban switches was in the presence of a case
 EMI165.6
 of total occupancy.

   The application of 120 earth pulses and-
 EMI165.7
 of 240 alternating negative and positive pulses per

  <Desc / Clms Page number 166>

 min to junction 2195 control conductor C 2199
 EMI166.1
 in the Coqmmutateur which is in the presence of a case of total epation, has no effect on the local junction circuit 210.



  LOUD CALL FROM LOCAL CENTRAL 0 ET,. i "i 1 ¯" âtild AT MAIN CENTRAL B.



   A medium distance long distance call, originating at a calling subscriber station of the local exchange C, is first routed by the automatic switching apparatus of said exchange to one of the trunk lines of the. group including in particular the interurban line 500 and
 EMI166.2
 connecting the local exchange C to the main exchange B.

   Assuming that said switchgear selects trunk line 500, a loop circuit is closed between conductors C 501 and 0502 of trunk line 5004 At this time, in trunk circuit 50, earth is applied by through the upper winding of the line relay
 EMI166.3
 B 830p contacts? 24 * of winding 636 of repeater 630 and contacts 508, au. conductor C 502 of the interurban line 500, and a battery is applied, via the lower winding of the line relay R 830, the contacts 728, the winding 634 of the repeater 630 and the contacts) it and 506,

   to conductor C 501 of interurban line 5006 Consequently, the lower and upper windings of the line relay R 830 are energized and said relay operates and closes, at contacts 832, an obvious circuit for energizing the sticking relay R 820. In
 EMI166.4
 working !? R 820 oollsage relay closes, at contacts 821 # an obvious circuit for energizing the occupancy relay R 840i This closes, when operating, at contacts 841t an obvious circuit for the application of the earth to the conductor. - Control switch C 873 of junction-8 70 which ends at arrival selector 1422, said selector belonging individually to junction circuit 50. In this way, said selector is ready to be put into action.

   Likewise, the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 167>

 occupancy relay R 840 closes, at contacts 842. a circuit passing through contacts 861 and applying the earth to control conductor C 883 of junction 880 1. which indicates that said junction ,, and therefore the circuit of junction 50, are intersected with the third interurban selectors 1406, etc. *. who have access to said junction.

   In addition, the occupancy relay R 840 closes, at contacts 845, an obvious circuit for the nonapplication of earth to the control conductor C 885 of junction 880 B, indicating that junction 880 B, and therefore the junction circuit 50, are occupied by outgoing trunk selectors 513 X, etc ... on the one hand and 511 X, etc ... on the other hand constituting the two groups which have access to said junction. In addition, the occupancy relay R 840 closes, at contacts 844, an obvious circuit for the excitation of the right winding of the response relay R 740, so that said relay becomes of the fast pull type when its left winding is thus excited with a proper sense of polarity.

   The relay R 840 also closes at contacts 8479 an obvious circuit for the exeitation in series of the lower and upper windings of the shunt relay R 640, which causes the complete operation of the latter rolais. In operation, relay 3640 closes, at contacts 645, a holding circuit passing through contacts 846 for the series energization of the upper and lower windings of said relay.



  On the other hand, the shuntago relay R 640 opens, at contacts 641 and 642, the previously indicated circuits for short-circuiting the respective windings 631 and 633, of the repeater 630. In addition, when operating, the relay of gluing R 820 closes to contacts 822 a loop circuit connecting junction circuit 50 to arrival selector 1422 and passing through junction 870. Said loop circuit is

  <Desc / Clms Page number 168>

 formed as follows: conductor 0 871 of junction 870, contacts 831, winding 631 of repeater 630, contacts 652 and 726, left winding of response relay R 740, contacts 721 'and 654, winding 633 of repeater 630, contacts
822, conductor C 872 of junction 870.

   The positive and negative potentials are applied to leads C 871 and C 872 in the arrival selector 1422. When the loop circuit traced above is closed, the response relay R 740 does not operate, since if its left winding is excited, it is not with a suitable sense of polarity.



   However, inbound selector 1422 is ready for operation upon receipt of the digit transmitted over trunk 870 from trunk 50.



   The calling subscriber of the local exchange C then proceeds to the formation on his dial of the first digit whose pulses are transmitted by the trunk line 500, and the line relay R 830 operates according to these pulses.



   The first time that the line relay R 830 releases its armature, it closes at contacts 833 a circuit passing through contacts 824 and activating the R 810 digit relay.



   While operating, said relay R 810 closes, at contacts 811, the previously drawn circuit passing through resistor 780 to short-circuit the left winding of response relay R 740, which reduces the impedance of the terminating loop circuit, via junction 870, to arrival selector 1422., In addition, the number relay R 810 closes by operating, at contacts 812, an obvious circuit for the energization of the auxiliary digit relay R 620. .

   While operating, this last relay closes, at contacts 621 and 622, obvious circuits to shorten the windings.
636 and 633 of the repeater 630, which further reduces the Impedance of the incoming and outgoing loop circuits. Relay of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 169>

 bonding R 820 and the digit relay R 810 being both of the delayed release type, the armature remains stuck during the transmission of the digit, the digit relay
R 810 now itself actuated the auxiliary digit relay R 620.

   Each time the line relay R 830 releases its armature then attracts it again, it interrupts and then closes, at contacts 831, the previously traced loop circuit which ends, via the junction
870, to the arrival selector 1422. In this way, the digit pulses received by the line relay R 830 on the incoming loop circuit comprising the trunk line
500, are repeated by the outgoing loop circuit including junction 870, to the incoming selector 1422, which produces a corresponding operation of said selector,
At the end of the transmission of the digit, the line relay R 830 is kept actuated, which causes the sticking relay R 820 to be maintained.

   A few moments later, the digit relay R 810 releases its armature, so as to interrupt, at contacts 811, the circuit previously traced in order to short-read the left winding of the response relay R 740 and so as to interrupt, at contacts 812, the circuit which kept the auxiliary digit relay R 620 actuated. A short time later, the auxiliary digit relay R 620 releases its armature, given that it is of the type with delayed release and it opens, on contacts
621 and 622, the circuits by means of which the windings
636 and 633 of repeater 630 were shorted.

   It will be understood that the arrival selector 1422 is sensitive to the first digit which is retransmitted to it from the trunk circuit.
50 in a classic way ...



   The call in question can be routed either to the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B, or

  <Desc / Clms Page number 170>

 to a subscriber station belonging to said main exchange * Assuming that said call is routed to a called subscriber station, such as for example the normal subscriber station TP, the arrival selector 1422 selects the group of first selectors, comprising in particular the first selector, 501 X then., in this group, a first free selector:

   Assuming that the arrival selector 1422 has precisely selected the first selector 501 X, the following digit, repeated by the junction circuit 50, ensures the selection by this first selector of the group of second selectors comprising, in particular, the second selector 502 X, then in this group the selection of a second free selector Assuming that the first selector 501 X has precisely selected the second selector 502 X, the following number, repeated by circuit 50, causes the selection by said second selector of the group of individual connectors comprising in particular the undivided dual connector 525'X then, in this group, the selection of an individual, free connector.

   Assuming that the second selector 502 X a precisely selects the individual connector 525tX, the next two digits, repeated by the junction circuit 50, actuate said individual connector, which in turn selects the 407 X line leading to the normal subscriber station. requested TP. The individual connector 525'X then proceeds to the test of the line 407 X which leads to the requested normal subscriber station TP to verify whether said line is free or busy, this test being carried out in a conventional manner.



   Assuming that the called normal subscriber station TP is at this time busy, the individual connector 525'X returns a busy tone current through the intermediate switches to the trunk circuit 50. Said busy tone is repeated. by the trunk line 500 and by ', the switchgear of the local exchange C, to the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 171>

 subscriber requesting said exchange. The requesting subscriber of local exchange 0 causes the release of the associated switchgear, so that the trunk 50 and the switchgear of the main exchange B are in turn released in a manner. discussed later in more detail.



   On the other hand, assuming that the individual connector 525 'X finds that the line 407 X terminating at the requested normal subscriber station TP is free, it causes the application of an inrush current to said. line and returns a current calling party warning tone indicating the operation of the called party's calling device, through the intermediate switches to trunk 50 and thence through trunk line 500 and switchgear from the local exchange C, to the calling subscriber of said exchange.



  When the subscriber of the normal station requesting TP from the main exchange B answers the call, the individual connector 525'X establishes a communication between the calling subscriber station of the local exchange C and the normal subscriber station. requested TP from the main exchange B, by reversing the polarity on junction 870, so that the left winding of the response relay R 740 in the junction circuit 50 has a direction of polarity such that said relay can operate ,, While operating, the response relay R 740 closes, at contacts 741, a circuit passing through contacts 724 'for energizing the current reversal relay R 505.

   While operating, said relay R 505 Inverse, at contacts 506, 507, 508 and 509, the polarity of conductors 0 501 and C 502 of interurban line 500, with respect to line relay R 830 in junction circuit 50 This reversal of the positive and negative potentials on the conductors of trunk line 500 is used to give response monitoring signals to the local exchange C.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 172>

 



   At the end of the call, when the called subscriber of the normal station TP hangs up his receiver on the switching hook provided for this purpose, the individual connector
525'X works again and reverses the polarity on junction 870 again, so that the left winding of the response relay R 740 can cause the armature of said relay to release; By releasing its armature, the response relay R 740 interrupts, at contacts 741, the circuit previously drawn which kept the reversing relay actuated. current R 505.

   By releasing its armature, the current reversal relay R 505 reverses, to contacts 506, 507,
508 and 509, the polarity of the conductors of the trunk line 500 with respect to the line relay R 830 of the junction circuit 50. This reversal of the negative and positive potentials on the conductors of the trunk line 500 is useful. ized 'to give end of call monitoring signals to the switchgear of the local exchange C.



   When the calling subscriber of the local exchange C then hangs up his receiver on the switching hook provided for this purpose, the automatic switchgear of the local exchange C is released in a conventional manner, which interrupts the terminating loop circuit. , via trunk line 500, to line relay R 830 in junction circuit 50:

     Line relay R 830 then released its armature and opens, at contacts 832, the previously indicated circuit which kept the R 820 sticking relay actuated, so that the latter in turn releases its armature a short time later, given that it is of the release, delayed type * On restoring, the R 820 bonding relay interrupts, at contacts 821, the previously traced circuit which kept the R 840 locking relay actuated.

   This, by releasing its armature, opens at contacts 841 the circuit previously traced for the application of the earth to the conductor.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 173>

 C 873 from junction 870 which ends at arrival selector 1422. 'As a result, the arrival selector 1422, the first selector 501 X, the second selector 502 X and the individual connector 525'X are all released. 'a classic way. The individual connector 525'X then indicates that the line 407 X which terminates at the requested normal subscriber station TP of the main exchange B is free.

   In addition, the occupancy relay B 840 opens), at contacts 842, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 883 of junction 880 A and closes, at contacts 843, the circuit. previously plotted for Battery inapplication, via the winding of the interurban selector switch R 850, to the control conductor C 883, which indicates that the 880 A junction is free at the third interurban selector 1406, etc ... who have access to said junction.

   On the other hand, the occupancy relay R 840 interrupts, at contacts 845, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 885 of the junction 880 B and closes again, at the contacts. 846, the circuit previously drawn for Battery inapplication ,, through the winding of the local selection relay R 860, to the control conductor C 885, which indicates that junction 880 B is free to outgoing long distance selectors 513 X, etc ... on the one hand and 511 X, etc ... on the other hand which form the two groups of selectors which have access to said junction.



  In addition, the occupancy relay R 840 opens, at contacts 844, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the right-hand winding of the response relay R 740 and the multiple circuit which kept the bypass relay R activated. 640, At this moment, the trunk circuit 50 is completely released and the interurban line 500, which connects the main exchange B to the local exchange C, becomes available for a new use.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 174>

 
During the routing of the call described above, from the calling subscriber station of the local exchange C to the normal called subscriber station TP of the main exchange B, the arrival selector 1422, on,

  first selector 501 X or the second selector 502 X may be in the presence of a case of total occupation * Under these conditions, the one of these switches which is in the presence of this case interrupts the loop circuit which ends in return to the junction circuit 50,. via junction 870, and ap. plies a busy tone current at said junction
870. Said current applied to junction 870 is repeated by junction circuit 50 and trunk line 500 to the calling subscriber of local exchange C, which indicates to said subscriber the busy case encountered. The calling subscriber of the local exchange C then proceeds to interrupt the call according to the process described above.



   As indicated, when the call described above was initiated by the calling subscriber of the local exchange C, then. routed through trunk line 500 of trunk circuit 50 and trunk 870 to arrival selector 1422, it can be transmitted to trunk switchboard 11 Y of main exchange B.

   To this end, the number transmitted to the arrival selector 1422 causes the selection by this selector of the group of direct traffic junction circuits, comprising in particular the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y then, in this group, the selection of 'a free direct traffic trunk * Assuming that the arrival selector 1422 precisely selects the direct traffic trunk 23 Y, this controls the common start circuit 12 Y, which controls itself the traffic distributor on the 13 Y operator positions.

   More precisely, this 13 Y traffic distributor loads one of the positions

  <Desc / Clms Page number 175>

   operator of the long distance table 11 Y, such as for example the operator position number 1 shown, to answer this long distance call.

   Consequently, the common starting circuit 12 Y and the traffic distributor 13 Y at this moment transmit the commands to the circuit 18 Y of the operator position number 1, which triggers the operation of the response switch. of one of the associated junctions,) determined beforehand by the junction distributor 19 Y, Assuming that the junction distributor 19 Y has previously designated junction 15 Y, the response switch 16 Y of said junction seeks the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y. The position of this circuit is indicated on the response switch 16 Y by the common starting circuit 12 Y and by the circuit 23 Y itself.

   Consequently, the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y is connected at this time through the Intermediate response switch 16 Y of the junction 15 Y to the circuit 18 Y of the operating position number 1 of the table. long distance 11 Y.



   When the call is routed in this manner to operator position number 1 of the interurban switchboard 11 Y, the direct traffic trunk 25 Y is controlled in such a way that it ensures a reverse polarity. by means of the intermediate switches and of the junction 870, so as to cause the operation of the response relay R 740 in the junction circuit 50. When operating), said response relay R 740 causes the operation of the relay d 'current reversal R 505, so that the polarity of the trunk line 500 is reversed with respect to the line relay R 830, so as to transmit response monitoring signals to the automatic switchgear of the local exchange C.

   At this time, a communication is established between the calling subscriber of the local exchange C and the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 176>

 operator position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y.



   When informed of the destination of the call, said operator activates the set of keys 22 Y, so as to act on the control circuit of the impulse transmitter 20 Y, and on the transmitter. 21 AY pulses and 21 BY digit recorders commanded by said circuit. The figures are then recorded in the recorders: 81 BY. Pulse transmitter 31 AY then controls the operation of call switch 17 Y of junction 15 Y and the following switches of the outgoing trunk series, thereby ensuring the routing of the call. , all in the manner explained above.

   After the call has been routed by the operator from position number 1 of the trunk board 11Y, the control circuit 20 Y and the pulse recorder-transmitter:
21 Y are automatically released. The 15 Y junction is then disconnected from the 18 Y position circuit.



   The calling subscriber of the local exchange C can transmit surveillance signals at the end of the conversation to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk table.
11 Y at the main exchange B by manipulating soh oommu- talion hook * For example, when said subscriber hangs up his re. Receptor on the hook provided for this purpose, the switchgear of the central 1olcal 0 is released in a conventional manner by causing the release of the junction circuit 50 and of the arrival selector 1422, all according to the process described previously.

   When the arrival selector 1422 is released in this manner, the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y causes the monitoring lamp 2603 Y of the junction 15 Y to light up, indicating to Empress number 1 of the ta .. bleto long distance 11 Y that the calling subscriber hung up.



   Said operator then proceeds to release the answer switch 16 Y from junction 15 Y, so that the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y is indicated as being free.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 177>

 to the switchgear of the main exchange B which has access to said circuits
CALL FROM REMOTE CENTRAL D AND
INTENDED FOR THE MAIN CENTRAL B.



   A medium-distance long-distance call originating from a calling subscriber station belonging to the remote exchange D is first of all routed by the automatic switching apparatus of said exchange to the trunk lines of the group comprising in particular the trunk line 900 and connecting the remote exchange D to the main exchange B. Assuming that said switchgear precisely selects the trunk line 900, the positive potential which exists in this apparatus is removed from said trunk line and replaced by a negative potential.

   This inversion of potentials on the interurban line 900 and, consequently, on the simplex conductor C 901 and on the signaling conductor C 905 which are connected to it $ has the effect of closing a circuit passing through its contacts. 1144, 1125 'and 1162 for energizing the input selection relay R 1240 in the junction circuit 90. When operating, said relay closes, at contacts 1241, an obvious circuit for energizing the relay. glue R 1250.

   This itself closes at contacts 1251 an obvious circuit for energizing the occupancy relay R 1250, which interrupts by operating at contacts 1231 the circuit previously traced for the application of a battery, by the intermediate the winding of the local selection relay B 1130 to the control conductor C 1285 of the junction 1280 B and closes, at contacts 1232, an obvious circuit for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 1285 , application which indicates that junction 1280 B is busy to outgoing trunk selectors 513 X, etc ... which have access to said junction.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 178>

 



   In addition, the relay (vacancy R 1230 interrupts, at contacts 1234, a normally closed circuit passing through contacts 1051 and applying the battery, via the winding of the occupancy relay R 1140, to the control conductor C 1273 of the junction 1270 which terminates at the arrival selector 1421 and closes, at the contacts 1235, an obvious circuit for the application of the earth to this control conductor C 1273. In this way, the arrival selector 1421 belongs. nant individually at junction circuit 90 is selected.



  On the other hand, the occupancy relay R 1230 interrupts, at contacts 1238, the previously drawn circuit which applied the battery, via the winding of the interurban selection relay R 1180, to the control conductor C 1283 of the 1280 A junction and closes, at contacts 1237, an obvious circuit for the application of earth to said conductor C 1283, indicating that the 1280 A junction is occupied by the third long distance switches 1406, etc ... which have access to said junction *
In addition, the R 1250 bonding relay closes, at contacts 1252, and 1253, earth application circuits, via the 400 ohm resistor 1256, and the battery,

   by means of the 3000 ohm resistor 1257, to one of the terminals of the lower winding of the input pulse relay R 1260 and also closes, at contacts 1255, a circuit passing through contacts 1162, 1125t and 1144 'and connecting the other terminal of said lower winding to signaling conductor C 905. On the other hand, the bonding relay R 1250 closes, at contacts 1254, a circuit comprising the 27000 ohm resistance 1258 and the contacts 1224 for energizing the upper winding of the R 1260 input pulse relay.

   At this time, said upper winding is energized with a polarity such that it operates, and the winding

  <Desc / Clms Page number 179>

 lower of said R 1260 relay is also energized with a polarity such that it attracts its armature, since the R 1860 relay is of the polarized type. As a result, the relay R
 EMI179.1
 La6o operated and closed, at contacts 126le, a circuit passing through contacts 1233 and ensuring the operation of the reptit1on relay R 1220. This closes when operating, at contacts 1221, a loop circuit connecting, through the intermediary of the junction 1270, the junction circuit 90 to the selector
 EMI179.2
 of arrival 1421.

   Said circuit is drawn as follows:, conductor a 1271 of junction 1370, contacts 1221, 11219 941, 952 and 1123rd left winding of response relay R 1160, contacts llz5t, 954th 94a and 118112 conductor C 1272 of junction 1270. When said loop circuit is fezàà) the left-hand winding of the response relay R 1160 is energized, but with a sense of polarity such that said relay does not operate.
 EMI179.3
 not at this time. In addition, the right winding is also excited, via a closed circuit, at the
 EMI179.4
 contacts 1233 of the occupancy relay E 1230 activated.

   At this time, the response relay R 1160 becomes of the fast pull type when its left winding is finally energized with such polarity as to operate, since it is of the magnetic shunt type. In addition, the relay
 EMI179.5
 repetition R 1220 closes, at the lagap contacts a drldent circuit for the excitation of the R 1210 bonding relay and opens, at the contacts 1224, the previously trace circuit for the excitation
 EMI179.6
 of the upper winding of the R 1260 input pulse relay.

   However, said relay does. not release its armature at this point, but it is led to release it extremely quickly when the negative potential is subsequently removed from the
 EMI179.7
 signaling conductor a!: "J05.

   By operating j) the sticking relay R 1210 closes "at contacts 1813, an obvious multiple holding circuit, which keeps actuating the stop relay.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 180>

 bonding R 1250 and opens, at contacts 1213, a termination circuit passing through contacts 937, resistor 907 and capacitor 906 in shunt on windings 911 and 912 of repeater 910., In addition, said relay R 1210 closes while operating , at contacts 1214, an obvious circuit for the series excitation of the upper and lower windings of the R 940 bypass relay.

   When the upper and lower windings of the latter relay are thus energized, said relay operates completely and opens, at contacts 941 and 942, the previously indicated circuits which respectively short-circuited the windings 913 and 914 of the repeater 910, which prepares the latter in view of the conversation. When the loop circuit traced above was closed between the junction circuit 90 and the arrival selector 1421 via the junction 1270, said arrival selector could be actuated by the application of a retransmitted digit. put to said selector via junction 1270, from junction circuit 90.



     The calling subscriber of the remote exchange D then proceeds to the dial formation of the first digit and to the transmission of the corresponding impulses on the trunk line 900. In this way, 1 $ of the switching equipment of said exchange operates and replaces on the line interurban 900 a potential of earth to the potential of bat-.

   rie and vice versa, these successive inversions taking place a number of times corresponding to the pulses of the figure A each of these inversions on the trunk line 900, and consequently on the simplex conductor 0 901 and on the signaling conductor C 905, the circuit d 'multiplied excitation of the winding of the input selection relay R 1240 and of the lower winding of the input pulse relay R 1260 is open * The application of a positive potential to the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 181>

 signal conductor C 905 on the other hand closes a fired short-circuiting wax of the winding of the input selection relay R 1240 and another excitation circuit of the lower winding of the pulse relay input R 1260 in reverse order.

   In this way, the latter relay becomes of the quick-release type. The input selection relay R 1240, on the contrary, becomes of the slightly delayed release type. By releasing its armature, said relay opens, at contacts 1241, one of the multiple circuits which kept the sticking relay B 1250 actuated. However, the latter relay is kept actuated by the other holding circuit closed for this purpose. . In addition, the R 1250 relay is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its armature, the input pulse relay R 1260 opens, at contacts 1261, the circuit previously drawn, which kept the repeater relay R 1220 actuated. This interrupts at contacts 1222, by releasing. in its turn its armature, the circuit previously indicated which maintained actuates the sticking relay R 1210 ,, However, this last relay does not recover immediately, since it is of the delayed release type. In addition, the repeater relay R 1220 again closes, at contacts 1224, the circuit previously drawn for the excitation of the upper winding of the input pulse relay R 1260,

     in such a way that the latter relay attracts its armature with extreme rapidity when a battery potential is subsequently returned to the signal conductor C 905. In addition, the repeater relay R 1220 closes at contacts 1223, a circuit passing through the contacts 1211 for energizing the digit relay R 1190, which closes, by operating, at contacts 1191, a branch circuit comprising resistor 1192 on conductors C 1271 and C 1272 of junction 1270, which facilitates transmission

  <Desc / Clms Page number 182>

 Pulses between junction circuit 90 and arrival selector 1421 through junction 1270.

   Finally, the repeater relay R 1220 interrupts, at contacts 1221, the loop circuit indicated above and connecting the junction circuit 90 to the arrival selector 1421.



   Then, when a battery potantiei is applied back to the signal conductor C 905, the multiple circuits previously trace for the energization of the enrollment of the input selection relay R 1240 and the lower winding of the relay R 1260 input pulses are non-closed, so that said R 1240 relay operates and closes, at contacts 1241, the circuit already indicated which kept the R 1250 sticking relay actuated. In addition, at this time , the lower winding of the R 1260 input pulse relay is energized, so that the latter relay attracts its armature with extreme rapidity and closes, at contacts 1361, the circuit previously drawn for energizing the relay repeater R 1220.

   When operating again, the repeater relay R 1220 closes, at contacts 1222, the circuit previously indicated, for maintaining the armature of the bonding relay R 1210 and interrupts, at contacts 1223, the circuit previously drawn which kept the switch actuated. number relay R 1190.

   However, the latter relay does not immediately release its armature, since it is of the delayed release type * In addition, the repeater relay R 1220 opens again, at contacts 1224, the circuit previously drawn for the energization of the upper winding of the R 1260 input pulse relay, so that the latter relays its armature extremely quickly when an earth potential is returned to the signal conductor C 905.

   Finally, the repeater relay R 1220 again closes, at contacts 1221, the indicated loop circuit, which connects the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 183>

 junction circuit 90 to the arrival selector 1421. From the above description, it will be understood that the input pulse relay R 1260 operates according to the pulses of the digit Interested, so that the repeater relay R 1220 repeats these pulses on the loop circuit which connects junction circuit 90 to arrival selector 1421.



  In addition, since the sticking relays R 1210 and R 1250 and the digit relay R 1190 are both of the delayed release type, these relays remain actuated during the transmission of the digit pulses. At the end of this transmission, a negative potential is returned to the signal conductor C 905, which keeps the input selection relay R 1240 and the input pulse relay R 1360 activated and, therefore, the repeater relay R 1220 and the sticking relays R 1210 and R 1250. In this way, the loop circuit which connects the junction circuit 90 to the arrival selector 1421 is kept closed.

   In addition, a short instant after the end of the transmission of the digit, the actuated R 1220 repeater relay causes the release of the armature of the R 1190 digit relay, since this last relay is of the delayed release type. its armature, the number relay R 1190 opens, at contacts 1191, the circuit provided previously on the conductors of junction 1370, circuit comprising resistor 1192, so that the left winding of the response relay R 1160 is included in the loop circuit previously plotted. Thus, the digit pulses received by the input pulse relay R 1260 in the junction circuit 90,

   are retransmitted by 1o repeater relay R 1220 on the loop circuit leading to the arrival selector 1421, which causes a corresponding operation of said selector.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 184>

 



   The call in question can be routed either to the trunk table 11 Y of the main exchange B, or to a called subscriber station belonging to said exchange. If it is assumed that said call must be routed requested to a subscriber station, such as the normal subscriber station TP, the arrival selector 1421 selects the group of first selectors, including in particular the first selector 501 X then, in this group, a first free selector.

   Assuming that the arrival selector 1421 precisely selects the first selector 501 X, the following digit, repeated by the junction circuit 90, causes the operation of said first selector, which in turn selects the group of second selectors comprising in particular the second selector 502 X then, in this group, a second free selector.

   Assuming that the first selector 501 X precisely selects the second selector 502 X, the next digit retransmitted by the circuit 90 causes the selection, by this second selector, of the group of individual connectors comprising in particular, the individual connector 525'X then, in this group, a free individual connector: Assuming finally that the second selector 502 X precisely selects the individual connector 525'X, the following two digits, retransmitted by the junction circuit 90 cause the selection by said individual connector of the line 407 X which leads to the requested normal subscriber station TP. The 525'X individual connector then proceeds to test that line, to determine if it is free or occupied in a conventional manner.



     Assuming then that the extension so tried is this busy time, the individual connector 525tX returns a busy tone current through the intermediate switches to the trunk 90. Said busy tone current is repeated by the switch. long distance line

  <Desc / Clms Page number 185>

 900 and by the switchgear of the remote exchange D to the calling subscriber belonging to said exchange. The calling subscriber of the remote exchange D causes the release of the associated switchgear ,, so that the trunk 90 of the switchgear of the main exchange B is itself released in a manner which will be described. later in a more detailed form.



   On the other hand, assuming that the individual connector 525'X has determined that the line 407 X which terminates at the normal subscriber station TP is free, it applies an inrush current to this line and returns a current of calling party warning tone of called party call, through intermediate exchanges)) to trunk 90 and thence through trunk 900 and remote exchange switchgear D to the calling party belonging to holding said exchange * When the called subscriber to the normal subscriber station TP belonging to the main exchange B =% lays the call,

   the individual connector 525'X establishes a communication between the station of the calling subscriber of the requested exchange D and the normal subscriber station / TP of the main exchange B, by reversing the polarity of the junction 1270, so that the left winding of: rethinking relay R 1160 of the junction circuit 90 is polarized in such a way that said relay operated. said relay closes, at contacts 1163, a holding circuit comprising resistor 1164:

   and passing through contacts 1153, circuit which keeps actuated the input selection relay R 1240 and a multiple circuit passing through contacts 1255 and 1252 and through resistor 1256 for energizing the lower winding of the pulse relay input R 1260, so that the latter relay is maintained in its working position.

   In addition, the response relay R 1160 opens, at contacts 1162, the connection between

  <Desc / Clms Page number 186>

 the winding of the input selection relay R 1240 and the signal conductor C 905, so as to interrupt, in the junction circuit 90, Inapplication of an earth resistance potential: In addition, the response relay R 1160 closes, at contacts 1161, a circuit passing through the contacts
1125 'and 1144 for the application of the battery, via the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170, to the signal conductor C 905.



   Substitution of a battery potential for an earth potential on the signaling conductor 0 905 and on the interurban line 900 causes the transmission of response monitoring signals to the automatic switchgear of the remote exchange D.



   At the end of the communication, when the subscriber called for at the normal station TP hangs up his receiver on the switch hook pràva for this purpose, the individual connector 525'X operates again by reversing the polarity of junction 1270 of so that the polarity of the left winding of response relay B 1160 becomes such that said relay releases its armatures.

   By releasing its armature, the response relay R 1160 opens, at contacts 1163, the circuit previously drawn which kept the input selection relay R 1240 and the input pulse relay actuated.
R 1260 and closes, at contacts 1162, the connection previously drawn between the input selection relay R 1240, the lower winding of the input pulse relay R 1260 and the signal conductor C 905. From this way, said relays remain actuated.

   In addition, the response relay R 1160 interrupts, at contacts 1161, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the battery, via the upper winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170, to the signal conductor C 905.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 187>

 



  Consequently, in the junction circuit 90, an earth potential is at this moment substituted for the battery potential on the signaling conductor C 905 and, consequently), on the simplex conductor C 901 and the trunk line 900, of so that the automatic switchgear of the remote exchange D receives end-of-conversation signals.



  When the calling subscriber of the remote exchange D then hangs up his receiver on the switching hook provided for this purpose, the automatic switchgear of the remote exchange D is released in a conventional manner, an earth potential being substituted for the battery potential. on the interurban line 900 and, consequently, on the simplex conductor C 901 and on the signaling conductor C 905, which releases the armature of the input selection relay R 1240 and that of the armature of the relay R 1260 input pulses in junction circuit 90.

   By releasing its armature, the input pulse relay R 1360 opens, at contacts 1261, the previously drawn circuit which kept the repeater relay R 1220 actuated, which by releasing its armature in turn interrupts, at contacts 1222, the previously indicated circuit which maintained actuated the middle school relay R 1210 and this in turn releases its armature a short time later, given that it is of the delayed release type * By releasing its armature, the bonding relay R 1210 opens, at contacts 1214, the circuit already traced which kept the bypass relay R 940 activated and interrupts, at contacts 1212,

   the multiple circuit previously drawn which maintained actuated the sticking relay R 1250. In this way, this last relay releases its armature a short instant later, Since it is of the delayed release type.

   By releasing its armature, the R 1250 bonding relay interrupts, at contacts 1251, the above circuit.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 188>

 duly indicated which maintained activates the occupancy relay
 EMI188.1
 R 1230 and opens on the other hand, at contacts 3.25i 1253y 1254 and 1255; the connections between the upper and lower windings of the R 1260 input impulse relay and the C 905 signaling conductor By releasing its sound, the occupancy relay R 1230 opens, at contacts 1232 the previously indicated circuit which applied the earth to the control conductor C 1285 from junction ¯1280 B and close again, at contacts 1231. the circuit previously drawn for the application
 EMI188.2
 battery by l. R 1130 local selection relay scrolling time:

   said control conductor C 1285;
 EMI188.3
 which means that the 1280 B junction is free for outgoing trunk selectors 513 X, etc. which have access to said
 EMI188.4
 junction. In addition, the occupancy relay R 1230 interrupts, at contacts 1235, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the earth to the control conductor C 1273 of the
 EMI188.5
 junction 1.370 which ends at the arrival selector 'lÀ8l, so that said selector, the first selector 501 X, the second selector 502 X and the individual connector 525'X are all
 EMI188.6
 released in an e1.ass1que manner.

   The individual connector 525tX then indicates that the 407 X line terminating at the requested normal subscriber station TP of the main exchange B is free: Dtother
 EMI188.7
 On the other hand, the o opation relay R 1230 interrupts, at contaats 1233j the circuit previously indicated for the excitation of the right-hand winding of the response relay R 1160 and again closes, at contacts 1234, the circuit previously drawn for Failure to apply the battery, via the R 1140 Occupancy relay winding, to control conductor 0 1273 of junction 1270, which indicates that the selec-
 EMI188.8
 1.421 corresponding start tor is free.

   In addition, the occupancy relay R 1230 opens, at contacts 1837, the circuit previously drawn for the nonapplication of earth to the conductor.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 189>

 C 1283 of the junction 1280 A and again closes, at contacts 1258, the circuit previously drawn for the battery inapplication, by means of the winding of the interurban selection relay R 1180, to said conductor of command C 1283, which indicates that the junction.



  1280 A is free to the third long distance selectors 1406, etc. which have access to said junction. At this time, the junction wax 90 is completely released and the trunk line 900 which connects the main exchange B to the remote exchange D becomes available for a new use.



   With regard to the routing of the call described above from the calling subscriber station of the remote exchange D to the normal called subscriber station TP of the main exchange B, the Incoming selector 1421, the first selector 501 X and the second selector 502 X can, either, be in the presence of a case of total occupation * In these conditions $$ that of said switches ,, which is in the presence of said case, opens the A loop circuit which terminates back to junction 90 via junction 1270, and applies a busy tone current to said junction 1270.

   Said current is re-transmitted by the junction circuit 90 and by the intermediary of the trunk line 900 to the calling subscriber station of the remote exchange D, which indicates to this subscriber the case of total occupation encountered L ' calling subscriber of the remote exchange D then proceeds to interrupt the communication, following the process explained above.



   As indicated previously,) when the call described above was initiated by the calling subscriber of the remote exchange D, then routed ,, via the trunk line 900 of the junction circuit 90 and the junction 1270, to arrival selector 1421 it can be transmitted.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 190>

      until. trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B. For this purpose, the digit transmitted to the arrival selector 1431 causes the selection of the group of direct traffic junction circuits including in particular the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y then, in this group , selection of a free direct traffic junction circuit.

   Assuming that the arrival selector 1421 precisely selects the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y, this acts on the common start circuit 12 Y, which in turn acts on the traffic distributor at the positions of. operator 13 Y. More precisely, the traffic distributor 13 Y charges 1! one of the operator positions of the trunk switchboard 11 Y and, for example, the operator position number 1, to answer said call ;. Consequently, the common start circuit 12 Y and the traffic distributor 13 Y at this time control the position circuit 18 Y of the operator position number 1.



   The operation of the call switch of one of the associated junctions is then triggered, said junction having been previously chosen by the junction distributor 19 Y.



   Assuming that the junction 19 Y has previously selected junction 15Y, the call switch 16 Y of said junction 15 Y searches for the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y, the position of said circuit being indicated on the switch. 16 Y call by common starting circuit
12 Y and by the junction circuit 23 Y itself. Consequently, the direct traffic circuit 23 Y is, at this moment, connected, through the response switch 16 Y of the junction.
15 Yt to circuit 18 Y from position number 1 of inter-urban board 11 Y.



   When the call is thus routed to the operator position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y, the direct traffic trunk 23 Y causes a reversal.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 191>

 polarity on the intermediate switches and on junction 1270, which activates the response relay R 1160
 EMI191.1
 in junction circuit 90, While operating, the response relay R 1160 closes the connection previously drawn between
 EMI191.2
 The upper coil of the end of conversation relay R 1170, and the signaling conductor C 905, so that the battery potential of the junction circuit 90 is applied to the signaling conductor C 905 and consequently
 EMI191.3
 at the aondùateÙn simplex C 901 and at the interurban line 900),

   so as to ensure the transmission of response monitoring signals to the automatic switchgear of the remote exchange D. At this time, a communication is established between a calling subscriber station of the remote exchange D and the
 EMI191.4
 topographical position number 1 of the interurban table 11 Y.



  When informed of the destination of the call, the attendant in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y activates the set of keys 22 Y, so as to activate
 EMI191.5
 the control circuit 20 Y? the transmitter of 1mpmlsiona al AY and the digit recorders al BYp controlled by said circuit., At this moment, the ohiffrea are recorded in the recorders.

   The pulse generator then controls the operation of the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y and that of the following switches of the outgoing long-distance series, which ensures the completion of 1 page: 1, the ' following the process outlined above After the call is transmitted by the operator from position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y, the control circuit 20 Y and the pulse transceiver 21 Y controlled by this circuit are automatically released, junction 15 Y is then disconnected from position circuit 18 Y.



     The calling subscriber of the remote exchange D can
 EMI191.6
 transmit end of conversation annveillsnae signals

  <Desc / Clms Page number 192>

 to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y of the main exchange B by manipulating her switching hook.

   For example, when the calling subscriber of the remote exchange D hangs up his receiver on the switching hook, the switching apparatus of the remote exchange D is released in a conventional manner, which causes the release of the junction circuit 90 and of the selector d. arrival 1421, the whole following the process explained previously: When the arrival selector 1421 is thus released the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y causes the lighting of the monitoring lamp 2603 T in the junction 15 Y which indicates to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y that the calling subscriber has hung up.



  * Said operator then proceeds to release the switch. call 16 Y from junction 15 Y, so that the junction circuit of direct traffic. 23 Y is indicated as being free at the switching devices of the main exchange: 13 which have access to said circuits
CALL FROM A SUBSCRIBER STATION BELONGING TO THE CENTRAL
MAIN B AND INTENDED FOR THE INTER-URBAN PANEL DUDIT CENTRAL.



   When a call is initiated by a subscriber of the main exchange B, a free primary selector is automatically associated with the line which terminates at the calling subscriber station.



  For example, when a call is initiated by the subscriber of the normal station TP by picking up the receiver from the switch hook, a branch circuit is closed between the conductors of line 407 X which terminates at said station, which causes operation. of the 423 X pre-selector belonging individually to said line. The preselection a 423 X seeks a junction leading to a free primary selector of the group comprising in particular the primary selector 600 X: Assuming that the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 193>

 preselector 423 X precisely selects the 462 X junction which leads to the primary selector 600 X, the associated researcher F 610 X searches for a free primary recorder such as for example the primary recorder 1200 X.

   When the primary recorder 1200 X is connected by the finder F 610 X to the primary selector 600 X, a loop circuit passing through the junction 462 X, the preselector 423 X and the line 407 X which ends at the subscriber station normal calling party TP is closed, The primary register 1200 X then sends back a dialing start tone current to said loop circuit, which indicates to the calling subscriber who owns the normal station TP that he can start dialing the number call requested on its dial.

   To transmit the call coming from the normal calling subscriber station TP to the trunk panel 11 Y, this subscriber first of all dials a single digit 0. The primary selector 600 X is then actuated according to said digit and selects the number. group of direct traffic circuits including in particular circuit 23 Y. The digit 0 is then recorded in the first call sign recording device of the primary recorder 1200 X. At the end of the transmission of the first digit 0, the 1200 X primary register interrupts the application of dial tone current to the loop circuit terminating at the calling normal subscriber station TP.

   The recording of the digit 0 in the first registration device of the primary logger 1200 X callsign further indicates that a logger-to @ dueturn is not required for the current call and that , in addition, the 1200 X primary recorder can be released, since the call must be routed to the 11 Y trunk board. As a result, the 1200 X primary recorder is released and the 600 X primary switch. automatically searches for a direct traffic trunk

  <Desc / Clms Page number 194>

 free in the group including in particular circuit 23 Y.



  Assuming that the primary selector 600 X precisely selects the direct traffic circuit 23 Y, this circuit acts on the common starting circuit 12 Y, which in turn acts on the traffic distributor at the operator positions 13 Y. More precisely, said traffic distributor 13 Y designates, in order to answer the call in progress, one of the operator positions of the trunk board 11 Y such as for example the operator position number 1 shown. Consequently, the common start circuit 12 Y and the traffic distributor 13 Y at this time both control the circuit 18 Y of the operator position number 1, which triggers the operation of the response switch of the operator. one of the associated junctions previously selected by the 19 Y junction distributor.

   Assuming that the junction distributor 19 Y has designated junction 15 Y, the answer switch 16 Y, of this junction 15 Y searches for the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y, the position of said circuit being indicated on the answer switch 16 Y by the common starting circuit 12. Y and by the circuit 23 Y itself. Consequently, the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y is connected, at this time, through the answer switch of junction 15 Y to circuit 18 Y of the operator position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y .



   When the call is thus routed to the operator position number 1 of the trunk table 11 Y, a telephone call is established between the normal calling subscriber station TP and said operator position * When informed of the destination of the call, the operator of said position activates the set of keys 22 Y, which activates the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter 21AY, said transmitter itself and the recorders.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 195>

 of digits 21 BY, so that the digits' are saved in these latter devices,

     The pulse transmitter 21 AY then controls the operation of the call switch 17 Y of the junction 15 Y and, consequently, the switches of the starting series, which ensures the routing of the call, the whole. following the process outlined above.

   When the call is thus routed by Empress from position number 1 of the trunk board 11 Y, the control circuit 20 Y of the pulse transmitter and the pulse recorder-transmitter 21 AY are automatically released, after which junction 15 Y is disconnected from position circuit 18 Y ,,
The subscriber who owns the normal calling station TP can transmit end of conversation supervision signals to the operator in position number 1 of the trunk switchboard 11 Y by manipulating his switching hook.



  For example, when said calling subscriber hangs up, the primary selector 600 X is released, which causes the activation of the direct traffic junction circuit 23 Y and, consequently, the lighting of the monitoring lamp 2603 Y. in junction 15 Y. The operator in position number 1 of the table, interurban 11 Y is thus informed that the calling subscriber has to hang up Said operator then proceeds to release the call switch 16 Y of junction 15 Y, so that the direct traffic trunk 23 Y is then indicated as being free to switching devices which have access to said circuit.



   When routing the call described above from the calling normal subscriber station TP to. trunk switchboard 11 Y, the primary selector 600 X may be in the presence of a full busy event. It then operates in such a way that it sends a busy tone current back to the loop circuit leading to the post

  <Desc / Clms Page number 196>

 requesting normal subscriber TP, indicating to said subscriber
 EMI196.1
 this case of total occupancy. Llabonnd then proceeds to release the primary selector 600 X by hanging up # as explained previously.



  Diaprés .rexpliaatian previous of the operating mode of the primary selector 600 X and the primary controller 1200 X with a view to the routing of a call between the normal subscriber station calling TP and / the trunk table 11 Y, it will be understood that the devices are operated with
 EMI196.2
 substantially identical way when he is routing to trunk switchboard 11 Y a call coming from any of the stations dtabonn4, callers T7., TS2, Ta, 3 and TS4 forming a shared line:

   Similarly, the primary selector 441 X and the primary recorder 1200 X are actuated in a substantially identical manner when it comes to
 EMI196.3
 End of a call coming from the calling subscriber station with authorized long distance service TX or from the calling subscriber station with forbidden long distance service TD up to the long distance table 11 Y.
 EMI196.4
 



  LOCAL CALL & flR% DWX B0S23S OF OBOHNXS. OWNING - L tûN "AND h tg.û AT THE CENTRAL PFtTNCIPdL B.



   Assuming that 1 callback from the calling subscriber possessing the ordinary set. TP and routed by the primary selector 600 X to 1 + register primary 1200 X must be transmitted to the authorized interurban service subscriber station TX 'of the main exchange B, the calling subscriber dials the number of call from the requested subscriber station TX. Said number comprises an area code comprising the digits 8, 4 and 4 which identify the main exchange B called and a numerical part comprising the digits 0, 9, 0

  <Desc / Clms Page number 197>

 and the which identifies the branch pin of the 401 X line leading to said station.

   Thus, the telephone number of the TX authorized long distance subscriber station is, ultimately: 844-0901 *
Consequently, the calling subscriber forms on his dial the first, second and third digits of the indicator, namely: 8, 4 and 4. The first of these digits; 8, produces a corresponding operation of the 600 X primary selector which selects a corresponding trunk group and this first digit is further recorded by the first call sign recording apparatus in the 1200 X primary recorder, after which the recorder primary 1200 X interrupts Inapplication of dial-start tone current to the loop circuit that terminates at the calling normal subscriber station TP.

   The recording of the first digit; 8 in this device of the 1200 X primary recorder does not indicate that a 1700 X recorder-translator etc ... is necessary, so that no selection of such a recorder is made at this time. Said record also does not indicate that the primary recorder 1200X is no longer needed, so that said recorder is kept connected to the primary selector 600X.

   On the other hand, said recording indicates that the group of junctions selected by the primary selector 600 X is not suitable and consequently)) the primary recorder 1200 X causes at this moment the release of said primary selector 600 X In addition, the primary recorder 1200 X prepares to submit the pulses of the second digit of the code 4 to a test; to determine whether the calling subscriber station belongs to a shared line and, if so, to determine its position on said shared line.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 198>

 



   The second number of Vindicator, 4, is recorded. in the corresponding apparatus of 1 ', primary recorder 1200 X and, during reception of said digit, this primary recorder prevents the operation of the primary selector 600 X.



   Furthermore, during said reception, the primary recorder
1200 X 'determines whether the calling subscriber station is connected to a shared line, which is not the case for the line
407X which terminates at the calling normal subscriber station TP.



   The recording of the second digit of the code 4 in the corresponding device, in combination with the recording of the first digit 8 of this code in the corresponding device of the primary selector 1200 X, does not indicate that A 1700 X recorder-translator, etc ...: is necessary, so that no selection of such a recorder-translator is made at this time. Said recordings also do not indicate that the primary 1200X recorder is no longer required, so that said recorder is kept connected to the 600X primary selector.



   The third digit 4 of the code is recorded in the corresponding device of the primary recorder 1200 X and produces a corresponding operation of the primary selector 600 X, which selects the group of first selectors including in particular the first selector 501 X.



   The records of the first, second and third code digits, namely 8, 4 and 4 in the respective devices of the primary recorder 1200 X, indicate that no recorder-translator such as 1700 X, etc:.: is required for the routing of the call under consideration and the primary register 1200 X is no longer required, so that it can be released Primary selector 600 X selects a first selector free in the previously selected group.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 199>

 



   Assuming that the primary selector 600 X precisely selects the first selector 501 X, when the subscriber of the calling normal set dials the first digit 0 of the digital part of the call number, this first selector 501 X selects the group second selectors comprising in particular the second selector 502 X, then in this group a second free selector. Assuming that the first selector 501 X precisely selects the second selector 502 X when the subscriber of the calling normal set
TP forms on its dial the second number 9 of the numeric part, the second selector 502 X selects the group of individual connectors, comprising in particular the individual connector 525 X, then in this group a free individual connector.

   Assuming that the second selector 502 X precisely selects the individual connector 525 X when the subscriber of the normal set asks for TP forms on his dial the third and fourth digits of the numerical part of the call number, namely 0 and 1 , the individual connector 525 X selects the 401 X line which terminates at the subscriber station requested at service
Long distance authorized TX and proceeds immediately to.

   test of the state of this line (free or busy). Assuming this test indicates that the 401 X line is free, the individual 525 X connector applies inrush current to this line,
When the subscriber requests an authorized long distance telephone
TX responds to 3. ' call., the individual connector 525 x ceases the application of the inrush current on the line 401 X which terminates at said station, and establishes an obvious telephone communication between the normal subscriber station calling TP and the station of a- subscriber requested to authorized long distance TX service.



   When the calling subscriber of the TP set @ coo interrupts the communication by hanging up, the primary selector 600 X, the first selector 501 X, the second selector

  <Desc / Clms Page number 200>

   50a X, and the individual connector 525 X are released in a per se conventional manner * When the individual connector
525 X is released line 501 X terminating at the called subscriber station with authorized long distance service TX is indicated as free to switching devices which have access to this line, assuming that the called subscriber has himself hung up his receiver .



   With regard to the routing of the call described above between the calling normal subscriber station TP and the called subscriber station with authorized long distance service
TX, it will be noted that the primary selector 600 X, the first selector 501 X and the second selector 502 X can be either in the presence of a case of total occupation * and that the individual connector 525 X can find the line
401 X terminating at the subscriber station TX busy. In this case, the one of the switches which is in the presence of the case of total occupation or of the case of occupation of the 401 X line causes the non-application of a busy tone current returned by the communication to the normal subscriber station. applicant
TP.

   The subscriber of this station then proceeds to release the devices actuated in the manner described above.



     Following the foregoing explanation of the mode of operation of the primary selector 600 X and the primary recorder 1200 X for routing a call between the calling normal subscriber station TP and the subscriber station called at authorized TX-long distance service, it will be understood that the devices are operated in a substantially identical manner when it comes to the routing of a call originating from the normal subscriber station TP and intended for the subscriber station for long distance service prohibited TD or to any of the subscriber stations TS1, TS2, TS3 and TS4 forming a shared line or even when it concerns the routing of a call originating from one any of the subscriber stations TS1, TS2,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 201>

 TS3 and TS4,

   forming a shared line and intended for the normal subscriber station TP, the authorized toll subscriber station TX or the toll toll subscriber station TD. It will also be understood that the primary selector 441 X and the primary register 1200 X are operated in a substantially identical manner in the case of a call originating from the authorized long distance subscriber station TX and intended for the user. normal subscriber station TP, at the subscriber station with forbidden long distance service TD or at any of the subscriber stations TS1. TS2.

   TS3 and TS4 connected in common to a shared line, or even from a call originating from the TD forbidden long distance subscriber station and intended for the normal subscriber station TP, the authorized long distance subscriber station TX or to any one of the subscriber stations TS1, TS2, TS3 and TS4 connected in common to a shared line

  <Desc / Clms Page number 202>

 
 EMI202.1
 CALL i% 0i2NàhT DUM NORMAL SUBSCRIBER STATION A'9.'ARTtAN'1 'AT CSA2R, ÂI.

   PRINOIPAG B W D2STI $ J $ AT 17TH STATION DtAB0gɵ ry FROM CENTRAL 3ÀôlÔfi D, -By noting that the call routed from the normal subscriber station calling TP of main exchange B to the primary selector 600 X and from there to. the primary register 1200 X must be transmitted to a called subscriber station belonging to the remote exchange D, the calling subscriber of the TP station dials the call number of the called subscriber station.

   This call number comprises an identifier comprising the digits 2, 7 and 9 which identify the remote exchange called D and a numerical part comprising
 EMI202.2
 four chlftreào such as for example the digits 1 2e 3 and 4 qexi identify the connection pin of the line leading to the requested subscriber station.
 EMI202.3
 



  As a result, the requesting subscriber forms the 'first' on his dial. second and third digits of the statement, namely t 2, 7 and 9, The first digit 2 is then recorded
 EMI202.4
 in the corresponding device of the 1200 X primary recorder and the 600 X primary selector operates in a manner corresponding to the pulses of digit 2. The recording
 EMI202.5
 of said number 8 in the corresponding device of the 1800 X primary recorder, indicates that the call number code must be canceled. Consequently, the primary recorder 1200-X is then put in a position to trigger the operation of the dtenrogintreura-translateurs distributor 1600 14 then the primary selector 600 X is released.

   The second digit of Code 7 is then recorded in the corresponding apparatus of the primary recorder 1200, X, but the primary selector 600 X is not actuated by said second digit.



  At the end of the transmission of the second digit of the code 7, the 1200 X primary recorder triggers the operation.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 203>

 of the distributor of recorder-translators 1600 X. It follows that a free recorder-translator of the group comprising in particular the recorder-translator 1700 X is selected by the researcher F 1610 X associated with the distributor of recorder-translators 1600 X.

   Assuming that said finder F 1610 X precisely selects the recorder-translator 1700 X, the finder F 2290 X, associated with this recorder-translator searches for the primary recorder 1200 X, so. that the 1700 X recorder-translator is connected to said 1200 X primary recorder. When the calling subscriber of the normal telephone set TP forms on his dial the first digit of the digital part of the call number, namely digit 1, the latter ci is recorded in the corresponding device of the 1800 X primary recorder.

   Then, when the calling subscriber of the normal set 'TP forms on his dial the second, third and fourth digits of the digital part of the call number, namely digits 2, 3 and 4, these are received by the primary recorder 1300 X, then retransmitted directly from said primary recorder to the 1700 X recorder-translator connected to it, The primary 1200 X recorder also transmits the additional digits of the first, second and third digits of the call sign (2.



  7 and 9) and the first digit of the digital part (1) which he previously recorded, to the 1700 X recorder-translator. In this way, the seven digits of the call number are recorded in the recorder. translator 1700 X, More precisely, the complementary digits of the first), second and third digits of the callsign (2, 7 and 9) and of the first digit of the numerical part 1 on the one hand and of the second third and fourth digits of the digital part (2, 3 and 4) on the other hand are at this moment respectively recorded in the first, second and third call sign recording devices of the translation recorder for 1700 X on the one hand and in the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 204>

 first, second,

   third and fourth recording devices
 EMI204.1
 of digital part indit recorder-translator on the other hand.



  In addition, the composite code switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator is activated according to the digits complementary to the first, second and third digits of
 EMI204.2
 the code (2,? and 9). In the 1700 X recorder-translator, the setting of said dialing code switch causes a corresponding setting of the routing and charging switch, so that in the latter switch a series of routing digits to be transmitted is set. .



  By way of example, it can be assumed that said series comprises the digits 3, 2 and 2.
 EMI204.3
 this moment, the recorder-tradnoteur 1700 X is working and transmitting, through the searcher
 EMI204.4
 F 2290 rt of the primary eoreglatreur 1800 7C and of the finder F 610 X, the first routing digit of the Indicated series, ë. namely the number 3 * at the primary selector 600 X.



  - Specifically, the B 1710 X digit pulse start relay is actuated, which triggers the operation of the R 1840 X digit pulse relay and closes, aax contacta 1716 X, a connection passing through the winding of the pulse emission stop relay R 1510 and by contacts 1843 X and adjacent to the line conductor C 1283 X, When said connection is completed, the stop relay
 EMI204.5
 emission of pulses R 1510 operates and interrupts, at contacts 1511, an obvious connection between the rest contact and the other contacts of the bank traversed by the brush
2831 X of switch S 2830 X of the pulse generator.



   At this moment, the R 1840 1- digit pulse relay intermittently attracts and releases its armature, interrupting, at contacts 1843 X, the connection leading to the conductor.
C 1283 X. In this way, the transmission stop relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 205>

   pulse R 1510 and the selector line relay
 EMI205.1
 primary 600 X foactionceqt according to the digit pulses being transmitted According to the pins, the switch brooms S 2830 of the pulse transmitter advance step by step in the counterclockwise direction when moving away their respective resting positions,

   
 EMI205.2
 according to the pulses of the digit tranaro1so In the example chosen after the transmission of the three pulses forming the first routing digit 3 of the series indicated, the brush 2854 X of the switch S 2830 X meets one of the contacts of the bank traversed by said contact brush to which is applied an earth potential coming from the routing and metering switch, so that a circuit is closed for the energization of the stop relay of digits R 1910 X When operating, the relay d 'stop numbers R 1910 X closes, at contacts 1912 X, a circuit which maintains
 EMI205.3
 its own armature in its working position where it passes through contacts 1717 X.

   the driver 0 8369 X, the broom
 EMI205.4
 2631 X of the switch S 1830 X and the contact of the pnr bench which the said brush is located., In addition, the stop relay of oh1: t "fres R 1910 1 closes, at contacts 1913; t a point common to contacts 1843 X dg digit pulse relay R 1840 X in the data previously established with the doctor 0 1283 4 In this way, the pulse emission stop relay R 1510 of the recorder-translator 1700 X and the line relays of the primary selector 600 X are kept actuated, despite any bad operation of the digit pulse relay R 1840 X When the relay
 EMI205.5
 a..1 digits pulses R 18M X oontînue-4 fonotioncer, the brushes of the switch S 8830 X-contînaent 4 not move, until they return to their rest position.

   Brush 2831 X of switch S 2850 X returns to the contact of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 206>

 rest of the contact bench traversed by this brush. which interrupts the circuit previously drawn, which kept activating the digit stop relay R 1910 X, assuming
 EMI206.1
 that the pulse emission 4start relay R 1510 is at this time in its working position.

   This completes the
 EMI206.2
 operating cycle said switch S 2830 X and of the register-te4duoteur 1700 X, with regard to the transmission of the first routing digit 3 of the series indicated "Tt tw .. .. ,, .. -. up to the primary motor 600 X, With regard to the operation of the switch S 2830 X it should be noted
 EMI206.3
 that the brushes at the switch are first stepped counterclockwise,
 EMI206.4
 coming out of their rest position at a relatively low speed, which ensures the transmission of the impulses of the digit concerned to the line relay, of the primary selector 600 X,
 EMI206.5
 at a suitable pulse rate.

   After the operation of the R 1910 Xi digit switch, the brushes of the S 8830 X switch are driven at a relatively high speed until they are on the thirteenth contacts of the corresponding banks, then at a relatively low speed until that they arrive on the eighteenth contacta of these banks, which determines a suitable time interval between the transmission of successive digits
 EMI206.6
 by the register U1-ttaucer 1700 Xyz, The brushes of the switch S 2830 X are driven at a relatively high speed
 EMI206.7
 after having reached the dii-htiittémes contacts of the corresponding benches, Until they have returned to their rest position.

   this moment, 1 recorder-translator
1700 X is able to transmit the second forward digit 2 of the series mentioned to the primary selector 600 X,
The 600 X primary selector, receiving the first
 EMI206.8
 routing number 3 of the series indiqaea, select the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 207>

 group of functions comprising in particular the 780 X junction which leads to the group of plug-in repeaters comprising in particular the plug-in repeater
 EMI207.1
 800 Xe then seleote lady this group a free junction.

   Assuming that the 600X primary alector precisely selects the 780X jonotion that ends up in the 800X plugging repeater, a hole is closed for excitation in
 EMI207.2
 series of the stop relay winding at pulse output R 1510 of the recorder-translator 1700 X and of the lower winding of the pulse relay R 960 X of the plugging repeater 800 X.

   Said series circuit is drawn as follows: earth, winding of R 1510 ,. contacts
 EMI207.3
 1718 X and 1843 Zt conductor 0 1883 X and battery, lower winding of -â 960 I, contacts 1331, one of the windings of the repeater 900, conductor 788 I, the conductors C the 83 X and 782 X being connected one to the other by the intermediary devices.

   When this series cironit is closed, the stop relay pulse remission R 1510 of the recorder "translator 1700 X and the 1 pulse relay R 960 X of the repeater detabliasemeat of 800 X plugs attract the un¯and l 'other their reinforcement.' Its funotlonnants, the remaking of the R 960 X impula1ons causes the operation of the R 840 Zt bonding relay which ensures the non-application of the earth to the.

   o control conductor C 783 X to cause a corresponding operation of the primary selector 600 X Feather the
 EMI207.4
 bonding R B40 X closes, at contacts 8e6, an obvious effect for the Inapplication of the earth to the control conductor of Junction 907 X which ends at the outgoing interurban selector 513 Xe in order to ensure the actuation of the selector plate which appaxt1ent individually to the repeater ready to establish:

  plugs 800 7, On the other hand, the pulse relay R 960 X closes, at contacts 961 Z. a bypass output of 1m- pulses passing through contacts 959 2t, and 1 "in addition

  <Desc / Clms Page number 208>

 of the left-hand dial termination relay R 1330 between the conductors of junction 907 X. In this way, the outgoing trunk selector 513 X is made sensitive to the repetition of a digit by the setting repeater 800 X on junction 907 X.

   ¯
At this time, the 1700 X recorder-translator is operating to transmit the second routing digit 2 of the series chosen as an example. In this way, the pulse output stop relay R 1510 of the recorder-translator 1700 X and the pulse relay R 960 X of the plugging repeater 800 X operate according to the pulses of the second digit. routing 2 of said series. At the first.

   release of the armature of the pulse relay R 960 X, this relay forms, at contacts 963 X, a circuit passing through contacts 845 of the actuated bonding relay R 840 X, this circuit ensuring the energization of the control relay R 1310. Each time the R 960 X pulse relay is released and then attracts its armature again, it closes then opens, at contacts 963 X, the circuit indicated above for maintaining the armature of the R 1310 control relay. In this way, this relay is kept activated during the transmission of the digit, since it is of the delayed release type.

   While operating, the control relay R 1310 closes, at contacts 1311, an obvious circuit to bypass the left winding of the response relay R 1320, which reduces the impedance of the pulse bypass circuit which terminates via junction 907 X at the originating trunk selector 513 X.

   In addition, each time the R 960 X Pulse relay releases and then attracts its armature again, it interrupts and then closes, at contacts 961 X. the pulse derivation which ends,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 209>

 via function 907 X ,, to the control selector
 EMI209.1
 departure 513 Zt so that the digit pulses being transferred are repeated by the pulse relay R 960 X from the flohen establishment repeater SOO X to the outgoing trunk selector 513 X, therefore) this selector, receiving the ceooncl routing number 2 of the indicated series,

   removes the group of junction oom- including in particular the junction 1280 B which ends in a group of junction circuits comprising in particular the junction circuit 90, then selects from said group of junctions a free junction. At the end of the transmission of the second
 EMI209.2
 routing digit 2 of said series, the dftm- pulse relay R 960 X of the plugging repeater 800 X and the pulse emission stop relay R 1510 from
 EMI209.3
 1'ew% istTeur-toeadaoteur 1700 X are, kept actuated.



  A short time later, the R 1310 control relay
 EMI209.4
 reliohe its armature, given that this relala is of the delayed release type, which opens, at contacts 1311,
 EMI209.5
 the circuit previously indicated for shorting the left winding of the R 1380 call error relay.



  Assuming the outgoing trunk selector 513 X selects junction 1280 B which terminates at trunk 90, outgoing selector 513 X applies
 EMI209.6
 ground to the control conductor -0 1885 of junction 1280 B, which terminates a circuit passing through contacts 1231, 1181 and 1141 for energizing the selection relay
 EMI209.7
 local R 1130 in junction circuit 90, operating, this last relay opens, contacts 11059 the circuit previously tr & o $ qo.1 app11qua1 the battery, through the intermediary of 1 "coil # .eJl1it of the interurban selection relay R 1180, to the control conductor 0 1283 of the izec A jonotion and close;

  , to contacts 113e, pu oîroult passing through

  <Desc / Clms Page number 210>

 
 EMI210.1
 Contacted them 1838 for the non-application of the earth to the control conductor 0 1283, which indicates to the third party long-distance networks 1408 which have access to the junction 1280 A that this junction is oecupéek In addition, the local selection relay R 1130 close to ontèea1133 * an obvious circuit for itexoiiation in fbip of the upper and lower windings of the relata of ahuntage R 940 so that the latter relates completely and interrupts, at contacts 941 and 948 * the circuits previously indicated to short-circuit the windings 913 and 914 of the repeater 910, In addition, the local selection relay R 1130 closes, will contact -1132 @ an obvious circuit for the switching off of the switching relay R 1120e Un operating, the latter relay closes;

   to contacta 11231 ', a circle previously drawn for the excitation of the delay relay R 9209 of spells that the latter
 EMI210.2
 relay causes the end of relay to operate.
 EMI210.3
 conversation R 935j all following the process described above. From p1aS ± the switching relay R il.80 closes, to the contacta li88 1124, 1186 and 1122ee in a loop circuit between the line relay R 1080t the differential relay R 1090 in the Junction circuit 90 and the switch off relay numbering R 1300 of the plug-in repeater 800 4 This circuit
 EMI210.4
 loop is plotted as follows:

   earth, top winding
 EMI210.5
 of R 1080 lower winding of R 1090 contacts 1114e 1126 and 954, winding 914 of repeater 9109, contacts 1188, conductor 0 1883 of junction 1880 B and battery, rear winding of R 1080 * contacta $ 56 upper winding of R logot contacts 1212 * 1124 and 052j winding 913 of the repeater 910x contacts 1138.

   -conductor 0 1281 of junction 1880 B ,, The conductors' 0 1381 and C la82 of jènotion 1880 B are
 EMI210.6
 connected by intermediate switches, to the conductor of
 EMI210.7
 junction 907 1 on which ltenroulemert is mounted as a bypass

  <Desc / Clms Page number 211>

 of the dial stop relay R 1320 of the plugging repeater, 800 X, When this series loop is closed, the line relay R 1080 attracts its armature, but the relay R 1090 does not attract the his, given
 EMI211.1
 qutll is of the differential type. In addition, the R 1380 numbering stop relay has a sense of polarity such that it does not work, since it is of the magnetic shunt type.
 EMI211.2
 tick.

   In foaotioonaott. the line relay R 1080 causes the isolation of the sticking relay R 1050 and closes, at contacts 1083) the connection previously drawn between the winding 1nr1eur of the end of oonvernatlon relay R 1170 and the signaling conductor C 905. De ' in this way, the battery is applied through the inside winding of the end of conversation relay R 1170 to the signaling conductor 0 905 and, consequently, to the simplex conductor C 901 and to the trunk line 900 which terminates.
 EMI211.3
 at the remote central D.

   This application of the batterlet via the lower winding of the end of conversation relay R] 170 to the signaling conductor 0 905 pe does not cause the said end of conversation relay R 1170 to be energized, given that that oelui-oi is of the marginal type, but it causes the activation of the junction cirouit of the remote central D and the association of the switchgear of
 EMI211.4
 Automatic switching of said exchange to the interurban line 900. This operation may take some time.



   A short time after the relay has operated
 EMI211.5
 switching switch R 1180 and, by oooaéqmect, of the line relay R 1080 and the delay relay R 920. the end of conversation relay R 935 operates in its turn since it is of the delayed attraction type. While operating, the end of conversation relay R 935 closes, at contacts 936. a circuit
 EMI211.6
 passing through the,% contacts 1131 for Ivezoltatîou of the relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 212>

 current reversal R 1110.

   When operating, the current reversal relay R 1110 reverses, at contacts 1111,
 EMI212.1
 11121, 1113 and 111410 the polarity of jonotion 1280 B with respect to the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 1080, so that the latter relay is maintained in its working position. The R 1090 differential relay cannot operate and the R 1320 dial stop relay of the plugging repeater 800 X a, at the
 EMI212.2
 contrary., its laws arranged in such a way that it works.

   When operating, the numbering stop relay R 1320 opens, in contact with 1321, a normally closed circuit
 EMI212.3
 to coort-orouiter resistor 1322, so that said resistor 1322 is inserted in the series circuit
 EMI212.4
 previously drawn between 13 "lower winding of the R 960 X pulse relay of the plugging repeater
 EMI212.5
 800 X and the pulse emission stop relay R 1510 di'14englotreur'tradtioteur 1700 When resistor 1322 is thus inserted in oac, ro3t in series, the pulse relay R 960 X of the 800 X plugs is kept in its working position,

   this also keeps the line relay R 1080 in the junction circuit 90 in the same position. On the other hand, the relay
 EMI212.6
 citarrtt resignation of pulses R 15io of Itenregisteeur-tradticàj-. teor 1700 X relaxes its frame, since it is of the marginal type.

   By releasing its armature, the R 1510 relay
 EMI212.7
 ;;,, .. closes, at contacts 1511, the circuit previously indicated between the rest contact and the other contacts of the bano traversed by the brush 2831 X of the switch S 2830 X of the pulse transmitter, which closes a continuous holding circuit for the R 1910 X digit stop relay, which maintains said relay in its working position,
 EMI212.8
 In consequence, at this moment, that is to say at the end of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 213>

 
 EMI213.1
 transmission by the 1700 X recorder-translator of the second digit 2 of the series chosen as an example,

   the relay due to the figures R 1910 X àēl'en> e6istrenr-traàuo- tour 1700 X is in its working position and is kept in this position despite the fact that the brushes of the oommu-
 EMI213.2
 S Z830 X continue to move to their rest position.In addition, the actuated R 1910 X digit stop relay maintains firm, at contacts 1913 X, the circuit
 EMI213.3
 previously indicated common to contacts 1843 X dn digit pulse relay R 1840 X in the connection between the winding of the pulse emission stop relay R 1510
 EMI213.4
 and the conductor 0 1283 X which terminates at the lower winding of the pulse relay R 960 X in the plug-in repeater 800 X,

   In this way ;, no other digit can be transmitted at this time except the recorder-
 EMI213.5
 translator 1700 X, up to the repeater of establishment of files 800 X. It will thus be understood that the junction circuit 90 ensured the return of a delayed transmission signal to the repeater establishment of files 800 X and that said signal
 EMI213.6
 was retransmitted by said repeater the esregis'treM'-tr & dnctenr 1700 X at the time considered.

   
 EMI213.7
 When the remote exchange switchgear D is connected to the trunk line 900 and is able to receive a digit, a low resistance positive potential is applied to the trunk line 900 and, therefore, to the distplex conductor. 0 901 and to the signaling conductor C 905 which is connected to it, which causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 1170 in the jonotion 90 circuit.

   the end of conversation relay R 1170 causes the excitation of the end relay
 EMI213.8
 of auxiliary conversation R 1150e which by functioning itself causes the exc1 tatiOtl of the command relay R 1020p which ensures

  <Desc / Clms Page number 214>

 in turn by operating the release of the armature of the delay relay R 920 a short time later. By releasing the armature, the delay relay R 920 causes the release of that of the end of conversation relay R 935, all following the process described previously.

   By releasing its armature, the end of conversation relay R 935
 EMI214.1
 terminates, at contacts 936s the pre-traoé circuit which now activates the current reversal revisor R 1110, which by releasing its reverse armature, at contacts 1111,
 EMI214.2
 iiiae 1113 and Illtt the polarity of jonotion 1280 B with respect to the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 1080 in the junction circuit 90, so that said line relay is kept actuated while the relay R 1090 cannot attract its frame, given
 EMI214.3
 qatil is dj0. differential type.

   On the other hand, the polarity of the numbering stop relay R 1380 of the plug-in repeater 800 X is such that said relay releases its stop.
 EMI214.4
 armaturet since it is of the magnetic shunt type.



  By releasing its armature, the numbering stop relay R 1320 again closes, at contacts 1321, the previously indicated circuit which shorted resistor 13S3.



  In this way, the lower enroala.ent of the impale relay R 960 X of the plugging repeater 800 X is
 EMI214.5
 energized directly in series with the landing relay winding, and release R 1510 of the transaotor 1700 X recorder, so that said pulse relay R 960 X is maintained in its working position and the R 1510 relay attracts
 EMI214.6
 its armature, When operating, the relay R 1510 of the recorder, translator 1700 X interrupts, at contacts 1511, the connection previously established between the rest contact and the other contacts of the bench traversed by the brush 3831 X of the switch
 EMI214.7
 8 2830 X A consequence, when sweeps from said switch

  <Desc / Clms Page number 215>

 return to the rest contacts of the corresponding benches,

   the circuit previously drawn which kept the stop relay of digits R 1910 X energized is interrupted so that this last relay releases its armature. This release opens
 EMI215.1
 to contacts 1913 XI, the circuit previously 1Dd1qu6 common to contacts 1843 X of the digit pulse relay R 1840 X.



  The latter relata again takes control of the pulse circuit between the pulse stop relay R 1510 of the recorder-translator 1700 X and the lower winding of the pulse relay R 960 X of the repeater. file establishment 800 X. Thus, the recorder-translator 1700 X transmits, at this moment, the third digit and. * routing 2 of the series indicated to the repeater at the establishment of files
 EMI215.2
 800 X and the pulse relay R 960 X of the plug-in repeater 800 X subtract the said figure from the line relala R 1080 of the junction circuit 90.

   The line relay R 1080 operates according to the requirements of the third routing digit 2 by repeating said pulses to the contacts
 EMI215.3
 1083, on the signaling conductor 0 9050 and by aonsd- on the simplex connector 0 901 and the line, 1nternrbaio6 900, up to the o mmutat1oD switchgear of the remote cautrel D.

   During the transmission of the digit in question, the digit relay R 1030 and the sticking relay R 1050 are maintained.
 EMI215.4
 Aotated as the previous one, since they are both of the d1fé release type. At the end of the transmission of the third leading digit 2 of the indicated period, the R 1910 X digit stop relay of the 1700 X recorder-translator is switched on again so as to maintain the armature of the transference relay R 1510 of the 1700 X recorder-translator and that of the R 960 x pulse relay of the repeater d establishment of: wealthy 800 X in their working position.

   The R 960'X pulse relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 216>

 actuated maintains in its working position the armature of the line relay R 1080 in the junction stream 90, A short time later, the digit relay R 1030 releases its armature, so that the junction circuit 90 is then able to receive the next digit,
 EMI216.1
 The 1700 X recorder-translator works in an analogous way to ensure the transmission to the 800 X file establishment repeater of the first, second, third and fourth digits of the numeric part of the call number, having the readings 1, 8, 3 and 4 , These digits are removed by the plugging repeater 800 1 at trunk 90, and from there

   via trunk line 900 to the remote central switchgear D, in a manner
 EMI216.2
 substantially Identical to that described above. The final switching stage of the devices at the remote exchange D ensures
 EMI216.3
 then the selection of the line which leads to the requested subscriber set of said exchange and then immediately passes to the test for determining the state of this line (free or busy).



   Considering again the functioning of
 EMI216.4
 The 1700 X recorder-trader during 1 routing of the call in question from the calling normal subscriber station TP of the main exchange B to the called subscriber station of the
 EMI216.5
 remote central D, we will notice that after the trabaalmâlon by said recorder-translator 1700 X of the first digit cltachemibement 3 of the series considered up to the primary selector 600 X, this recorder triggers the operation
 EMI216.6
 of the 8900 X detector, At this time,

   the 8900 1 detector detects the call number of the 407 X line which terminates at a normal subscriber station requesting TP and which is immediately connected
 EMI216.7
 considered through the preselector 423 X, the primary selector 600 X and the primary recorder 1800 X the recorder-trader 1700 X.

   More precisely, the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 217>

   voter 2900 X detects the call number of line 407 X which leads to the calling normal subscriber station TP as follows: 0-0-9-9. The number thus detected is then stored in
 EMI217.1
 the first four call sign devices in the 1700 Xe recorder-translator then the Z900 X detector is released for a new use, At this time, the R 1850 X indicator pulse relay and the R 1860 marking relay X of the 1700 X recorder-translator are selectively operated and
 EMI217.2
 transmit an earth resistance potential and a continuous earth potential, respectively,

   via
 EMI217.3
 the conductor 0 1394 JC which ends in the conductor C 781 Xe on the one hand and through the associated winding of the repeater 900 X and the contacts 954 X on the one hand, to the
 EMI217.4
 windings of the step-by-step relay R 920 X and of the indicator relay R 910 X of the plug-in repeater 800 3l Each time the in1oative pulse relay R is5o X of the recorder-translator 1? 00 X attracts its arroaturet's without operation of the marking relay R 1860, the step-by-step relay R 920 X of the plug-in repeater R 800 X is activated without the operation of the code relay R 910 X, since the latter is marginal type,

     Every time
 EMI217.5
 that the R 1850 X deîndlcatîf pulse relay of the 1700 X translator recorder operates at the same time as the R 1860 X marking relay, a continuous earth potential is applied to the 1394 X C conductor, which simultaneously causes the excitation -
 EMI217.6
 tion of relay not to. step R 920 X and that of the code relay R 910 X in the plugging repeater 800 X.

   Accordingly, the information relating to the recorded call
 EMI217.7
 in 1 f enre? 1 streur-translatoreur 1700 X are trabaals at this moment with the repeater of ethblissemeat 'of files 800 X, following the process explained above then enragîatrân in said

  <Desc / Clms Page number 218>

 
 EMI218.1
 repeater ..

   n.us precisely the first, second and third digits of Itindioatit of the call number of the requested subscriber station, namely the digits 3, 7 and 9 which identify the
 EMI218.2
 remote exchange called D are respectively registered in
 EMI218.3
 the first, second and third d3ndioative aommutateum of the registerxadaoton 1700 said digits are then transmitted to three devices' to be stored in the corresponding in the repeater and establishment of files 800 the first, second, third and fourth digits
 EMI218.4
 of the digital part of the.

   subscriber station call number
 EMI218.5
 normal requestor $ namely the digits 0-0-er-9 that identify
 EMI218.6
 the connection pin of the line are registered in
 EMI218.7
 the four corresponding devices of the recorder, <, '' 1700 X pals translator transmitted to the four corresponding random entry devices of the 800 X file repeater.

   The additional digit of the charging factor applicable to Itapll considered coming from the normal subscriber poeb TP da main central B is intended for a subscriber station of the remote exchange D 'namely the digit 6 complementary to the charging factor (3) is recorded in the input and charge switch of the regulator-translator lut00 X then transmitted to a memory device which must also include:

  the correspondent belonging to the plug-in repeater <300 Z, The figure identifying the eeurecie- treur-tradazotear 1700 Xuti.lis46 appears as a special indicator & e henrogitreaar-tractu.cteur 1700 X and is transmitted to a corresponding remote recording device, from the repeater of file establishment 800 X, , second third and fourth digit s "of the numerical part of the call number 7. ft spawn of called subscriber from the remote exchange D (1 and 3, and 4) which identify the branch pin
 EMI218.8
 corresponding are recorded respectively in the first

  <Desc / Clms Page number 219>

 
 EMI219.1
 honey'.

   second, third and fourth 1700 Xe-thick translator-translator devices transmitted to the four corresponding call sign recording devices belonging to the 800'X card repeater.
 EMI219.2
 



  After transmission of all information
 EMI219.3
 concerning the call sign from the 1700'X recorder-translator, via conductor C 1394 Xe to the 800 X file-setting repeater, after said
 EMI219.4
 information in the devices of the said repeater according to the
 EMI219.5
 process explained el-clesons and after the transmission of all the digits a of the numerical part of the call number from the recorder-trducer 1700 Xe by the driver 0 1283 Xe to the pulse relay R 960 X of the oeéµteuoe dfestablisse - plugs 600 I and the retre.ntlmiss1on desdita digits by the said repeater in the starting selector 513 Xe the code relay R 1850 X and the marking relay R 1860 X transmit a continuous earth pulse in addition tional by the conductor C 139â Xe which causes the fonot1o,

  nnemant of the 800 X setting repeater.



  The geoeralô switching relay, R 950 X is thus actuated.



  When operating, this relay interrupts, at con1a: cts 954 ZD the connection previously established between the esrsal s
 EMI219.6
 of the R 910 X code relay and of the R 920 X step relay on the one hand and the C 781 X conductor of the 780 X jonotion
 EMI219.7
 on the other hand and establishes, at contacts 955 Xt, a connection between the upper winding of pulse relay R 980 X and said conductor C 78L 7, In between, the switching relay R 950 X closes, at contacts 956 Xe , a holding circuit
 EMI219.8
 of its own armature and closes, at contacts 958, a circuit
 EMI219.9
 loop between the left winding of the R 940 X response relay and the:

   jonotion 907 read In addition "the relay R 950 X opens, at contacts 959, the oironit previously drawn between the left-hand bearing of the relay d7ar4Tt numbering 4 1390

  <Desc / Clms Page number 220>

 
 EMI220.1
 and the inverters of the. function 907 X. En¯ oooseqtience, the enront - de gnuahe of the response relay R 940 X is \.) shunted at this moment by the windings of the repdteür 900 a '
 EMI220.2
 and the contacts 958 and 981 X with respect to the conductor of the function 907 X, which keeps the working position dry in the working position of the armature of the line relay R 1080 in the junction circuit 90 and prevents the operation of the relay R 1090 , given that the latter relay is of the differential type.
 EMI220.3
 



  ¯ ¯ After the transmission of ¯tons the ranseignanente relating to the Callsign and all the digits of the numerical part of the number I call by the recorder-translator
 EMI220.4
 1700 X to the plugging repeater 800 X in the manner set out above, the primary selector 600 X is switched off, which closes a direct loop circuit between the normal calling subscriber TP of the main exchange B and coils them.
 EMI220.5
 mounted upper and lower impulse relay R 960 X from repeater to 800 xyz plugs In addition, primary-recorder¯¯1800 X and 1700 X recorder are released at this time for a new use,

   When the loop circuit traced above is closed between the left winding of the repeater R 940 X response relay
 EMI220.6
 d6tab, smoothing of plugs 800 X and the line relay R 1080 and the differential relay R 1090 of the junction circuit 90, the response relay R 940 X has its poles arranged in such a way that it does not operate.

   On the other hand, in
 EMI220.7
 supposing that) µfinal floor of the ccmB-utatiôn- devices of the remote central D finds that the line which ends at the requested subscriber station is free, a ringing current is transmitted by this final floor on said line, in a conventional manner . Then, when the subscriber of the station
 EMI220.8
 requested answers the call, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D establishes communication between the poet

  <Desc / Clms Page number 221>

 normal calling subscriber TP of the main exchange B and the called subscriber station of the remote exchange D. In addition, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D operates at this time so as to increase the resistance of the application circuit from land to interurban line 900 and,

   consequently to the simplex conductor C 901 and to the signaling conductor C 905. In this way, the end of conversation relay R 1170 of the junction circuit 90 releases its armature, given that it is. marginal type. By releasing its armature, the end-of-conversation relay R 1170 causes the de-energization of the auxiliary end-of-conversation relay R 1150, which causes, by releasing its armature, the excitation of the end-of-conversation relay R 935, which while operating, causes the current reversal relay R 1110 to be operated, all in accordance with the process described above.

   While operating, the current reversing relay R 1110 invar se, at contacts 1111, 1112, 1113 and 1114, the polarity of the 1280 B junctions with respect to the lower and upper windings of the line relay R 1080, so that said line relay is kept actuated in junction circuit 90 and that the differential relay R 1090 cannot attract its armature, the left winding of the response relay R 940 X of the plugging repeater 800 X having its peels arranged in such a way that the latter relay operates.

   While operating, it causes the record and timer switch of the 800 x tap repeater to operate. which determines the duration of the oommun-ication considered and causes the recording of said duration on the switch of tens and hundreds of minutes and on the switch of minutes of the repeater establishment of files 800 X,
When the called subscriber of the remote exchange D connects

  <Desc / Clms Page number 222>

 hook at the end of the conversation, the final switching stage of the remote exchange D reduces the:

  resistance of the earth application circuit to trunk line 900. which causes the end-of-talk relay R 1170 to operate again in the function circuit 90. When operating, the end-of-talk relay R 1170 causes operation of the auxiliary end of conversation relay
R 1150, which causes the release of the armature of the end-of-conversation relay R 935 when operating. This in turn causes the armature of the current reversal relay R 1110 to be released, all according to the process outlined above.

   By releasing its armature, the current reversal relay R 1110 reverses, to the contacts
1111, 1112, 1113 and 1114, the polarity of the function 1280 B with respect to the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 1080 in the junction circuit 90, which arranges the poles of the response relay R 940 X of the repeater to setting up 800 X plugs in such a way that the latter relay releases its armature, which stops the operation of the timing apparatus of the 800 X plugging repeater, given that the duration of the communication.

   considered was established at this moment, internally, when the calling subscriber of the normal set TP of the main exchange B hangs up, the loop circuit previously drawn which kept the pulse relay R 960 X of the repeater setting up activated. files 800X is interrupted. By releasing its armature, the R 960 X pulse relay causes the R 840 X bonding relay to de-energize a short time later, since the latter relay is of the delayed release type. By releasing its armature, the bonding relay R, 840 X interrupts, at contacts 846, the circuit previously indicated for the application.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 223>

 earth to the control conductor of junction 907 X.



   In this way, the originating trunk selector 513 X is released in a conventional manner. During this release the loop circuit which terminates through the conductors of the junction 1280 B to the junction circuit 90, is interrupted, and the earth potential which was applied to the control conductor C 1285 of said junction 1280 B is eliminated; so that the line relay R 1080 and the local selection relay R 1130 both release their armature. By releasing its armature, the line relata R 1080 causes the release of that of the bonding relay R 1050 a short time later.

   For its part, the local selection relay R 1130 produces, by releasing its armature, the release of that of the switching relay R 1120, which causes the armature of the end of conversation relay R 1170 to be released and, , consequently of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R 1150.

   On the other hand, by releasing its armature, the bonding relay R 1050 also causes the de-energization of the stepped-action relay R 940 X and the control relay R 1020, all following the process described above. In addition, the control relay R 1120 closes at contacts 1125 ', releasing its armature, the circuit previously drawn for the non-application of an earth, through the winding of the input selection relay.
R 1240, to the signaling conductor C 905 and, consequently, to the simplex conductor C 901 and to the interurban line 900.

   In this way, the switching devices of the remote exchange D are released. which indicates that the line which terminates at the requested subscriber station of said exchange is free. : in addition, the local selection relay R 1130, by releasing its armature, again closes on contacts 1135 the circuit previously drawn for the application of the battery, by means of the winding-

  <Desc / Clms Page number 224>

 ment of, interurban selection relay R 1180, to the driver
 EMI224.1
 control unit C 1S8S of the 1280 A junction,

   which means that said Junction and the junction circuit 90 are free to the third long distance selectors 1406 etc., which have access to said junction and to said circuit.

   At this moment, the trunk circuit 90 is completely released and the trunk line 900, which connects the main exchange B to the remote exchange D, becomes available for a new use, 'Diantre leaves * by releasing its armature,' the relay
 EMI224.2
 of sticking R 840 X of the repeater or of establishing files 800 X causes the release of the primary selector 600 X and of the pre-selector 423 X # so that the line 407 X which terminates at the normal subscriber station calling TP is indicated as being free to switching devices which have access to said line, In addition * by releasing its armature, the relay
 EMI224.3
 of 'sticking n B40-Z of the repeater establishment of files 800 1 continues to be distinguished from the primary selectors 600 Xi, etc ...

   who have access to the: 780 X junction leading to said repeater that. said junction is occupied, which prevents any
 EMI224.4
 releasing of the plugging repeater 800X at this time and causing the application of ground to the conductor of
 EMI224.5
 start C $ 890, which ends up in the imp'rasalon 4800 X control device distributor. Said application of ground to the C 890 X starter conductor which ends in the 4600 X printing control device distributor triggers the finder? 4640 X associated with this distributoure, so that said finder finds a free print controller in the associated group.

   Assuming
 EMI224.6
 If the finder T 4640 X finds, frees the 4200 X print controller and selects it at this time for use, the operation of the finder F 4210 X individual to that 4200 X device is then caused to

  <Desc / Clms Page number 225>

 such that said searcher finds the calling card repeater at that time. Assuming that the 800X set-up repeater is the first calling repeater of the associated group, the 4210X searcher associated with the 4200X print controller finds this 800X repeater, so that the 4200X device is then connected to the repeater 800 X.

   After this connection) the earth potential which was applied to the plugging repeater 800 X is removed from the starting conductor C 890 X which ends at. 4600 X print controller dispenser, so that said dispenser is released. In addition, when the 4200 X print controller is connected to the 800 X file repeater, this 4200 X device operates to select the 5230 X file printer and the 5240 X printer-recorder.

   On the other hand, the register transfer switch of the 800 X file-making repeater and the 4200 X print controller-recorder switch are operated in synchronism, so that the information stored in the switch minutes, in the tens and hundreds of minutes switch, on the outermost indicators, and in the call sign recording devices, all of these components belonging to the 800 X setting repeater, are transferred to the registration of corresponding callsigns of the 4200 X print controller.



  When all of the information stored in the 800X file repeater is thus transferred to the 4200X print controller and saved in said device, the 800X file repeater is released and becomes available for use. a new use.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 226>

 



   , In addition, when all the registered information has been transferred from the repeater re-establishing records
800 X to 4200 X print controller, as discussed above, the 4200 X print controller switch-selector-calculator is controlled according to the registered charge factor, applicable to the communication established between the printer. calling normal subscriber station
TP of the main exchange B and the called subscriber station of the remote exchange D, which ensures the selection of a corresponding computer switch of the print controller 4200 X.

   The aéleoté computer switch is then set along two coordinate axes, depending on the number of minutes and the number of tens of minutes of the. duration of the communication considered, which establishes a charge for said communication. More precisely, the activated computer switch establishes a first charge calculated on a flat-rate basis and a second charge calculated according to the number of conversation units, then selects one of the results according to the type of service used by the requesting subscriber. .

   In the example chosen, the normal calling subscriber station TP is charged for medium-distance interurban calls on a flat-rate basis and, consequently, it is the result obtained starting from this basis by the selected computer switch activated.

   Further, when the 4200 X print controller is selected as set forth above, it causes the terra to be applied to the 0 4302 X starter conductor which results in the 5000 X intermediate print controller. so that in the event that. this intermediate 5000 X device is free * 'it triggers' the operation of the searcher F 5010 X which is individually associated with it, in such a way that the searcher finds the printing control device

  <Desc / Clms Page number 227>

 appellant.

   Assuming that the 4200 X print controller is the first calling device in the associated group, researcher F 5010 X finds it and connects it to the 5000 X intermediate print controller.



  At this time, the printer's control switch
 EMI227.1
 4300 X print controller plugs and record transfer switch are synchronously and selectively operated to control the 5230 X plug printer and the 5240 X printer, respectively. On the other hand, it will be noted that the 3900 X time stamp operates continuously, indicating to all print control devices such as 4200 X the month, date, hour and minute. This information is then available in the 4200 X print controller to ensure the printer's control.
 EMI227.2
 files 5? 30 X and the printer-eoregiatrist 5340 2.

   Therefore, the 5230 X card printer is ordered at this time so as to establish an Individual card revive to the communication in question. The printer-recorder
 EMI227.3
 5240 X inscribed with its o ' <) Tear down on the associated registration sheet a single row.



   When the 4200 X print controller has acted on the 5230 X sheet printer and the printer-
 EMI227.4
 5ZeO X recorder, in such a way that these devices establish an individual record to the community and an individual record line to the communication on the associated sheet, the 4200 X print controller is released and becomes available for a new one.
 EMI227.5
 use.

   At this time, the intermediate printing control device 5000 X takes control of the printer.
 EMI227.6
 5ZZO X cards and the 5 & 40 X printer-recorder, in such a way that said 5230 X card printer cut out the card

  <Desc / Clms Page number 228>

 that it has established and is preparing for the following operation and in such a way that the 5240 X printer-recorder does
 EMI228.1
 move the record sheet one line forward and also return to position for the next operation.

   At this time, the intermediate print control device
 EMI228.2
 5000.Xj the printer of the long-distance communioabions cards 5830 X and the printer-emagiereur 5240 X are fully released. Joz¯¯ ll¯¯ When the call described above is routed between the calling normal subscriber station TP from the main exchange B and the called subscriber station from the remote exchange D, it is recalled that when the originating trunk selector 513 X selects junction 1880 B which terminates at trunk 90, this trunk circuit 90 has returned a trans signal
 EMI228.3
 deferred mission to the 800 X file establishment repeater,

   Said signal persists until the switching devices of the remote exchange D are connected to interurban line 900 and are able to receive the next digit.



  At this time interval, the 800 X plug-in repeater sends the delayed transmission signal through the 600 R primary selector to the 1700 X recorder-translator, which prevents the latter from transmitting the next digit as long as the monitoring devices. switching of the remote exchange D are not able to receive this figure, all operations having link according to the exposed process.
 EMI228.4
 Previously, however, it may happen that the switching devices of the remote exchange D are at this moment fully occupied, so that they are not connected to the long distance line 900, neither quickly nor within a reasonable time.

   Accordingly, the junction circuit 90 returns
 EMI228.5
 in this cant a delayed transmission signal to the 800 X recorder repeater, and this repeater returns this signal to the 1700 Xth condition recorder-traotor.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 229>

 persists for an abnormal time. In addition, when the record
 EMI229.1
 logger-translator 1700 X was connected to the logger-Prtraîrs 1200 X during the routing of the call in question, the
 EMI229.2
 1700 X recorder-translator switch operation has been tripped.

   In this way, in the example chosen, the 1700 X recorder-translator is kept connected to the primary 1200 X recorder for thirty seconds, since the 1700 X recorder-translator cannot complete its operation to ensure the transmission of all the figures since, by hypothesis, the deferred transmission signal is returned to the 1700 X adjuster-translator for an abnormal time, In these conditions it will easily be seen that normal operation of the 1700 X logger-translator only requires a small fraction of the time interval of thirty seconds shown and that,

   dreary with a reasonable transmission delay delaying the operation of the 1700 X recorder-translator the thirty second time interval is largely sufficient to allow operation and return to standby
 EMI229.3
 1700 X recorder-translator during this time interval, Therefore, in the chosen oxomple, the timer switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator ends / its stroke after thirty seconds and at a time when the recorder-translator 1700 X is still connected to the primary 1200 X recorder in response to the reception by this recorder, pandant the abnormal time indicated, of the delayed transmission signal.

   
 EMI229.4
 



  When the timer-switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator has finished its run, the charging and forwarding switch of this recorder is released, as is the 600 X primary selector, which releases the repeater.
 EMI229.5
 establishment of SOO X files, of the long distance selector of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 230>

 start 513 X and function circuit 90, the whole following the process described above.

   On the other hand, the switch
 EMI230.1
 charging and routing of the ltenreglotreur-translator-1700 X is arbitrarily reset by the jumper connections established for the transmission of the outgoing digits.
 EMI230.2
 min 1 1 -and 4 whatever the setting of the composite code switch-off of the 1700 X recorder-translator. This then proceeds to. the successive transmission of the three digits
 EMI230.3
 of routing 1, 1 and 4, The primary selector 600 X, when it receives the first digit (1) selects the group of special service selectors including in particular the special services selector 503 X, then in this group a service selector specials free.

   Assuming the 600 X primary selector precisely selects the selector
 EMI230.4
 503 Xy special service selector the second routing digit (1) transmitted by a 1700 X-Trainer causes the operation and then the return to its idle position of the special services selector 503 X, given that said selector is of such type. that it automatically falls back to its rest position when the first digit it receives
 EMI230.5
 is 1, Insaitei when the reg;

  istreur-traduotea.r 1700 X transmits the third routing digit (4) to the special services selector 503 X, which selects the corresponding group of trunks which leads to the operator position
 EMI230.6
 o loaded with blocked communications 114X - 117XO then select a free trunk from the group indicated.

   In this way, the call is routed, ju: eq, u, said operator position 114 X - 117 X through the particular group junction mentioned so as to indicate to the Empress of said position that the call in. course has been blocked, or as a result of the fact that the subscriber of the normal calling station TP did not cause the non-application of all the digits.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 231>

 
 EMI231.1
 will keep numbers formed on the dial with the associated recorder-translator, as explained below in more detail.
 EMI231.2
 detailed)

   either because of the encounter by the originating oommutaitoura of a blocked switching stage during the routing of a medium-distance long-distance call originating from the main exchange B. At this time, the recorder-translator 1700 X and the 1200 X primary recorder are released and the 600 X primary recorder is properly positioned, so that when Empress of the position
 EMI231.3
 114 X * - 117 X answers 17app-el, a telephone call is established between the calling normal subscriber station TP and the operator position in charge of blocked calls 114 X - 117 X. At this time, said operator can inform the subscriber of the normal calling station TP of the circumstances which led to the blocking of his call.

   This subscriber can then
 EMI231.4
 proo6cler 4 the interruption of communication with said operating position. in a classical G manner, In addition $ regarding the routing of the call
 EMI231.5
 described cl-deasns between the normal subscriber station calling TF from the main exchange B and a called subscriber station from the remote exchange D, it may happen that the switching devices of the remote exchange D are found in the presence or of a case
 EMI231.6
 of occupancy, totalelo is of a case 'l'oco \ 1lpation of line.

   In the case where. the final ooromutation stage of the switching devices of the remote exchange D sees that the line leading to the called subscriber station is busy, a current of
 EMI231.7
 aeocoupatlon tone is returned to the trunk line 900 and, via the established communication, to the calling normal subscriber station TF, after 14 11be; r $ .iton of ltenregîstxaur-traçlmtaur 1700 X and of the primary recorder 1200 X before the process described Lgabonn6 of the normal calling station TP can then interrupt the communication

  <Desc / Clms Page number 232>

 in the manner explained above.
 EMI232.1
 



  Diantre leaves, in the event that one of the floors of '>,. ..:> -... '' Ir "intermediate switching of devices from the remote exchange D is in the presence of a case of total occupation, said floor opens the simplex connection leading to the interurban line 900 and causes forwarding to said line of a busy tone current. This current is repeated, by
 EMI232.2
 the intermediary of the communication, to the subscriber of the normal calling station T3 of the main exchange:

  and and said subscriber causes the interruption of the communication as explained above, however, in the case where the subscriber dn. normal calling station TP fails to interrupt the call within a reasonable time, the call coming from
 EMI232.3
 of this subscriber is routed to the receiver position responsible for communications / b1oquées 114 X 117 X by record1:

  transmitter-translator 1700 ±, 7ius precisely when the simplex connection leading to the long distance line 900 is interrupted * the end of conversation relay R 1170 releases its armature causing the de-energization of the auxiliary end of conversation relay R'1150 and, consequently, the operation of the end of conversation relay R 935 and of the current reversal relay R 1110 in the junction wax 90, all following the process described above,
 EMI232.4
 When operating, the current reversing relay R 1110 reverses the polarity of the junction 1280 B causing the shutdown relay to switch,

       R 1326 call set repeater 800 X, and therefore the operation
 EMI232.5
 , from the output relay for impnlsions R 1510 in 1.en- registr9ur-taduceu: 1700 n, In other words, the delayed transmission signal is transmitted from the function circuit 90 to the plugging repeater 800 X
 EMI232.6
 and retransmitted by the latter to the 1700 R recorder,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 233>

 
 EMI233.1
 all in the manner explained above, in the example considered any subsequent operation of the enrag1streur
 EMI233.2
 1700 X translator and prevented so that the switch-
 EMI233.3
 cbxonomêtreux-duclit enrègiatr8ur causes the call to be routed,

   following the transmission of the handling digits 1, 1 and ù, up to the operator position responsible for blocked communications 114X-117X, all following the process described above. The answer to the call by the operator from said position 114 ï - 117 X and the interruption of the call take place in the same way as
 EMI233.4
 previously,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 234>

 
 EMI234.1
 'CALL COMING FROM A SUBSCRIBER POST OF ZIG1ES, PARTACMS BELONGING TO MAIN CENTRAL B AND TO A POST D-' SUBSCRIBER 'IV, O3NTRàL FAR'D.



  -1st half-half of 1zn = px call from a subscriber set. de'ligne '' paxtâgées el, that; for example one of the posts. of subscribers TSi, TS2,, Tg3, t TS4 connected to the shared line '' 410'X = du ', àe'ntxaÎ'p' * "li'n cipe 1 13 'up to, a subscriber set requested -from-0 is substantially identical to the description above .. '. Ttuteois; the' appaxeils. of the primaix recorder 1 and 'of the recorder-tracer work in a manner;

   Slightly 'dif, erent, - anomnia set out below in a more detailed' ,,. form..It will be assumed that a call has been made by one of the Doatea. from to good -TS1, TS2, TS3 or TS4 xlinked to the. '' 1. line by $ pgée 410 x, that the associated preselector 4S4 ga, 'n' aoleotë the function '462 X which leads to the aëlecteux pimaiio' 600 X and that there ohoïcheux F 410 X individual auclit'adlec- 'their primary 600 X' has select primary lionxeistxous 1200 x,, the whole following the process explained previously. z'1, 'choyai example, of the case' where the call is initiated 'by the premiexiposte' of subscriber TS1 of the, shared line, no dialing impulse is transmitted, pax the calling device of said station on les-, coYnduoteuxs of the line paitagëo 4l0 X. laws of the formation of each figure on the cadian.

   In the case where the call is initiated by the second extension of subscriber TS2 of the extension line, a single * texie pulse is transmitted from the cam controlled springs 1306 of the.
 EMI234.2
 call device for this station on the line conductors
 EMI234.3
 'Paiteée' 410 X during 'the formation of each number yes the,' dial. Î; 1,,; ') .. # ;;' "j.



  The third station TS3 launches two positive pulses pax- les ,,, ressoxts ', - to' cam'1304 - for each digit and the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 235>

 fourth station TS4 transmits three from cam springs 1302.



     With regard to the calling device of the fourth subscriber station TS4 of the shared line, it should be noted that the first earth pulse is transmitted by the set of cam-controlled springs 1302 to the conductor of the line. the shared line 410 X while the pulse spring set 1301 is closed, said set then transmits the first pulse of the digit to the shared line conductor 410 X while the cam spring set 1302 is open, then the second pulse ground is transmitted by the cam spring set 1302 to the shared line conductor 410 X while the pulse spring set 1301 is closed, etc.

   the calling devices of the second subscriber station TS2 of the shared line and of the third subscriber station TS3 of said line are operated in an identical manner.



   The subscriber of the calling shared line extension, TS1. TS2, TS3 or TS4 then forms on its dial the call number of the subscriber station requested from the remote exchange D, as explained above, said number possibly being 279-1234 for example. The first digit of the callsign (2) is stored in the first call sign recorder of the 1200 X primary recorder and the 600 X primary selector is actuated according to said digit and then released, all following the process described. previously.

   At the end of the transmission of the first digit of the code (2), the shared line test relay of the primary recorder 1200 X is made sensitive), so that when the second digit of the code ( 7) is formed on the dial, this number is recorded in the second call sign recording device of the primary recorder 1200 X and the shared line test relay of this recorder is

  <Desc / Clms Page number 236>

 selectively control according to the number of pulses ''
 EMI236.1
 cls texxe t¯xeu.es via shared line 40 '.

   X from the springs to. cam. of the appeal system of. two-sided shared-line subscriber set More specifically, the 'shared-line' test relay selectively actuates three shared-line relays preyus in '; 1 "logger, 1200 tX , zero ', one two or three of said party-line relays. have been added, following ,, the number of' inpuisions, of grounds 'received through the shared line 407 X.' during the transmission of the second, digit of the indicative '(7), corresponding condition xespec-
 EMI236.2
 .ti'vement to various subscriber stations, shared line-, 2S1, TS2, TS3 'and TS4.

   ,,
At the end of the transmission of the second digit, of the code (7), the operation of the
 EMI236.3
 ., xa dLoteurs 1600 X is triggered. the searcher
F 1610 X can then designate the recorder-translator by-.
 EMI236.4
 particular 1700 X, so that the researcher F 2290 X finds. then I, 'primary recorder 1200 the whole following the,' propeasus exposed previously. At this time, the figures -. complementary from the first and second indicative digits (2 and 7) are. transferred to the pxemex1 and second "... recorder-code-1 ', recorder - @, converter' devices. 1700.

   X and / in addition, 'the shared line switch of the 1700 X translator is activated according to the operation of the shared line relays of the primary recorder 1 ± xyz0 X ,, Idè, be that the extension The shared line subscriber of the operator (TS1,, TS2, TS3 or TS4) is thus identified in the operated shared line switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator.



   The calling subscriber then proceeds to dial on his dial the third digit of the area code (9) and

  <Desc / Clms Page number 237>

 first digit of the digital part (1) which are then transmitted to the primary recorder 1200 X. In this way, said digits are recorded in said apparatus 1200 X and their complementary digits are transmitted to the recorder-translator 1700 X. The second, third and fourth digits of the digital part (2, 3 and 4) are applied to the primary 1200 X recorder, then repeated directly to the 1700 X recorder-translator, all following the process described above.

   The operation of the recorder-translator for the recording of the seven digits indicated, the control of the primary selector 600 X, the actuation of the following switches, the transmission of the various information stored up to the repeater of establishment of these cards 800 X and triggering operation of detector 2900 X takes place as before, assuming that the call under consideration is routed through, primary selector 600 'X, set-up repeater 800 X,

        from outgoing trunk selector 513 of trunk 90 and trunk line 900 to remote exchange D.



  However, in this case, the 1700 X recorder-translator selectively controls the operation of the 2900 X detector which detects the call number of the shared line 410 X in one of the forms 0-1-0- 0, 0-2-0-0, 0-3-0-0,0-4-0-0, depending on the position of the shared line switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator, switch set previously from the 1200 X primary recorder depending on whether it is one or other of the TS1, TS2, TS3 or TS4 sets belonging to the shared line 410 X,

   releasing the 2900X detector from the 1700'X recorder-translator and the 1200X primary recorder following the routing of the call to the called subscriber station of the remote exchange D taking place as before. Likewise, releasing the 600 X primary selector from the preselector

  <Desc / Clms Page number 238>

 
424 X of the originating trunk selector 513 X, of the trunk circuit 90, and of the switching devices of the remote exchange D take place. like before.

   Further, the 800X file repeater acts on the 4200X print controller, then it is released, after which the 4200X device acts on the intermediate print controller. 5000X, 5230X Card Printer, and 5240X Printer-Recorder, all in the manner previously discussed. In the example considered, the 5230 X digit printer can set up a card of a certain type if the interested call was initiated by the first subscriber set (TS10 of the shared line or a card of another type in the event that the interested call has been initiated by the fourth subscriber station (TS4) of said shared line.



     Similarly, the 5240 X printer-recorder is controlled so that it inscribes a line on the record sheet in the event that the interested call has been initiated by the first subscriber station (TS1). of the shared line or a different line in the case where the call was initiated by the fourth subscriber station (TS4) of said shared line.



   CALL FROM A SERVICE SUBSCRIBER
INTER-URBAN AUTHORIZED FROM MAIN CENTRAL B AND INTENDED FOR A
CENTRAI SUBSCRIBER POST, REMOTE D.



     The routing of a call from a subscriber station, born with authorized interubain service such as the TX station of the main exchange B to a called subscriber station of the remote exchange
D is carried out in the manner explained above. However, the apparatuses of the recorder-translator and of the print control device operate in a slightly different manner, as hereinafter set forth in more detail.

   It will be assumed that a call has been made by a, extension

  <Desc / Clms Page number 239>

 of authorized long distance subscriber TX, that the pre-selector 421 X has selected the junction 461 X leading to the primary selector 441 X of the group concerned, that the searcher F 442 X, belonging individually to the primary selector 441X has selected the primary register 1200 X of the group concerned and that the subscriber of the authorized long distance service station TX, who initiates the call, forms on his dial the call number of the subscriber station requested from the remote exchange D, this number being 279 -1234 as in the example chosen previously.

   The first digit of the code (2) and the second digit of the said. call sign (7) are recorded in the respective call sign recorders of the 1200 X primary recorder. The 600 X primary selector is activated when the first digit of the call sign (2) is received, then said selector is released and the operation of the 1600 X recorder-translator machine is started, all following the process previously described.

   Assuming, on the other hand, that the 1700 X recorder-translator is again connected by the searcher F 2290 X to the 1200 M primary recorder, the additional digits of the first and second digits of the callsign (2 and 7 ) recorded in the 1200 X primary recorder are transferred to the 1700 X recorder-translator.

   Then, the third digit of the code (9) and the first digit of the digital part (1) are recorded in the primary recorder 1200 X and their complements are transferred to the recorder-raducteur 1700 X. Finally , the second, third and fourth digits of the numeric part of the call number (2, 3 and 4)

   are received by the primary recorder 1200 X then repeated at the recorder-translator 1700 X. When the latter is connected to the primary recorder 1200 X the relay '. of special services of the recorder-translator 1700 X is activated due to the fact that the primary selector of the group comprising in particular the primary selector 441 X comprises a breadboard multiplied by the. associated resistance, in series with

  <Desc / Clms Page number 240>

 the upper winding of the transfer relay in primary selector 441 X.

   Said breadboard exists in each primary selector of the group comprising in particular the primary selector 441 X while, it is not provided in any primary selector of the group comprising in particular the primary selector
600 X. ' In this way, the special services relay of the recorder-translator 1700 X is activated, in the example chosen. Due to the fact that the primary recorder 1200 X connected to said recorder-translator is also connected to the primary selector 441 X accessible to the pre-selector 421 X which belongs individually to the line 401 X line which terminates at the authorized long distance subscriber station calling TX.



     In the example chosen, the operation of the special services relay in the 1700 X recorder-translator does not determine the setting of the charging and routing switch, since said switch is set at the same time as the charge switch. composite code ordered according to the first, second and third code switches when receiving the additional digits of the first, second and third digits of the code (2, 7 and 9), since the call ' considered must be routed to the remote exchange D, and that an individual record for said call must be prepared despite the fact that the origin of said call is the subscriber station with authorized long distance service TX.



   The following operations of the 1700 X recorder-translator for controlling the 441 X primary selector the other operations performed by the 1700 X recorder-translator and relating to the control of the 441 X primary selector, of the setting repeater 800 X, outgoing trunk selector 513 X, trunk 90, and remote exchange switchgear D's are identical to the previous description. The release of the 1700 X recorder-translator and the primary recorder
1200 X also takes place in the same way as before.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 241>

 



  However, with regard to the transfer of information between the 1700 X recorder-translator and the 800 X file establishment repeater, additional information corresponding to the activation of the special services relay of the The 1700 X recorder-translator in the example chosen is transmitted.

   This additional information is recorded in the 800 X file establishment repeater prior to the release of the 1700 X recorder-translator. The operation of the rest of the devices for the transmission of communication to the station subscriber requested at the remote exchange D and the subsequent release of all these devices, with the exception of the record set-up repeater
800 X, also take place as before.

   Following the termination of the established communication and still assuming that the file-setting repeater 800 ', X causes, the selection by the print controller distributor 4600 X of the printer controller. impression
4200X, the 800X file repeater is connected to this 4200X device, and all information stored in the 800X file repeater is transferred to the controller in the manner previously discussed.

   At this time, the 4200 X print controller selects a switch-calculator according to the registered tax factor, then sets the selected switch-calculator to two coordinate axes according to the tens and units digits of the number of minutes of the duration of the communication established, the whole according to the process described above. At this moment, the activated computer switch establishes two charges for the communication in question, respectively according to a flat-rate basis and according to the number of conversation units.

   However, the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 242>

 , additional information recorded in the printing control device 4200 X, information already mentioned above and relating to the origin of the call considered to a subscriber station authorized for long distance service) causes the selection of Calculation ' based on the number of conversation units.



  In addition, this additional information stored in the 4200 X print controller is used to modify the action of the tab printer control switch and transfer switch. recording. In this way, the 5230 X card printer and the 5240 X printer-recorder are controlled in combination by the 4200 X print controller and the 5000 X intermediate print controller in such a manner that they establish respectively. one form and one line on the record sheet, in modified form *.



   Consequently, when a call is routed from a flat-rate subscriber station (e.g. the normal subscriber station TP and the subscriber stations on shared line TS1, TS2, TS3 and TS4 and when said call is to be ticketed, the 5230 X ticket printer is controlled such that it prints the letter "F" on the fourth line of the long distance ticket and letter "C" (calculation of the tax) on the fifth line of the said form.

   The call charge is then calculated, then printed on the fifth line of the long distance sheet 'on a flat-rate basis, as shown in figure 57. To British patent N 565. 654 of February 12, 1945'6 For its part, the 5240 X printer-recorder is controlled in such a way that it inscribes the number 1 on the line printed immediately before the indication "recorder-translator II,

  <Desc / Clms Page number 243>

 
On the other hand, when a call is routed from an authorized long distance subscriber station (such as TX authorized long distance subscriber station) and said call is set up a file,

   the 5230 X card printer is controlled so as to print the letter "E" (extension of the service to the interurban network) on the fourth line of the long distance ticket and the letter "U" (paid conversation units) on the fifth line of the said card and the communication charge is calculated and printed on the fifth line of the interurban card according to the number of conversation units, while the 5240 X printer-recorder is ordered in such a way that it writes the number 2 on the printed line already indicated.



   Otherwise, the operation and release of the print controller 4200 X and the intermediate print controller 5000 X are the same as before.



   Call coming from a normal subscriber set belonging to the main exchange B and intended for a subscriber set of the local exchange C:
It will now be assumed that a call initiated by a normal subscriber station such as, for example, the normal subscriber station TP of the main exchange B, is to be routed to the local exchange C, that the pre-selector 423 X belonging individually to line 407 X which terminates at the normal calling subscriber station TP aselected junction 462 X terminating at primary selector 600 X,

   that the searcher F 610 X belonging individually to the primary selector 600 X has selected the primary recorder 1200 X and that the subscriber of the normal telephone TP forms the number on his dial

  <Desc / Clms Page number 244>

 call from the subscriber station called from. local exchange C This call number comprises the three code digits 4, 5 and 6 identifying the centxal locla C and a four-digit numerical part, such as for example the digits 1, 2, 3 and 4 identifying the line connection pin of the requested subscriber station.

   When the first two digits of the telephone (4 and 5) are stored in the proximity recorder
 EMI244.1
 .1200 Xp'lè distributor of recorder-translators z1600 X. is ordered in such a way that it designates a, recorder-
 EMI244.2
 free translator, such as for example the 1700 X recorder-translator. At this moment, this 1700 X recorder-translator is linked to the 1200 X primary recorder. The additional digits of the first two digits of the call sign (4 and 5) recorded in, 1, 'primary recorder 1200 X are transferred
 EMI244.3
 to the 1700 X recorder-translator.

   Subsequently, the third, digit of the code (6) and the first digit of the pa ': rti 0 "nUM6 Tick (1) are received by the primary register 1200 X and recorded by it. In this way, the digits complementary to the last two digits quoted are transferred from the primary recorder 1200 X to the recorder-translator 1700 X then, the second, third and fourth digits of the digital part of the call number '
 EMI244.4
 (2, 3 and 4) are received, by the primary 1200 X recorder ¯, ¯ then repeated directly to the 1700 X traotor recorder and recorded by it.

   The recording of the numbers oompleted. ¯ of the first, second and third code digits (4, 5 and 6) in the corresponding respective code recording devices of the recorder-
 EMI244.5
 1700 X translator triggers the operation of the routing and charging which on the one hand selects a series of routing digits used for the transmission of the call in question and on the other hand a charging factor applicable to said call, as explained previously. In the example chosen, the routing switch may determine

  <Desc / Clms Page number 245>

 the numbers 3, 3 and 4.

   In this way, the recorder-translator 1700 X first transmits the first routing digit 3 and the primary selector 600 X is sensitive to the reception of said digit 5 and selects the group of junctions including in particular junction 780 X which 'leads to the group of file establishment repeaters including in particular the file establishment repeater 800 X, then selects from this group a free junction.

   Assuming that the primary selector 600 X precisely selects the 780 X trunk which terminates at the set-up repeater 800 X, said repeater is enabled to receive the second routing digit 3 and repeat said digit to the long distance selector of outgoing 513 M, which is at this moment in a state to receive the next routing digit, all according to the process described above.

   The 1700 X recorder-translator then transmits the second routing digit 3 of the series in question to the file establishment repeater 800 X and said second digit 3 is then repeated to the outgoing trunk selector 513 X, in such a way as that here selects the group of junctions including in particular the junction 880 B, which ends in the group of junction circuits comprising in particular the junction circuit 50 then selects a free junction from this group of junctions.



   - Assuming that the outgoing trunk selector 513 X precisely selects junction 880 B which terminates at trunk circuit 50, the outgoing trunk selector 515 X applies ground to the 0 885 control conductor of junction 880 B, which closes a circuit passing through contacts 846 and 852 for energizing the local selection relay R.860 in the junction circuit 50.

   While operating, the local selection relay R 860 closes, at contacts 862, an obvious circuit for the application of earth to the control conductor C 885 of junction 880'A, indicating

  <Desc / Clms Page number 246>

 to the third long distance selectors 1406 etc .... which have access to said junction that it is free. In addition, the local selection relay R 860 closes at contacts 864 an obvious circuit for energizing the switching cell R 720 and closes, at contacts 865, a circuit passing through contacts 523, for energizing the relay. order code R 510.

   In operation, the switching relay R 720 closes at contacts 723, 727, 722 'and 723' a loop circuit between the line relay R760; the differential relay R 750 of the junction circuit 50 and the left winding of the call stop relay R 1320 of the plug repeater 800 X.

   Said loop circuit is drawn as follows: earth, top winding of R 760, top winding of R 750, contacts' 722 ', 654, 642, 723' and 734, line conductor C882 and battery, top winding R 760, contacts 656, lower relay winding, R 750 differential, contacts 727, 652, 641, 723 and 731, line conductor 0 881, conductors C 881 and C '882 of junction 880 B being connected, by l 'via the outgoing interurban selector 513 X, the conductors of junction 907 X and contacts 961 X and 959 directly to the terminals of the left winding of the call stop relay R 1320.

   At this moment, the control relay R 1310 of the plugging repeater 800 X released its armature by interrupting,. to contacts 1311, the previously indicated circuit which shorted the left winding of call stop relay R 1320 so that said winding of call stop relay R 1320 is energized at this time in the loop circuit traced above * When the left winding of the R 1320 call stop relay is energized as shown above, the polarity of said relay is such that it does not operate.

   Almost

  <Desc / Clms Page number 247>

 Immediately afterwards, the control relay R 510 of the junction circuit 50 completes its operation and causes the activation of the end of conversation relay R 610 which, while operating, closes, at contacta.612, a circuit passing through contacts 865 for excitation of the current reversal relay R 730. When operating, the current reversal relay R 730 reverses, at contacts 731, 732, 733 and 734, the polarity of conductors C 881 and C 882 of junction 880 B with respect to the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 760, so as to give the call stop relay R 1320 of the plugging repeater 800 X a polarity such that said relay operates.

   In addition, the line relay R 760 of the junction circuit 50 was actuated as a result of the closure of the loop circuit traced above and remains actuated at this time. While operating, the line relay R 760 closes, at contacts 762, the circuit previously drawn for the energization of the sticking relay R 770, and, given that the loop circuit drawn above is balanced, the differential relay R 750 is not actuated.



  In addition, the line relay R 760 closes, at contacts 761, the previously traced loop circuit which passes through the left winding of the response relay R 740 and the trunk line 500 which ends at the local exchange Ce De in this way, the local exchange junction circuit C acts in such a way that the automatic switchgear of said exchange is associated with the trunk line 500. This operation takes some time. When said loop circuit is originally closed, the left winding of the response relay R 760 is energized but the polarity of the trunk line 500 is such that said relay is not actuated.

   When operating, the call stop relay R 1320 of the plugging repeater 800 X opens, at the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 248>

 tacts 1321, the previously indicated circuit which keeps resistor 1322 short-circuited so that the pulse relay R 960 X of the plugging repeater 800 X is held in its actuated position and the stop relay d The emission of R 1510 pulses from the 1700 X recorder-translator releases its armature. By releasing its frame, the pulse emission stop relay R 1510 momentarily prevents the transmission of the third routing digit 4 from the recorder-translator 1700 X as discussed previously.



   When the switchgear of the local exchange C is associated with the trunk line 500 and when said apparatus is able to receive a digit, the negative and positive potentials are reversed at the local exchange C on the conductors of the trunk line 500, thus so that the left winding of the response relay R 440 of the junction circuit 50 assumes a polarity such that said relay operates. While operating, the response relay R 740 causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 520 and the latter, when operating, causes the armature of the control relay R 510 to be released a short time later.

   By releasing its armature, the control relay R 510 causes the release of that of the end of conversation relay R 610 and the latter, by releasing its armature, causes it. de-energization of the current inversion relay R 730, all according to the process described above;

   By releasing its armature, the current reversing relay R 730 reverses at contzets 731, 732, 733 and 734, the polarity of the conductors of junction 880 B with respect to the upper and lower windings of the line relay R 7600 From this way. the left-hand bearing of the call stop relay R 1320 of the plug-in repeater 800 X takes on a polarity such as

  <Desc / Clms Page number 249>

 that said relay releases its armature.

   By releasing its armor, the call stop relay R 1520 again closes at contacts 1321, the circuit previously indicated to short-circuit resistor 1322, which keeps the pulse relay R 960 X activated. of the plug-in repeater 800 X and what energizes the pulse-emitting stop relay R 1510 of the recorder-translator 1700 X.

   When the pulse emission stop relay R 1510 attracts its armature again, the digit stop relay R 1910 X can release its own, so that the recorder-translator 1700 X is then able to transmit the third routing digit (4) of the series in question. The 1700 X recorder-translator then proceeds to transmit said third digit 4 to the repeater for setting up. 800 X plugs, so that the pulse relay R 960 X of said repeater retransmits the digit's pulses through the junction
907 X, outgoing trunk selector 513 X and junction 880 B, to line relay R 760 of junction circuit 50 practically as before.

   The line relay R 760 'of the junction circuit 50 operates according to the pulses of the transmitted digit which energizes the R 810 digit relay which in turn energizes the auxiliary R 620 digit relay. Auxiliary digit relay R 620 in turn triggers the first phase of the stepped action of the Shunt relay R 640, all following the process described above.

   The R 810 digit relay and the R 620 auxiliary digit relay and the R 770 bonding relay remain actuated while the digit is being transmitted. In addition, the line relay R 760 repeats, at contacts 761, the digit pulses transmitted by the trunk line 500 to the automatic switchgear of the local exchange C, so as to cause a corresponding operation of said apparatus *

  <Desc / Clms Page number 250>

 At the end of the transmission of the third routing digit (4) the line relay R 760 is kept actuated,

   which causes the armature of the digit relay R 810 to release after a short interval and that of the armature of the auxiliary digit relay R 620 after another very short time interval * The step-action relay R 640 then accomplishes the second phase of its operation by interrupting, at contacts 641 and 642, the normally closed circuits by means of which the windings 631 and 633 of the repeater 630 were short-circuited * In a similar manner, the four digits 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the digital part of the call number are transmitted by the 17'00 X tractor-recorder to the established repeater. sow of sheets 800 X,

   then retransmitted by said repeater to the junction circuit 50, and from there to the switchgear of the local exchange C. In this way, the final stage of the switchgear of said exchange selects the line which terminates at the requested subscriber station and subjects it to the busy test, in a per se conventional manner.



   At this time, the 1700 X Translator-Recorder and the 1200 X Primary Recorder are released. The 1700 X Primary Recorder, in the meantime, provides for the operation of the 2900 X detector and the transfer of all recorded information to the 800 X file establishment repeater. When the subscriber of the called station of local exchange 0 answers the call, the final switching stage of said exchange reverses the positive and negative potentials on the trunk line 500, so as to give to the left winding of the response relay R 740 of the junction circuit 50, a polarity such that said relay releases its armature. By releasing its armature, the R 740 response relay caused the excitation of the R 610 conversation destination relay.

   By operating the end of conversation relay R 610, the current reversal relay R 730 is excited.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 251>

 
 EMI251.1
 invert by operating, at contacts 751 ,, 752, 7S3 and '73tl, the polarity of junction 800 B with respect to the lower and upper windings of the line relay R 760, so as to trigger the operation of the response R 940 X from the record set repeater 800 X, all in the manner described above. At this time, the 800 X taping repeater timer starts to operate to determine the duration of the current call.

   When the called subscriber of the local exchange C hangs up at the end of the communication, the automatic switching apparatus of said local exchange 0 operates in such a way. reverse the polarity of the trunk line 500, so that that of the left winding of the response relay R 740 of the junction circuit 50 becomes such that said relay again attracts its armature.



  When operating again, the response relay R 740 causes the armature of the end of conversation relay R 610 to release, which in turn causes the de-energization of the current reversal relay R 730 and the polarity. of junction 880 B is again inverted with respect to the lower and upper windings of line relay R 760, all following the process described above. The response relay R 940 of the plug-in repeater 800 X then releases its armature, which stops the timing of the communication as indicated above.



   When the subscriber of the calling normal set hangs up, the loop circuit previously drawn which kept the pulse relay R 960 X of the plug-in repeater 800 X activated is opened and the latter relay is de-energized, this which causes the release of the primary selector 600 X and of the preselector 423 X as explained previously. Furthermore, by releasing its armature, the pulse relay

  <Desc / Clms Page number 252>

 
R 960 X causes the outgoing trunk selector 513 X to return to the rest position, so that the earth which was applied to the control conductor C 885 of the 'junction 880 B e is removed and the loop circuit passing' by conductors 0 881 and C 882 of junction 880 B is interrupted.



   The R 760 line relay and the local selection relay
R 860 of the junction circuit 50 then release their armature.



   By releasing its arture, the line relay R 760 opens, at contacts 761, the loop circuit passing through the left winding of the response relay R 740 and the trunk line.
500 which ends at the local exchange C is released, as is the line which ends at the requested subscriber station. On the other hand, by releasing its armature, the line relay R 760 causes the release of that of the bonding relay R 770 a short time later. By releasing its armature, the sticking relay R 770 causes the de-energization of the step-action relay R 640 and of the end-of-conversation relay R 520, the whole following the process described previously.

   By releasing its armature, the local selection relay R 860 again closes, at contacts 861, the circuit previously drawn for the application of the battery, by means of the winding of the interurban selection relay R 850 to the controlled conductor C 883 of the 880 A junction, which indicates to the third long distance selectors 1406, etc ... which have access to said 880 A junction that it is free.



   The 800 X long distance call card repeater then acts on the 4600 X print controller distributor, so that the 4200 X print controller, for example, can be connected. to the 800 X 'file establishment repeater

  <Desc / Clms Page number 253>

 and all information stored in said repeater is transferred to said 4200 X print controller, all following the process set forth above.

   The print control device 4200 X then actuates the intermediate print control device 5000 X, the card printer 5230 X and the printer-recorder 5240 X. In this way, a card is established for the communication in progress by the 5230 X card printer and a line relating to said call is entered on the record sheet, by the 5240 X printer-recorder, all in the manner described above, given that the set calling normal subscriber
TP of the main exchange B is taxed on a 'flat-rate basis,' the form established includes a tax calculated on said basis.

   In fact, the record and the line of the record sheet established are substantially identical to those relating to the call originating from the normal calling subscriber TP of the main exchange B and intended for a called subscriber station belonging to the exchange. distant D, call handled previously.



     As regards the routing of the call described above between the normal calling station TP of the main exchange B and the called subscriber station of the local exchange C, it can be emphasized that when the trunk circuit 50 is used, it waits for the local exchange C switchgear to connect to the trunk line 500 and, when said switchgear is able to receive a digit to retransmit a delayed transmission signal to the establishment repeater of files 800 X, and that said repeater 800 X retransmits said signal to the recorder-translator 1700 X,

     so that the timekeeper of the 1700 X recorder-translator may have run out if the delayed transmission signal persists for a normal time, such a case

  <Desc / Clms Page number 254>

 which may arise when the switchgear of the local exchange 'C is present at the time in question of a case of total occupation.

   In the event that the 1700 X recorder-translator's timing device has finished its run, the call in question is routed to the operator position responsible for blocked communications 114 X - 11'7 X, as a result of the fact. that the 1700 X Recorder-Translator re-set its routing and charging switch so that routing digits 1 - 1 and 4 are transmitted, all following the process outlined above.



   In addition, when routing the call described above between the calling normal subscriber station TP of the main exchange B and the called subscriber station of the local exchange 0, it may happen that the switchgear of the local exchange C is in the presence either of a case of total occupation or of a case of occupation of the requested line.

   In the event that the final switching stage of the local exchange equipment C finds that the line terminating at the called subscriber station is busy, a busy tone current is retransmitted on the trunk line 500 and by the communication intermediary established, at the requesting normal subscriber station TP, after the release of the recorder-translator 1700X and the primary recorder 1200X, as described above. Then, the calling subscriber of the normal station TP can hang up to interrupt the communication in the manner explained above.



     On the other hand, in the case where one of the intermediate communication stages of the devices of the local exchange C is in the presence of a case of total occupation, the switching stage which is in the presence of this case interrupts the loop circuit which passes through trunk line 500 and -

  <Desc / Clms Page number 255>

 causes the retransmission on said line of a current of, busy tone. Said current is retransmitted by the communication established to the calling subscriber of the normal station TP of the main exchange B, after which said calling subscriber causes the interruption of the communication by hanging up, retort described above.

   On the other hand, in the case where the calling subscriber of the normal station TP fails to interrupt the communication after a reasonable period of time, the call from the calling normal subscriber station TP is routed to the position. 114 X - Il'7 X from the operator responsible for communications blocked by the 1700 X recorder-translator.

   More precisely, when the loop circuit passing through the interurban line 500 is open, the response relay R 740 releases its armature, which causes the excitation of the end of conversation relay R 610 and that of the relay d. 'reversal' of current R 730 in the junction circuit 50, all following the process described above. In operation, the current reversing relay R 730 reverses the polarity of junction 880 B, which causes the energization of the call stop relay R 1320 of the plugging repeater 800 X and , pax continued, releasing the armature of the pulse emission stop relay RA510 of the 1700 X recorder-translator.

   In other words, the delayed transmit signal is retransmitted to; from junction circuit 50 to the 800 X file-setting repeater, then retransmitted by said repeater to the 1700 X recorder-translator, all following the process described above. In the example chosen, any subsequent operation of the recorder-translator 1700!. is inhibited and the timer switch of said recorder causes the call to be routed as a result of the transmission of routing digits 1- 1 and 4 at position 114 X-117 X of the loaded operator

  <Desc / Clms Page number 256>

 blocked communications, following the process described above.

   The subsequent response to the call, by the operator responsible for communications blocked at position 114 X - 117 X and the interruption of the communication takes place as before.



     '' CALL FROM A SHARED-LINE SUBSCRIBER SET
FROM CENTRAI, PRINCIPAL B AND INTENDED FOR A SUBSCRIBER POST OF LOCAL CENTRAL C.



   The routing of a call between a calling shared line subscriber station, such as for example one of the subscriber stations TS1, TS2, TS3 and TS4 which form a shared line at the main exchange 3 to a station of the called subscriber of the local exchange C takes place in a manner substantially identical to that described above in connection with the routing of an originating call. of a normal subscriber station requesting TP from the main exchange B 'and intended for a subscriber station requesting from the local exchange C. Poux do not unduly extend the present description, the routing' of said call will not be described in new.

   However, it should be noted that the operation of the primary 1200 X recorder and the 1700 X recorder-translator for controlling the 2900 X detector, in such a way that it identifies the calling shared line subscriber station ( TS1, TS2, TS3 or TS4) is slightly different from the operation which has just been described with regard to the call coming from the normal calling station TP of the main exchange B. On the other hand, the operation of said primary recorder 1200 X and said 1700 X recorder-translator is substantially identical to that described above with regard to the routing of the call originating from one of the subscriber stations of the shared line TS1, TS2,

   TS3 or TS4 from the main exchange
B and intended for a remote exchange subscriber station D.



     CALL FROM AN AUTHORIZED INTER-URBAN SERVICE SUBSCRIBER POST OF THE B'ET MAIN CENTRAL AND TO A LOCAL C SUBSCRIBER POST:

  <Desc / Clms Page number 257>

 
The routing of a call coming from a subscriber station with authorized long distance service, such as for example the subscriber station TX of the main exchange B, is effected by the intermediary of the subscriber line 401. X and of the preselector 421 X individually associated with this line, as explained previously.



  The 421 X preselector can select the 461 X junction which leads to the 441 X primary selector. The 442 X finder, which belongs individually to the 441 X primary selector, can select the 1200 X primary recorder, all following the process described above.

   The calling subscriber who owns the authorized interurban service set then proceeds to form on his dial the call number of the subscriber set requested from the local exchange C, a number which may be, for example, 456 - 1234. The first and second digits of the code (4 and 5) are recorded in the corresponding devices of the primary recorder 1200 X, so that the distributor of recorder-translators 1600 X designates a free recorder-translator, for example l 1700X recorder-translator, after which said recorder-translator is connected to the 1200X primary recorder, all following the process described above.

   The additional digits of the first and second digits of the call sign recorded in the primary 1200 X recorder are transferred to the 1700 X translator-recorder, and subsequently when the third digit of the call sign (6) and the first digit of the digital part (1) are received by the 1200 X primary recorder and are recorded, their additional digits are transferred to the 1700 X recorder-translator. Subsequently, when the second, third and fourth digits of the digital part (2, 3 and 4) are received by the 1200 X primary recorder, said digits are retransmitted directly to the 1700 X recorder-translator.

   When 1: recorder-, translator 1700 X is connected to the primary recorder 1200 X, the special services relay of the recorder-translator

  <Desc / Clms Page number 258>

   1700 X is actuated, since the primary selector
441 X, 'connected to the primary recorder 1200 X has a jumper which sbnnte the resistor in series with the upper winding of the transfer relay to said primary recorder.



  * The recording of the three digits of the call sign (4,5 and 6), in the corresponding devices of the recorder-translator
1700 X provides a selective setting of the composite code switches of said recorder-translator, as explained previously.



   In this way, the composite code switch acting in combination with the activated special service relay sets a corresponding setting of the 1700 X register-translator routing and charging switch. More specifically, the 1700 X register-translator switch. composite code occupies a position which would determine the setting of the routing and charging switch allowing the transmission of routing digits 3, 3 and
4, operation which normally occurs when the special services relay is not in its working position, for example when the call from the normal subscriber station TP is routed to the requested subscriber station. of the local exchange C, as explained above.

   However, since the special services relay occupies this working position in the example chosen, said setting of the composite code brings the routing and charging switch to a new position which determines the routing digits. , 3 and 4.

   In other words, the recording of the digits of the code 4, 5 and 6 of the calling normal subscriber station TP (without operation of the special services relay) causes the recorder-translator 1700 X to determine the digits. routing 3, 3 and 4, while the registration of digits 4,5 and 6 of the calling subscriber extension with authorized long distance service TX (with activation of the special services relay) is such that

  <Desc / Clms Page number 259>

 the 1700 X recorder-translator determines the forward digits 5, 3 and 4.

   Routing digits 3, 3, and 4 cause the call to be retransmitted through the 800X set-up repeater, but routing digits 5, 3, and 4 cause the call to be retransmitted. of the call through the regular repeater 451 X. Consequently, the first call indicated is the subject of a record while the call studied here does not require one. to return to the call considered, the 1700 X recorder-translator transmits the three routing digits 5, 3 and 4, then the four digits of the digital part of the call number 1, 2, 3 and 4 .

   The primary selector 441 X, under the control of the first routing number 5, selects the group of junctions including in particular the junction 471 X which leads to the group of ordinary repeaters comprising in particular the ordinary repeater 451 X, then selects from this group a free junction. Assuming that the primary selector 441 X precisely selects the 471 X junction which terminates at the regular repeater 451 X, the second routing digit 3 is transmitted from the pulse recorder to the regular repeater 451 X and retransmitted to the corresponding outgoing trunk selector 511 X.

   In this way, the outgoing trunk selector 511 X selects the group of trunks comprising in particular the junction 880 B which leads to the group of trunk circuits comprising in particular the trunk circuit 50. Assuming that the outgoing trunk selector 511 X precisely selects the junction 880 B which ends at the junction circuit 50, this junction circuit 50 acts in the manner explained above and sends a delayed transmission signal back to the ordinary repeater 451 X by taking the command, pax the trunk line 500 of the automatic switchgear of the local exchange C.

   When the automatic switchgear of the

  <Desc / Clms Page number 260>

 local exchange C is associated with the interurban line 500 of the
As explained above, the junction circuit 50 stops the application of the delayed transmission signal to the ordinary repeater 451 X.

   When the ordinary repeater 451 X receives the delayed transmission signal, it retransmits said signal to the recorder-translator 1700 X then, when said delayed transmission signal is no longer applied to the ordinary repeater 451 X, it is also suppressed on the 1700 X recorder-translator, the operation of the 451 X ordinary repeater, of the junction circuit 50, and of the recorder-translator
1700 X being in this respect identical to that of the 800 X file establishment repeater described in detail above.



   The 1700 X recorder-translator then transmits the third routing digit 4 and the four digits of the digital part of the call number 1, 2, 3 and 4. In this way, the switchgear of the exchange local 0 selects the line which terminates at the requested subscriber station of said exchange, and immediately proceeds to the occupancy test of said line. Assuming that the station of the called subscriber of local exchange 0 is free at the time in question, the final switching stage of
The apparatus of said .central applies an inrush current to the line leading to said station.

   Then, when the subscriber of the called station of the local exchange 8 answers the call, the final switching stage of the apparatuses of said exchange interrupts the application of the inrush current to the line terminating at said station and causes the reversal of the polarity of the trunk line 500, which acts on the junction circuit 50. in the manner previously explained. The junction circuit 50 then causes the polarity of junction 880 B to be reversed, so that the regular repeater 451 X receives monitoring signals from the junction.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 261>

 answer and establish a telephone call between the calling subscriber station with authorized long distance service TX of the main exchange B and the called subscriber station of the local exchange C.

   The interruption of the communication described above is under the control of the calling subscriber. This interruption is caused when the said subscriber hangs up by determining the release of the ordinary repeater 451 X, that of the primary selector 441 X and of the preselector 421 X as well as of the outgoing long distance selector 511 X and of the trunk circuit 50, and finally of the devices ùe switching of the local exchange C. The line which terminates at the station of the called subscriber is then free again.

   Of course, the described call is not the object of the establishment of a file, given that the ordinary repeater 451 X is not associated with the printing control device 422 X, etc ..., the stations of subscribers with authorized long distance service having the possibility of freely initiating calls to the subscriber stations of the local exchange C.



     . CALL ATTEMPT FROM A SUBSCRIBER POST A FORBIDDEN INTER-URBAN SERVICE BELONGING TO MAIN CENTER B AND DESTINED TO A SUBSCRIBER EXPOSURE OF LOCAL CENTRAL C OR REMOTE CENTRAL D.



   Only calls that do not require translation by a recorder-translator can be. launched entirely under the control of a calling device of a subscriber station with forbidden long distance service belonging to the main exchange B. For example, the calling station TD of the main exchange:

  5 can carry local calls in the area served by the main exchange B and other calls intended for very neighboring exchanges having respectively the codes 841, 842, 843 etc ... However, the subscriber station with long distance service prohibited TD from the main exchange B cannot initiate any call to the local exchange C whose code is 456 or to the remote exchange D whose code is 279 given that

  <Desc / Clms Page number 262>

 these two types of calls must be translated by a recorder-translator.

   It will first of all be assumed that the subscriber of the forbidden long distance service set TD of the main exchange B initiates a call, that the preselector 422 X belonging individually to the subscriber line 404 X selects the junction 461 X which ends. to the primary selector 441 X and that the researcher
F 442 X belonging, individually to the primary selector 441 X selects the primary recording 1200 X, the whole following the process described above.

   On the other hand, it will be assumed that the subscriber of the interurban sexvice set prohibited, TD attempts to initiate a long distance call at medium distance by dialing the call number of a subscriber set belonging to the local exchange C (i.e. the area code numbers 4,5 and
6) or at the remote exchange D (ie the code digits 2, 7 and 9). In both cases, when the first and second digits of the first, code 4 and 5 or the first and second digits of the second code (2 and 7) are formed on the call dial of the TD forbidden long distance subscriber station , said digits are recorded in the corresponding devices of the primary 1200 X recorder in the manner explained above.

   The TD forbidden long distance sexvice subscriber station calling device is of special construction, as previously described, such that two positive pulses are transmitted by the associated subscriber line 404 X on each actuation of said app device. el by the auxiliary springs 1308. In particular, when the disc of said take-off device is actuated, the set of auxiliary springs
1308 applies a positive potential to the conductors of the subscriber line 404 X and then removes this potential while the set of impulse springs 1307 is closed. Then, when the call disc is released, the impulse spring set 1307 is actuated to transmit the digit.

   When the game of

  <Desc / Clms Page number 263>

 pulse springs 1307 is at. closed again after transmission of the digit, the auxiliary spring set 1308 is actuated again and applies earth to the conductors of the subscriber line 404 X, then the earth is removed again.



   Consequently, in the examples chosen, during the recording of the second digit of the code (5 or 7) depending on the case in the second recording device of
 EMI263.1
 In: ce [; Í8treu: r-p: cimai: ce 1200 X, two of said device's shared line relays are activated, as discussed above. The 1200 X primary recorder then controls the dis-
 EMI263.2
 eniegist tributor: thosea-t2: aàucteuis 1600 X, so that a free recorder-fraàuc.tor, such as for example the en :: recorder-translator 1700 X, is connected to the primary recorder 1200 , X, the whole following the process described above.

   When the 1700 X recorder-translator is connected to the 1200 X primary recorder, the special services relay of said 1700 X-translator is activated, since the 441 X primary selector connected to the 1200 X primary recorder comprises a jumper multiplied to the resistance in series with the upper winding of the transfer relay of said recorder, as explained previously. In addition, the working position of the two shared line relays of the primary 1200 X recorder determines a corresponding setting of the shared line switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator, as explained previously.

   In the 1700 X recorder-translator when simultaneously the special service relay is in its working position while the shared line switch is brought to the position indicated a circuit is closed for the activation of the long distance service relay prohibited in the '1700 X recorder-translator, When operating], said relay determines an arbitrary setting of the routing and charging switch of said recorder-translator. A particular route is then selected based on the route numbers

  <Desc / Clms Page number 264>

 
1-1 and 6, without taking into account the setting of the composite code switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator. Said 1700 X'-recorder-translator then transmits the three routing digits 1-1 and 6 .

   The primary selector 441 X is controlled according to the first routing digit 1 and selects the group of special service selectors comprising in particular the special service selector 503 X, then in this group a free special services selector. Assuming that the primary selector 441 X precisely selects the special services selector 503 X, the second forwarding digit l causes the special services selector 503 X to operate and then return to the rest position, as explained above. .

   Subsequently, the special services selector 503 X is sensitive to the third routing digit (6) and * selects the corresponding group of trunks leading to the operator position 114 X - 117 X responsible for blocked communications, then selects in this group a free trunk, which indicates to said operator that the call has been routed to her due to the fact that the subscriber with a banned long distance set has attempted to initiate a call to an exchange, such as for example the local exchange 0 or the remote exchange D.

   The operator in position 114 X - 117 X then answers said call and informs the subscriber who owns the 'TD station' that long distance calls of this type are not authorized with the set he has. The release of the primary selector 441 X and the setting of the special services selector 503 X are caused by the subscriber of the calling station TD when he hangs up his receiver on the switch hook provided for this purpose, in a manner classic.



   It may be noted in passing that the subscriber of the set TD of the main exchange B can obtain communications with subscriber stations belonging to the local exchange 0 or to the exchange.

  <Desc / Clms Page number 265>

 removes D by first bringing his call to the trunk switchboard 11 Y and asking the operator of this switchboard to extend this call to the remote switchboard D, in the event that said operator considers that such an extension is possible depending on the service available to the TD set subscriber.

   
 EMI265.1
 INTEhCEPTION OF OTHER CALLS
It will now be assumed that a call has been initiated by any subscriber station of the main exchange B, such as for example the normal subscriber station TP that the preselector 425 X associated with the subscriber line 407 X which leads to the calling normal subscriber station TP has selected junction 462 X which
 EMI265.2
 leads to, electeui piiL <18iïe 0 X and that the finder F 610 which individually belongs to the primary selector 600 X has selected the primary recorder, 1200 X. At this moment, said primary recorder 1200 X is able to: receive all the complementary digits;.: : can be formed on the dial by
 EMI265.3
 the subscriber demc) ndeu. 2 to pO:

  .3te normal TP, said digits indicating either a local call requiring no translation or a long distance call requiring translation, as explained above. It will be assumed, on the other hand, that the subscriber of the normal calling station TP forms on his dial several digits less than the total number required, which indicates that the call must be translated by a recorder-translator.

   When the first and second digits of the code are recorded in the 1200 X primary recorder, the 1600 X recorder-translator distributor is ordered in such a way that it designates a free recorder-translator, such as: as for example the 1700 X recorder-translator. At this moment, the 1700 X recorder-translator is connected to the 1200 X primary recorder as explained previously. When the 1700 X recorder-translator is connected to the 1200 X primary recorder, the operation of the timing device

  <Desc / Clms Page number 266>

 of the 1700 X recorder-translator is triggered, all following the process described above.

   In the example chosen, the complements of the first four digits recorded in the primary recorder 1200 X are transmitted to the recorder-translator 1700 X and recorded by it and the fifth, etc. digits received by the primary recorder 1200 X are transmitted directly to the 1700 X recorder-translator and recorded by it. However, in the example chosen, due to the fact that the number of complements recorded in the 1700 X recorder-translator is insufficient, the latter unit cannot function completely to transmit the necessary routing digits and the transfer digits. the digital part ensuring the actuation of the series of starting switches for the establishment of the desired communication.

   Consequently,
The 1700 X recorder-translator transmits the forwarding digits, the dialing digits if any, and the digits of the digital part of the call number that have been recorded, all following the process described above .



  However, the 1700 X Recorder-Translator is not released in the manner previously described, due to the fact that its. full operation is not possible given the absence of certain additional figures. The result is that the 1700 X recorder-translator is maintained in its operating position after transmission of all the recorded digits and that it remains connected to the 1200 X primary recorder for a period of time. of 30 seconds.

   Normal operation of the 1700 Recorder-Translator. requires only a small fraction of said time interval and, in the event that said i700 X recorder-translator remains connected to the 1200 X primary recorder for thirty seconds, the timer switch acts to return to the position rest the recorder-translator 1700 X.

   At this time, the switch

  <Desc / Clms Page number 267>

 routing and charging is released and returned to its idle position, and it establishes an arbitrary routing path with routing digits 1, 1 and 4, so that the primary selector 600 X and the service selector special 503 X are actuated in the manner explained above and route the call considered vex position 114 X - 117 X of the attendant in charge of communications blocked by a corresponding trunk group, which indicates to said operator that the calling subscriber has omitted to enter some of the necessary digits on his dial or that the output switches have reached a blocked switching stage,

   so that the delayed transmission signal has been received by the associated recorder-translator during an abnormal time interval, as discussed previously. The operator at position 114 X - 1117 X responsible for blocked communications then answers the call and advises the calling subscriber of the normal TP set of the reasons for the blocking. The calling subscriber then interrupts the call established in the manner explained above by hanging up his receiver on his switching hook.



   It will again be assumed that a call has been initiated by any subscriber station of the main exchange B, such as for example the normal subscriber station TP, that the preselector 423 X associated with the subscriber line 407 X which ends at said station TP a selects junction 462 X which ends at primary selector 600 X and that finder F 610 X belonging individually to primary selector 600 X has connected primary recorder 1200 X to said primary selector.

   It will also be assumed that the subscriber of the normal station TP forms on his dial the call number of a subscriber station corresponding to a long distance call requiring translation. When the first and second digits of the area code are recorded in the 1200 X primary recorder, the recorder-translator distributor

  <Desc / Clms Page number 268>

 1600 X is ordered in such a way that it designates a free recorder-translator. such as for example the recorder-translator 1.700 X. The 1700 X recorder-translator is therefore linked to the 1200 X primary recorder.

   The complements 'of the first four digits received by 1', primary recorder 1200 X are transferred to the recorder-translator 1700 X and the other three digits are retransmitted directly by the primary recorder 1200 X to the recorder-translator 1700 X, as explained previously. The composite code switch and the routing and charging switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator are actuated, and after transmission of the first routing digit, the detector start relay is in turn actuated. When operating, said relay causes the operation of the detector 2900 X, all according to the process described previously.

   In the event that the 2900 X detector fails to detect the branch pin of the 407 X subscriber line which terminates at the calling normal subscriber station TP after two complete cycles of operation, and therefore after two com- plete attempts Completely in the manner explained previously, the 2900 X detector causes the activation of the detection fault relay of the 1700 X logger-translator. When operating, the detection fault relay causes the release of the 2900 X detector and that of the routing and charging switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator, and further determines the arbitrary setting of said switch, so as to establish a routing path comprising the digits 1, 1 and 5.



  In addition, the 1700 X recorder-translator causes the primary selector 600 X to be released and then transmits the routing digits 1, 1 and 5. In this way, the primary selector 600 X and the selector; special services

  <Desc / Clms Page number 269>

 503 X are again actuated in a manner substantially identical to that described above.

   More precisely, the special service selector 503 X routes the call considered on a free trunk -to the corresponding group of operator position 114 X - 117 X responsible for blocked communications, which indicates to said operator that the The interested call was routed due to a malfunction of the 2900 X detector upon detection of the branch line pin of the subscriber line terminating at the calling subscriber station.



   The operator at position 114 X - 117 X then answers the call and can advise the calling subscriber to interrupt the current call and to attempt a new routing of the long distance call. The interruption of the established communication takes place as before when the subscriber of the calling station hangs up.



   It will again be assumed that a call has been initiated by any subscriber station of the main exchange B such as for example the normal subscriber station TP, that the preselector 423 X associated with the subscriber line 407 X which ends at the normal calling station TP has selected the 462 X junction which ends at the primary selector 600 X, and that the finder F 610 X belonging individually to the primary selector 600 X has selected the primary register 1200 X. Under these conditions, we Suppose further that the subscriber of the normal telephone set TP forms on his call dial, as the number of the subscriber set, three code digits which in fact do not correspond to any real exchange.

   In other words, the subscriber of the calling station TP forms a non-existent call number. When the first and second digits of the callsign are recorded in the 1200 X primary recorder, the 1600 X recorder-translator dispenser is controlled in such a way that it designates a recorder-translator, such as, for example, the recorder. - 1700 X translator which is connected

  <Desc / Clms Page number 270>

 to the primary recorder 1200 X. After this oonnection, the primary recorder 1200 X transmits the complements of the first four digits recorded to the recorder-translator 1700 x and directly retransmits the other digits to the recorder-tra, driver 1700 X, all in the manner described above.



  The composite code switch of the 1700 X recorder-translator is set according to the complements of the first three digits of the recorded code and takes a position corresponding to a non-existent code. In this way, when the operation of the routing and charging switch is triggered, no marking potential is applied to said switch from the composite code switch, so that the routing and charging switch is activated. actuated to its extreme coordinate positions, which arbitrarily selects the routing path comprising the digits 1, 1. and 7 in the manner previously explained.

   The 1700X recorder-translator then proceeds to transmit these three digits, so as to trigger the operation of the primary selector 600 X and of the special services selector 503 X. In this way, the special services selector 503 X selects a free trunk in the corresponding group. which results in the operator position 114 X - 117 X in charge of communications blocked, which indicates to said operator that the transmitted call has been blocked due to the fact that the calling subscriber has formed a non-existent code on its call dial.

   The operator from position 114 X - 117 X then answers the call and advises the calling subscriber that the code formed by him $ 'does not exist and that he must interrupt the established call and attempt to route again. the long distance call this time using the real number indicated in the directory.



  The interruption of the communication takes place in the conventional manner when the calling subscriber of the TP set hangs up his receiver on the switching hook provided for this purpose.


    

Claims (1)

CONCLUSION: From the foregoing, it is evident that the invention makes it possible to establish an automatic telephony system comprising advanced switching apparatus ensuring the routing of long distance long distance calls from the toll switchboard of a. remote automatic exchange, through the intermediary of a main automatic exchange which serves as a transit point to subscriber stations belonging to automatic exchanges served by said main exchange. The system of the invention also allows the routing of long-distance interurban calls from an automatic trunk calling board belonging to the main exchange to subscriber stations of other exchanges, and the routing. long distance interurban calls from subscriber stations of the main exchange see subscriber stations of other exchanges. Long-distance long distance calls from the remote exchange and the main exchange and medium-distance long distance calls from the main exchange are routed through the same group of trunk lines connecting the main exchange to the other exchanges. These trunk lines include trunk circuits capable of retransmitting deferred call pulses and deferred transmission pulses by the originating exchanges, until the switching devices of these other exchanges are able to receive digits. In addition, the originating switches which terminate at the remote exchange trunk board are sensitive to the receipt of a delayed dial pulse from one of the trunk circuits giving a corresponding indication to the operator of the interurban switchboard. The original switches which terminate at the automatic trunk call panel of the main center 1, when they receive a delayed transmission pulse. <Desc / Clms Page number 272> originating from one of the trunk circuits, stop the operation of a pulse recorder-transmitter which can be controlled from the automatic trunk call panel of the main exchange. The original switches which terminate at the calling subscriber station of the main exchange, when they receive a delayed transmission pulse from one of the trunk circuits, stop the operation of a recorder. Normal pulse transmitter which can be 'controlled' by the calling subscriber station at the main exchange. Finally, high-speed long-distance calls originating 1 at the long-distance switchboard of the remote exchange and long-distance long-distance calls originating at the automatic long-distance switchboard of the main exchange are charged using forms established by the annotating the two long distance tables indicated. On the other hand, the long distance calls at medium distance, coming from the toll stations of the main exchange are charged and recorded by automatic devices for establishing cards and recording. trement provided for this purpose to the main automatic central 'It goes without saying that, without departing from the scope of the invention, it is possible to make modifications to the embodiments described according to the applications envisaged, this modifications being obvious to technicians . <Desc / Clms Page number 273> CLAIMS S 1.- Telephone device comprising an operator panel, subscriber stations, an automatic switching device comprising cascading adages, primary and secondary recording mechanisms, components which can be controlled from this operator panel for the recording of digits in the primary recording mechanism and for the connection of this mechanism to the switchgear, components which can be controlled by a calling subscriber for the recording of digits in this secondary recording mechanism and for the connection of said mechanism to the switchgear, each of these recording mechanisms becoming active when it is connected to this switching device and then controlling the progressive triggering of the various switching stages according to the recorded figures, and of the organs sensitive to a predetermined operation of an intermediate switching stage of said apparatus to defer subsequent control from that of the recording mechanisms which is connected. 2.- Device according to claim 1, wherein there is provided a central comprising an operator panel and subscriber stations, a central comprising an automatic switchgear, a trunk line at an average distance between these exchanges, a first and a second pulse recorder-transmitter, parts being controllable from the EMI273.1 oparatr ice panel for the recording of digits in the first recorder- and for its connection to the inter-city line, devices that can be controlled from one of the stations <Desc / Clms Page number 274> subscribers making a call for the recording of digits in the second recorder and for its connection to the long distance line, each of the pulse recorders-transmitters becoming active after its connection to this trunk line and then transmitting on this line switching command charges corresponding to the recorded digits, devices sensitive to the connection of one of these records. pulse recorders-transmitters to the trunk line and ensuring the connection of the switchgear to this line and devices sensitive to the connection and causing the emission of pulses by whichever of the recorder-transmitters is connected, which controls the operation of the switchgear via the trunk line 3. - Device according to claim 2, in which each of the exchanges comprises an automatic switching device, each of the pulse recorders-transmitters becomes active when it is connected to the first of the switching devices and transmits to it switching control pulses corresponding to the registered digits, so that the first switchgear can be actuated to attack the trunk line which connects the two exchanges, other devices sensitive to this attack causing the transmission of the impulses to cease by that of the pulse recorders-transmitters which is connected and causing the connection of the second switchgear to the trunk line, and other devices sensitive to said connection triggering again the transmission of the pulses by the last mentioned recorder-transmitter, which controls the operation of the second switchgear by means of the trunk line. 4. - Device according to one of claims 2 or <Desc / Clms Page number 275> 3, in which devices sensitive to the operation of the first automatic switchgear attack the trunk line and apply a delayed transmission pulse to it in return, and devices sensitive to the connection of the second automatic switchgear to the trunk line stop this application. , devices triggered during this return application of the delayed transmission pulse to the first switching device delaying the transmission of the pulses by that of the recorder-transmitters which is connected, which consequently delays the transmission of the pulses switch control on the trunk line. 5.- Device according to one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the operator panel comprises a signaling device and an operator position responsible for blocked communications, devices triggered when the first recorder-transmitter of pulses is connected to the first switchgear, devices sensitive to the return application of the delayed transmission pulse during a given time interval preventing further operation of the first recorder and activating the signaling device, other devices triggered when the second pulse recorder-transmitter is connected to said first switchgear, devices sensitive to the return application of this delayed transmission pulse during a given time interval release the first switchgear, then actuate it again, so that it routes a communication between this station. subscriber and the position of operator responsible for blocked communications. 6.- Device according to claim 1, in which the operator panel is provided with a device <Desc / Clms Page number 276> call device and a deferred transmission impulse device, components which can be controlled from the attendant panel ensuring the connection of this call device to the switchgear, the call device being able to be selectively operated according to the different digits transmitted and, when connected to the switchgear, can determine a corresponding progressive operation of the different stages of this switchgear, devices sensitive to a predetermined operation of an intermediate switching stage of this apparatus actuating the deferred transmission pulse device in the case where the call device is connected to it and differing any other operation of the recording mechanism if it is connected to it. 7.- Telephone device comprising a first exchange with an operator panel equipped with a call device and a dialing signaling device, a second exchange comprising subscriber stations, a third exchange equipped with 'an automatic switchgear, a long-distance trunk line connecting the first and second indicated exchanges, a medium-distance trunk line connecting the second and third indicated exchanges, components that can be controlled from this operator panel and ensuring the connection of this calling device to the long-distance trunk line and the connection of the long-distance trunk line to the medium-distance trunk line, this calling device being able to be actuated selectively according to the various digits and, when it is connected via the intermediary of the long distance trunk line and the medium distance trunk line, being able to apply pulses of corresponding switching control, and it <Desc / Clms Page number 277> A pulse recorder-transmitter is also provided, devices which can be operated from a calling subscriber station and ensuring the recording of digits in the pulse recorder-transmitter and its connection to said trunk line at medium distance, this recorder is activated after connection so as to transmit on the line switching control pulses corresponding to the recorded digits, devices sensitive to the connection of the long-distance trunk line to the medium-distance trunk line and to the connection of the pulse recorder-transmitter to the middle-distance trunk line and ensuring the connection of the equipment switching to this line, other devices sensitive to the last connection indicated activate the dialing signaling device if the long-distance trunk line is connected to it and triggering the emission of pulses by the recorder-transmitter if it is connected to the last unit indicated. 8.- Device according to claim 7, wherein the operator panel is provided with a deferred transmission signaling device, members sensitive to attack by the first switchgear of the trunk line. at a medium distance trigger the operation of the deferred transmission signaling device in the event that the long-distance trunk line is connected to this device and prevent any subsequent transmission of pulses by the recorder-transmitter in the event that the latter ci is connected to this unit and ensures the connection of the second switchgear <Desc / Clms Page number 278> to the long distance trunk line) other devices sensitive to the last connection indicated stop the operation of the deferred transmission signaling device in the event that the long-distance trunk line is connected to this device and again trigger the transmission of the pulses by the recorder-transmitter in the case where the latter is connected to these components, so that the operation of the second switchgear can then be controlled via the interurban line at a medium distance. 9.- Device according to one of claims 7 or 8, wherein members sensitive to the operation of the first switchgear attack the inter-urban line at a medium distance and apply in return a delayed transmission pulse by causing the connection. -ion of the second switchgear to the mid-distance inter-urban line, devices sensitive to the connection of the second switchgear to the mid-distance line stop the application of the delayed transmission pulse, and devices controlled during the return of the pulse to the first switchgear actuate the deferred transmission signaling device in the event that the long-distance trunk line is connected to these devices and delay the transmission of pulses by the recorder-transmitter in the case where the latter is connected to said devices, so as to defer the transmission of the switching control pulses on the trunk line at medium distance. 10. - Device according to claim 1, wherein there is also provided a junction cirauit comprising an arrival junction and a departure junction, members controlled by one of the subscriber stations when ' it initiates a call recording digits in the recorder- <Desc / Clms Page number 279> transmitter and connecting this recorder to the incoming junction, after which the recorder transmits on this arrival junction switching control pulses corresponding to the recorded digits, organs sensitive to the last indicated connection reversing the normal polarity of the conductors of the incoming junction and causing the connection of the switchgear to the outgoing junction, devices sensitive to this last connection restoring the normal polarity of the conductors, devices controlled during the inversion of the normal polarity of the conductors of the incoming junction deferring the emission of the pulses by the recorder-transmitter connected to this junction, and other devices included in the junction circuit and responsive to the switching control pulses received by the incoming junction from the recorder-transmitter retransmitting corresponding switching control pulses on the outgoing junction, to the switchgear connected to said junction. 11. Device according to claim 10, in which members controlled by the calling station connect the recorder-translator to the first automatic switchgear, and members responsive to the operation of the first automatic switchgear. connect the second to the output junction. 12.- Device according to one of claims 10 or 11, wherein the call corresponding to the recorded digits is routed from the calling station to the called station via the first automatic switchgear, the junction circuit and the second apparatus. automatic switching. 13.- Device according to one of claims 10 to 12 wherein sensitive members to the initial emission <Desc / Clms Page number 280> tial of pulses by the recorder-transmitter activate the first automatic switchgear to transmit a call from the calling station to the junction circuit, other devices sensitive to this transmission inverting the normal polarity of the line conductors of this circuit in relation to the automatic switchgear and causing the connection of the second automatic switchgear to the junction circuit, and devices sensitive to the continuation of the emission of pulses by the transceiver activating the second switchgear for transmitting the call to the called station. 14.- Device according to one of claims 10 to 13, wherein there is provided a timing device, elements sensitive to the response by the called station triggering a timing operation of this device, and sensitive devices hanging up. of the called station causing said timing operation to cease. 15.- Device according to one of claims 10 to 14, wherein members sensitive to the reversal of the polarity of the de'ligne conductors of the junction circuit relative to the first switchgear and the return of these line conductors at normal polarity ensure the triggering and stopping of the timing device, respectively. 16.- Device according to one of claims 10 to 15, wherein the members sensitive to the reversal during a given time interval of the polarity of the conductors of the junction circuit with respect to the first automatic switchgear release this apparatus. and then actuate it again with a view to routing a call originating from the calling station and intended for the operator position of blocked communications. <Desc / Clms Page number 281> 17.- Device according to one of claims 10 to 16, wherein the members actuated when the second switching device is in the presence of a case of total occupation producing the polarity reversal, rity and apply a busy tone current on the trunk circuit. 18.- Device according to claim 1, wherein the junction circuit is in two directions and comprises two junctions, a response relay, members sensitive to the attack of one of the junctions and ensuring the connection of the relay. response to the other junction, devices responsive to switching control pulses received by the first junction and repeating corresponding switching pulses at the other junction, devices responsive to the response to a call routed by this another junction and controlling the response relay, and organs sensitive to this command and reversing the polarity of the conductors of the first junction. 19. -Device according to claim 18, wherein the members sensitive to the control of the response relay transmit a response pulse on the control conductor of the first incoming junction in the case where the junction circuit occupies a first position. setting, and reverse the polarity of the conductors of the second incoming junction in the event that the junction circuit occupies a second setting position * 20.- Device according to one of claims 18 or 19, wherein the members sensitive to the attack of the incoming junction apply a return pulse on this junction, which indicates that the switching control pulses should not be. transmitted by the incoming junction to the junction circuit, and cause the connection of the switching apparatus to the starting junction, of the elements sensitive to, this connection exercising a first control of a relay, elements sensitive to this first control making <Desc / Clms Page number 282> ceasing the application of this pulse to the incoming junction, devices sensitive to the response to a call routed by the switchgear exerting a second control of the relay, devices sensitive to this command applying in return a response pulse on the incoming junction, devices sensitive to the termination of the communication routed by the switchgear exercising a third control on this relay, and organs sensitive to this third command applying in return an end-of-conversation impulse to the arrival jonotion. 21. - Device according to one of claims 18 to 20, wherein the relay is designed so that, during the first command, it attracts its armature, during the second command, it releases it, and when from the third command he attracts her again. 22. - Device according to one of claims 18 to 21, wherein responsive members respectively to the initial transmissions of the first and second recorder-transmitters actuate the first switchgear, so as to carry out the communications respectively from from the calling operator panel and from the calling subscriber station to said trunk circuit. 23. Device according to one of claims 18 to 22, in which members respectively sensitive to the answering and hanging up operations of the called subscriber station send corresponding end-of-conversation pulses to the trunk line, and devices sensitive to the end of oonversation pulse selectively actuating the signaling equipment in the case where the communication passes through the first switching equipment, and selectively actuating the timing device in the event that communication goes through the second switchgear. <Desc / Clms Page number 283> 24.- Device according to one of claims 18 to 23, in which devices sensitive to the routing of a communication on the trunk line through the intermediary of the second switchgear transmit certain information relating to this communication, including an indication of the duration provided by the timing device, and organs are provided to record the information collected. 25.- Device according to one of claims 18 to 24, in which members sensitive to the end-of-conversation pulses applied in return to the junction line selectively actuate the signaling device when the communication passes through the table. operator and selectively actuate the timing device in the event that this communication concerns the first calling subscriber station. 26.- Device according to one of claims 18 to 25, in which members sensitive to, the return application of the delayed transmission pulse to the junction line delay the transmission of the switching control pulses. 27.- Device according to claim 1, wherein the operator panel is provided with several junctions which terminate on call switches, devices that can be controlled from the operator panel allow the routing of a communication by means of the call switch of one of the junctions, and devices which can be controlled from a calling subscriber station allow the routing of the communication from the calling station. 28.- Device 'according to one of claims 1 or 27, wherein members comprising the first recorder-transmitter of pulses transmit the communication from the operator panel by 1 through the switch <Desc / Clms Page number 284> call from one of the junctions in this table and through the intermediary of the first switchgear, the trunk line and the second switchgear to a subscriber station, devices comprising a second recorder- transmitter ensuring the transmission of the communication from a calling station via the first automatic switching device, the trunk line and the second automatic switching device, to the called station. 29.- Device according to one of the claims 1, 27 or 28, in which a communication can be established using the devices listed above between a calling subscriber station, the operator panel and a 'called subscriber, or even more, directly between a calling subscriber station and a called subscriber station, passing through the first switchgear, the trunk line and the second switchgear.